20+ Easy Beef Recipes That Anyone Can Make - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/dinner/red-meat/ Tried & True Recipes ยท No Refined Sugars Mon, 12 Jan 2026 18:03:48 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.3 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/cropped-cropped-Foolproof-Living-Favicon-image-resized-32x32.png 20+ Easy Beef Recipes That Anyone Can Make - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/dinner/red-meat/ 32 32 Stuffed Onions with Ground Beef and Rice https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-onions/ https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-onions/#respond Wed, 10 Dec 2025 15:27:48 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=85205 Ingredients You’ll Need If you’ve been following along on social media, you’ve probably seen me testing this recipe quite a…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

Growing up in Türkiye, our holiday tables looked a little different than the ones we have here in the US. Kebabs were always on the menu, but whenever my mom wanted to make something special, she made these ground beef stuffed onions, or soğan dolması as we call it.

It has been years since I last made them, but seeing their recent popularity on social media made me pull out my mom’s handwritten notes and bring this recipe back to life.

Here are a few things that make this version special:

  • It has roots in Turkish cooking. There are many versions of stuffed onions across the Mediterranean and the Middle East, but the Turkish style uses pomegranate molasses to give the dish a gentle, sweet-and-tangy balance.
  • The ingredients are simple. Pomegranate molasses might sound unfamiliar, but most grocery stores now carry it. Everything else is a pantry staple, and I included plenty of substitutions so you can make it work with what you have on hand.
  • It looks impressive, but it is easier than it seems. Once you soften the onions and get the hang of rolling them, the rest of the process is surprisingly approachable and very forgiving.

If you have never made stuffed onions before, I think you will be pleasantly surprised by how doable this dish actually is.

Ingredients You’ll Need

If you’ve been following along on social media, you’ve probably seen me testing this recipe quite a bit. As I worked through each round, I learned a few things about choosing the right ingredients.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

The exact measurements are in the recipe card below, but these are the notes I kept from all that testing:

Onions: Look for onions that are firm, fresh, and heavy for their size. Yellow onions work beautifully because they naturally become sweeter as they cook, but Vidalia onions and Walla Walla onions will also work if you want an even milder flavor. Red onions are also an option, but stuffed red onions are slightly sweeter than yellow onions.

Pro tip: In the recipe card, you’ll see four medium onions. If you’re making this for the first time, go ahead and buy one extra just in case. Depending on the size, four to five onions usually give me about 20 to 22 usable layers, which is right around what you’ll need for this stuffed onion recipe.

Ground beef: Fat equals flavor, so I like using 85/15 ground beef because it stays juicy and tender. If you prefer something richer, use 80/20 ground beef. 

You can also use lamb if you like, or half lamb and half beef, which is pretty traditional. If you are looking for a lighter alternative, though not traditional, ground chicken would also work, but be aware that it would have a slightly different flavor profile.

White rice: I’m using long-grain white rice here, the everyday enriched kind that you can find in most grocery stores. 

My mom always rinsed the rice under cold water until it ran clear, so I do that too, but I know some people prefer not to wash their rice, and that’s perfectly fine.

Some people soak their rice before using it, which helps it cook a little faster, but since we are using a rather small amount, I do not think that it is necessary. 

Alternatively, medium bulgur wheat can be a good substitute for rice. It would have a distinct earthy flavor profile, but it would still be delicious.

Pomegranate molasses: Can you make it without it? You surely can. But, should you? Absolutely not, because pomegranate molasses takes these stuffed onions to another level, giving them the signature slightly sweet-and-sour taste. So, do not skip it.

Pro Tip: When shopping for it, look for a brand that uses 100% pomegranate juice and no added sugars. If you can’t find it in your local grocery stores’ Middle Eastern section, look for it online. My favorite one is this Pomegranate Molasses.

Red pepper paste: This is known as biber salçası in Turkish cooking. You can find mild or hot versions, and both work here. If you can’t find it, you can use an equal amount of tomato paste as a substitute, and it will still be delicious.

Most Middle Eastern supermarkets carry it, but if you can’t find it there, you can buy it online. I like Oncu Turkish Mild Pepper Paste, which has great depth without being overly spicy.

Spices: This part of the recipe is the most flexible, and you can get as creative as you want. I use ground cumin, dried mint, black pepper, and red pepper flakes for a little heat.

If you can’t get your hands on dried mint, you can omit using it or use a tablespoon of chopped fresh mint instead.

How to Make Stuffed Onions

If this is your first time making stuffed onions with meat, and it looks like a lot of work, let me assure you, it is not. Once you start stuffing and rolling your first couple of onions, you’ll see quickly that the whole process is actually quite simple.

Below, I am sharing every step of the process with the little things I learned from my mom and from making this Mediterranean dish over the years for my own family:

A collage of images showing the preparation of the onions to make stuffed onions.

Step 1 – Prep the onions: If there’s one part to pay a little extra attention to, it’s this step. We’re trying to separate the layers in one piece as much as we can. Even if a few tear, don’t worry, they still work just fine once they’re stuffed.

Start by cutting off both ends of each onion, peeling the outer skin, and making a single straight cut down to the center without slicing all the way through. Doing this helps the layers loosen easily after boiling. Use a sharp knife here to make it easier on yourself.

Step 2 – Boil the onions: Add the onions to a large pot of water, bring it to a boil, and let it simmer for about 15 minutes.  You don’t want them overly soft, just soft enough that they don’t rip when you start separating the layers later. 

A collage of images showing the onion layers and the beef and rice filling.

Step 3 – Let them cool and separate the layers: Spread the onions out on a plate and let them cool on the counter.

Pro Tip: It takes a while to cool down, especially the inner layers. If you are short on time, you can place them in a colander and run them under cold tap water to speed up cooling. However, it is imperative that you let them drain properly before you start stuffing and rolling them.

When cool enough to handle, carefully remove each layer of the onion, being gentle to avoid tearing it. You should have about 20-22 onion layers in the end. 

As you peel off each layer, you’ll notice a thin membrane. If you have the time, remove it; it helps the onions cook more evenly and prevents any chewiness. But if you’re in a pinch, you can skip this step. I’ve made this dish plenty of times, leaving the membrane on, and it still turns out great.

As you get closer to the middle, you’ll end up with the onion cores. Don’t throw them out. We’ll use them in the filling, so put them in a large bowl.

Step 4 – Mix the filling: Preheat the oven to 400°F (204°C), and while it heats, make the filling. Add the ground beef, rice, red pepper paste, tomato paste, all of the spices and seasoning, pomegranate molasses, and parsley to the bowl with the chopped onion cores.

Using clean hands, give it a good mix so that everything is evenly combined. You’re looking for a mixture that feels slightly sticky and moist but holds together when you press it between your fingers. 

Step 5 – Roll each layer into a little stuffed onion (aka dolma): Place about 1 ½ tablespoons of filling inside each layer and roll it tightly.

Pro Tip: As you stuff and roll, you’ll see that the very outermost layers of the onion are longer than the inner layers. I find that stuffed onions made with these longer layers are a bit chewy, so I cut them in half. This way, all layers are roughly the same size, and every stuffed onion tastes the same after everything is baked.

Stuffed onion in a skillet with the sauce.

Step 6 – Arrange them in the pan: I am using a 3 ½-quart cast iron skillet, but a large casserole dish would also work well. 

Place the stuffed onions in a spiral, starting from the outer edge, tucking each one right up against the next.

You want them close enough to support each other without squeezing them too tightly. In my 12-inch pan, depending on the size of my onions, I can usually fit 18-22 stuffed onions in one spiral layer.

Step 7 – Make the sauce: In a measuring cup, combine olive oil, pomegranate molasses, tomato paste, red pepper paste, garlic, salt, and boiling water. Whisk until everything dissolves. 

Pour the sauce right over the onions. You can cover the pan with foil or a large sheet of parchment paper.

Pro Tip: During my recipe testing, I kept thinking the sauce looked like too much. It isn’t. You need that liquid to help the onions and filling cook slowly and evenly, and most of it evaporates in the oven, leaving just the right amount behind.

Stuffed roasted before and after they are baked.

Step 8 – Bake: Place the onions in the oven, covered, for about 30 minutes to soften all the way through. Then uncover the dish and let them brown and caramelize around the edges for another 20 minutes or so.

You’ll see that the remaining liquid will be thicker and reduced almost in half.

Step 9 – Finish with fresh parsley and serve: I love adding a handful of parsley at the end to brighten the entire dish. Serve your baked stuffed onions warm, with extra sauce spooned over the top.

Expert Tips From My Mediterranean Kitchen

Stuffed roasted onions look fancy, but once you understand a few small techniques, the whole process becomes much easier (and more enjoyable).

Here are a few lessons I learned during my recipe testing, along with a few things I learned watching my mom make these when I was growing up in Türkiye.

Don’t over-boil the onions: Keep a close eye on them once they start boiling. Let them simmer just until they become soft enough to bend, usually around 15 minutes. If you cook them too long, the layers become mushy and tear easily when you try to separate them. 

Cool the onions before handling: Letting the onions cool takes some time. If you are in a pinch, you can run them under cold water to speed things up. However, it is imperative that you drain them properly before stuffing.

It is okay to cut long onion layers: The outer layers of the onion are sometimes too long for rolling. If they are, simply slice them in half. Too much onion wrapping around the filling can become chewy after baking.

You do not need extra oil: Some versions of this recipe online (especially on social media) add additional (between ¼ cup to ½ cup) olive oil to the filling. I tested this recipe both ways and did not think it was necessary, especially if you are using 85/15 ground meat.

That said, if you’re using leaner meat, feel free to add ¼ cup olive oil to keep the filling tender and moist.

Use boiling or hot tap water for the sauce: When making the sauce, it is hard to dissolve everything with cold (or even room temperature) water, so I recommend using hot water to make it easier on yourself. 

Use parchment paper or foil to cover: Most Turkish cooks use parchment paper to cover the dish. You need to cut it so it covers the entire surface and stays put. However, aluminum foil can also be used.

Ground beef stuffed onions in a skillet from the top view.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Beef stuffed onions garnished with parsley from the top view.
Print

Stuffed Onions Recipe

This Baked Ground Beef Stuffed Onions recipe is a showstopping main dish made with tender onion layers stuffed with a beef-and-rice filling. Everything bakes in a sweet-tangy pomegranate molasses sauce that caramelizes beautifully in the oven.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Cooling time (for Onions) 20 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 55 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 493kcal

Ingredients

For The Onions

  • 4 large onions ~ 2 ½ lbs
  • Salt

For The Filling

  • ½ lbs ground beef 85-15
  • ½ cup white rice rinsed under hot tap water
  • ¼ cup pomegranate molasses
  • 2 tablespoons red pepper paste Use tomato paste if you can't find it
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon allspice
  • ½ teaspoon dried mint optional
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes Urfa or Aleppo pepper, optional
  • 1 cup chopped fresh parsley plus more for garnish

For The Sauce

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ¼ cup pomegranate molasses
  • 2 tablespoons red pepper paste Use tomato paste if you can't find it
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 ½ cups boiling water or hot tap water

Instructions

  • Cut both ends of the onion and peel them one by one. Slice halfway through to the center without cutting all the way.
  • Fill a medium-sized saucepan with water and add the onions over medium heat. Bring to a boil and simmer for 15 minutes. The leaves will soften, and separate a bit.
  • Using a slotted spoon, carefully remove the onions from the boiling water and transfer them to a plate, and let them cool.
  • When cool enough to handle, carefully remove each layer of the onion, being gentle to avoid tearing it, and discard the thin membrane as needed. As you get closer to the middle, you’ll end up with the cores of the onions. Set them aside; we’ll use them in the filling.
  • You should have about 20-22 layers of onions in the end. Set them aside.
  • Meanwhile, preheat the oven to 400 degrees F.
  • While the oven is heating, make the filling. Into a mixing bowl, place ground beef, white rice, pomegranate molasses, red pepper paste, tomato paste, kosher salt, black pepper, ground cumin, allspice, dried mint, red pepper flakes, and chopped fresh parsley.
  • Chop the reserved onion cores and add them to the bowl. Give it a good mix to ensure everything is fully incorporated.
  • When it is time to stuff, fill each layer of the onion with a tablespoon of the meat filling, then roll tightly. Repeat this process for the remaining onion layers, then arrange them in a spiral pattern in a large skillet or casserole dish.
  • To make the sauce, whisk together olive oil, pomegranate molasses, red pepper paste, tomato paste, garlic, salt, and boiling water in a measuring cup until combined.
  • Carefully pour the sauce over the stuffed onions. You can cover it with foil or a large sheet of parchment paper.
  • Bake in the oven for 30 minutes, then remove the parchment paper and continue baking for an additional 20 minutes, or until onions turn golden brown.
  • Garnish with chopped parsley and serve immediately.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 18-22 stuffed onions, which is ideal for serving 4 adults, with each adult eating 4-5 stuffed onions. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: Prep the onions and the filling. Stuff and roll the onions and arrange them in a casserole or skillet. Cover tightly and keep in the fridge for up to 24 hours. When ready to cook, make the sauce and bake as directed.
  • Storage: Bring the leftovers to room temperature, place in an airtight container, and store in the fridge for up to 3-4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 493kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 40mg | Sodium: 1353mg | Potassium: 672mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin A: 1596IU | Vitamin C: 35mg | Calcium: 88mg | Iron: 4mg

What to Serve With Stuffed Onions

So you’ve made your beautiful stuffed baked onions. They’re tender, aromatic, and perfectly seasoned. But what should you serve alongside them to turn this into a complete meal?

Below are a few traditional and Mediterranean-inspired pairings to help you serve them the way they’re enjoyed across Türkiye:

Pair them with a cool yogurt sauce: A creamy yogurt sauce is one of the most classic pairings to dolma-style dishes. My Yogurt Dill Sauce adds a bright, herby note with lemon and fresh dill, while my Tzatziki Sauce Recipe is a classic pairing with thick Greek yogurt, cucumber, and garlic. 

Add a refreshing salad: A crisp salad never disappoints. Turkish Shepherd Salad is a traditional go-to with juicy tomatoes, cucumbers, and herbs, especially in the summer months. If you want something a bit more herby, Tabbouleh is another option with lots of fresh herbs.

Serve with rice or pilaf: To make this a little more filling, pair your stuffed onions with a starchy side dish. If you want a Turkish side, my Bulgur Pilaf is a classic, or try my Vermicelli Rice, another staple you’ll often see served alongside dishes like this in many Mediterranean restaurants. And if you want a gluten-free option, Lemon Quinoa brings a fresh, zesty note without overpowering the main dish.

How to Make Ahead, Store & Reheat 

One of the things I love most about this stuffed onion recipe is that you can make it ahead, and it tastes better the next day.  The flavors magically deepen as they sit, which makes it an ideal recipe for make-ahead dinners, holiday prep, or easy leftovers. 

Here’s how I do it:

Make Ahead: You have two make-ahead options:

  • You can prepare, stuff, and roll all the onions, arrange them in your pan, and refrigerate them unbaked, without the sauce, for up to 24 hours. When you’re ready to cook, simply mix the tomato sauce, pour it over the onions, and bake as directed.
  • Alternatively, you can bake them completely a day ahead. Let them cool, cover tightly, and refrigerate. Just pop them in the oven to warm thoroughly, sprinkle with fresh herbs, and serve!

Storage: Once baked, let the stuffed onions cool completely before storing. Transfer them to an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 4 days. 

Reheat: Reheat the stuffed onions in a 350°F (177°C) oven, loosely covered with parchment or foil, for 10-15 minutes, or just until warmed through. You can also microwave them if needed, but the oven keeps the texture softer and more consistent.

Freezing: Stuffed onions freeze very well. Once completely cooled, place them in an airtight container and freeze for up to 2 months. For the best texture, thaw them overnight in the refrigerator, then reheat.

FAQs

Can I make this recipe vegetarian?

Yes, you can make a vegetarian version. Simply increase the rice to 2 cups and add 3 tablespoons of extra-virgin olive oil to the filling. It is not traditional, but some cooked lentils or mushrooms can be added to the mixture to make it even more satisfying.

What if my onion layers fall apart?

This usually happens when the onions are overcooked. Boil them just until they’re soft enough to bend, but not mushy. Using firm, fresh onions also helps because the layers are sturdier.

Can I make stuffed onions ahead of time?

Yes. To do so, stuff the onions, arrange them in the baking dish, cover tightly, and refrigerate for up to 24 hours. When you’re ready to serve, simply add the sauce and bake.

Can I use brown rice?

Technically, yes, but it takes much longer to cook and stays much firmer inside the onions. For best results, stick with white rice (long-, medium-, or short-grain). If using brown rice, soak it for at least 1 hour to soften it before adding it to the filling mixture.

Can I use red or white onions?

Yes. Red, white, or yellow onions will all work for this recipe. Just make sure the onions you choose are fresh, firm, and not soft, so the layers hold up well when boiling and rolling.

How is this recipe different than Greek Stuffed Onions?

While the concept is pretty similar, the Greek version of this recipe does not use pomegranate molasses. It is also often made with ground pork, but, similar to my recipe here, ground beef and ground lamb can be good substitutes for pork.

Other Mediterranean Recipes You’ll Love

If these meat-stuffed onions made you curious to try more, I invite you to check out a few of my favorite recipes from the Mediterranean and Middle Eastern regions below:

  • If make-ahead meat dishes are your favorite, try my Greek Lamb Meatballs for an easy dinner or a quick appetizer.
  • You’ve probably seen the Doner Kebab recipe going viral on social media. It takes the century-old classic recipe and turns it into a weeknight dinner with a clever shortcut.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-onions/feed/ 0
Viral Doner Kebab https://foolproofliving.com/doner-kebab/ https://foolproofliving.com/doner-kebab/#comments Wed, 03 Dec 2025 02:41:53 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=85054 Ingredients You’ll Need The ingredients for this Turkish doner kebab are simple and easy to find. You can find the…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from front view.

Turkish cooking has been having a moment on social media, and I love seeing it finally get the attention it deserves. First, it was the Turkish Pasta trend; now, it is this homemade doner kebab. 

These shortcuts are clever because they make dishes that have been around forever feel doable on a weeknight with ingredients most people already have. The rolling technique you see everywhere was first shared by Mezemike, and it took off for a reason.

For me, this recipe hits close to home. I grew up in Bursa, Turkiye, where the authentic version of this dish, Iskender Kebab, was invented. So even though we never made it using this method, I immediately understood why people loved it. It captures the spirit of the dish in a much more doable way without a trip to Turkiye.

My goal here is simply to walk you through this shortcut in a clear and honest way, with a few tips to help you get as close to the real thing as possible in your own kitchen.

Ingredients You’ll Need

The ingredients for this Turkish doner kebab are simple and easy to find. You can find the full list of ingredients with exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes on a few ingredients from my testing:

Doner meat ingredients:

Doner meat ingredients from the top view.

Onion: While many viral versions use only the juice, I prefer using the whole onion, as it helps tenderize the meat, keeps it moist, and adds the depth that real doner has. To get it extra fine, I blend it into a puree, along with the garlic. 

If you don’t have a food processor, a box grater would work well too. Use the large holes to grate the onion, and reserve the juices.

Ground beef: It goes without saying that fat is flavor, so it is key here. I recommend using 85/15 ground beef for the best texture and taste. The shortcut doner kebab recipe uses ground beef, but in Turkey (depending on the region), it’s usually made with lean lamb. 

If you want to get as close as possible to the real deal, use ground lamb to make a lamb doner kebab. Lamb is the classic choice for traditional Turkish doner. Or alternatively, if you want to ease into it, you can try 50% ground beef and 50% ground lamb.

Greek yogurt: Yogurt tenderizes the meat and keeps it moist. I tested this recipe both with full-fat yogurt and 2%. While both work, the texture is richer with the full-fat kind.

Spices: The classic doner meat seasoning includes ground cumin, paprika, and red pepper flakes. If you want to get as close to the real thing as possible, I would also recommend adding a pinch of dried oregano.

For the vegetables: 

Roasting vegetables like tomatoes and peppers is optional, but they are the traditional accompaniment to doner kebab, whether you wrap the meat in lavash or serve it with rice.

Ingredients for the sauce and making durum.

Tomatoes: You can use any tomato variety. If using larger tomatoes, quarter them so they roast evenly and are easier to tuck into the wrap (aka dürüm) later on.

Green peppers: Any long, green pepper works here. Traditional Turkish doner shops use sivri biber, which are mild and have a thinner skin. But because I can’t find them here in the US, I usually use Anaheim peppers or jalapeños. If you’re sensitive to heat and using jalapeños, I recommend removing the seeds before roasting them. 

For the Sauce:

Most versions of the viral recipe don’t include this sauce, but I can’t, in good conscience, publish this recipe on my site without sharing it with you. If you ask me, the sauce is a must, and you just need 2 ingredients.

Butter: I am using unsalted butter so I can better control the seasoning. If all you have is salted butter, simply add a little less salt to the sauce.

Tomato paste & water: Use any brand of tomato paste (domates salcasi) you like. While not traditional, I sometimes change it up and use hot/mild red pepper paste (biber salcasi) for a spicier sauce.

For Serving:

Lavash bread: The classic bread used for wrapping meat is lavash. You can make lavash at home or buy it at the store. Here in the US, my favorite brand is Joseph’s, but I also like Trader Joe’s. 

Alternatively, you can stuff the meat in Pita Bread (in its pockets) to create a similar “sandwich” feel.

Sumac Onions: Optional, but I cannot imagine serving any type of Turkish kebab without them. It takes just a few minutes to put together and is essential to make it taste authentic.

How to Make This Viral Turkish Doner Kebab

Okay, there is a reason why this shortcut doner method has taken over social media. It gives you the same tender, well-seasoned meat you’d find in Türkiye, but in a quicker way you can easily make in your own kitchen for a weeknight dinner.

Here’s how to make it:

Steps showing pureing aromatics and making the meat mixture.

Step 1 – Prep the oven and aromatics: Start by preheating your oven to 400°F (204°C). While it heats, add the onion and garlic to your food processor and blend until smooth and pureed.

Don’t strain out the liquid; that moisture is what keeps the meat juicy and helps everything bind together. 

Step 2 – Mix the meat: Transfer the onion mixture to a large bowl and add the ground beef, tomato paste, yogurt, and spices. Using your hands, mix until everything is thoroughly combined for about 1-2 minutes. It should be well mixed, so you get a bit of each flavor in every bite.

Images showing the rolling of the meat mixture to make Turkish doner kebab.

Step 3 – Divide and shape the mixture: Once the meat is mixed, divide it into three equal pieces. During my initial testing of this recipe, I divided it into 4 portions, which worked well, but I felt the rolled doner was a bit thinner than I would like after cooking. 

That said, you can do either 3 or 4 pieces. It is more a matter of personal preference.

Step 4 – Roll the meat into a sheet: Place one piece of meat in the center of a 12×16 sheet of parchment paper, then place another sheet on top. Use a rolling pin (or your hands) to gently press it into an even rectangle. You want an even layer that’s neither too thin nor too thick.

Sometimes the meat pushes out of the sides of the parchment. Don’t worry, just tuck it back in so it’s not as thin, and keep going.

Pro Tip: Some of the videos I’ve seen on social media make it look so easy to roll out to a perfect rectangle. During my testing, I learned that the shape didn’t matter. Instead, the important thing was to roll the meat evenly on the parchment paper.

Photos showing the rolling of the meat to make the viral doner kabob recipe.

Step 5 – Roll it into a log: Remove the top parchment sheet. Now, starting from the short end closest to you, roll the meat tightly (with the bottom parchment still attached).

Transfer the rolled log to a sheet pan and repeat with the remaining pieces.

Pro Tip: Watching the videos on social media, you’ll likely see people roll the meat (like you are rolling cinnamon rolls) or fold it onto itself. As long as it is evenly rolled, both methods would work.

A collage of photos showing the preparation for the veggies with the rolled doner meat.

Step 6 – Add the vegetables: Once all three logs are on the pan, add the quartered tomatoes and whole peppers to the same pan (onto the side) and drizzle them with olive oil and a little kosher salt. 

Step 7 – Bake: Bake everything for about 15-20 minutes. When it’s done, the meat should look lightly browned, and the vegetables should be softened. 

Remove the pan from the oven and let everything cool for 5 minutes or just enough that you can unroll it without burning your hands.

Showing the cooked doner meat getting unrolled and torn into big pieces.

Step 8 – Tear the meat: Unroll each piece gently, then tear the meat into strips by hand. I don’t strip them down too small, just into large chunks.

Photo showing the texture of the butter and tomato sauce.

Step 9 – Make the tomato-butter sauce: Start by melting the butter in a small saucepan. Then, stir in the tomato paste using a fork (or even a whisk). At first, it will look a bit curdled, which is normal. Once cooked for 20-30 seconds, whisk in some hot water to achieve a more sauce-like consistency.

Pro Tip: Use hot (tap) water here; cold water will make the sauce harder to combine. Let it come to a gentle boil, then take it off the heat.

Expert Tips From My Turkish Kitchen

After testing this recipe multiple times (and growing up eating the real Turkish version), I’ve learned that a few small details make all the difference between a doner that tastes flat and one that tastes like it came straight from a shop in Türkiye. Here’s what helped the most:

Warm your bread: Your wrap is only as good as your bread, and there is nothing better than warmed lavash (or pita). You can quickly warm it in the oven or on a dry skillet, or simply set it on top of the warm meat for a minute to soften (and soak up a bit of the juices on top).

Even thickness when rolling: When you’re pressing the meat between the parchment sheets, you don’t want it paper-thin. We are aiming for even thickness so it cooks properly and stays juicy. If the meat spills out the sides of the parchment, just tuck it back in. Using a rolling pin makes it easier, but your hands work just as well.

Use sturdy parchment paper: Not all parchment paper is the same. Thinner parchment becomes soggy, tears easily, and makes rolling a lot harder. A sturdier brand helps the meat keep its shape, especially if you plan to refrigerate the logs overnight. I used 12×16 parchment sheets, and they held up beautifully.

Don’t overbake it: The meat cooks surprisingly fast. About 15-20 minutes is usually the perfect amount of time, and baking it any longer can dry out the meat. It should be tender enough to tear into strips.

Also, I’ve seen people put the doner meat under the broiler after unrolling it to make it “crispy”. Personally, I did not think that it was necessary as doner is supposed to be served tender and softer than crispy.

Brush and sear the wrap: This is an optional step, but if you have a few extra minutes, for a restaurant-style finish, you can brush the outside of the lavash with a little tomato-butter sauce and sear it in a skillet for 30-60 seconds or place it in a turned-off (but still warm) oven to warm it up a bit while you are assembling the rest of the wraps.

Doner kebab meat with roasted tomatoes and peppers on the side.
Print

Viral Doner Kebab Recipe

A shortcut version of Turkish doner kebab made with ground beef and rolled in parchment paper, just like the one trending on social media. When you serve it with roasted tomatoes, peppers, and the traditional tomato-butter sauce, it comes surprisingly close to the real thing in a fraction of the time.
Course Weeknight Dinner
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 483kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

For The Doner Meat

  • 1 onion medium-sized/peeled and cut into large chunks
  • 2 cloves garlic peeled
  • 1 lb ground beef 85/15
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
  • 2 tablespoons Greek yogurt full-fat or no fat (both would work)
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

For The Vegetables

  • 3 tomatoes quartered / medium sized
  • 2 green peppers
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • teaspoon black pepper

For The Sauce (optional)

  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • ¼ cup hot water
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt

For Serving (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 °F (204°C).
  • Place the onion and garlic in a food processor and pulse until fully chopped/pureed. Place it in a large bowl.
  • Into that same bowl, add in the beef, tomato paste, Greek yogurt, ground cumin, paprika, red pepper flakes, salt, and pepper.
  • Using clean hands, mix well until thoroughly combined.
  • Divide the mixture into 3 equal pieces*.
  • Grab a large sheet of parchment paper and place one of the pieces in the middle. Place another sheet of parchment on top and, using a rolling pin (or your hands), roll it out into a rectangle. Do your best to make it as even as possible.
  • Remove the parchment paper on top. Starting from the bottom with the short side facing you, roll the meat (with the parchment paper) onto itself in 2-inch increments until complete. Transfer it to a large sheet pan.
  • Repeat the same process for the remaining pieces.
  • Move the rolled meat to the side and add the tomatoes and peppers to the same sheet pan. Drizzle them with olive oil and season with salt and pepper.
  • Transfer it to the oven and bake for 20 minutes.
  • When done, unfold the rolled meat and tear it into large pieces.
  • To make the sauce, melt the butter in a small saucepan over medium heat. Add the tomato paste and water and mix until combined. Cook until it comes to a boil and remove from the heat.
  • To make “durum”, lay a piece of lavash on a cutting board and spread it with a tablespoon of tomato sauce. Add a handful of meat on top, along with some roasted tomatoes and peppers, and a handful of sumac onions (if using).
  • Drizzle it with more tomato sauce and gently roll it up from the bottom, tucking the filling in as you go.
  • Repeat the same process for the remaining lavash bread and doner meat. Using a sharp knife, cut it in half and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4 doner kebab wraps ideal for serving four adults. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storing leftovers: If you know you’ll have leftovers, I recommend storing all components of the recipe separately in airtight containers. If stored in the fridge, they should be good for up to 3-4 days.
    You can store the wraps as well, but I recommend consuming them in the next day or two. You can reheat in a low-heat (300°F) oven until warmed to your liking.
  • Some versions of this recipe divide the doner meat mixture into 4 pieces (instead of 3 as I did) for 1 pound of ground meat. During my testing, I thought the doner meat made with 4 pieces was too thin to my liking, but either way would work.
 

Nutrition

Calories: 483kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 23g | Fat: 38g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Trans Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 111mg | Sodium: 1064mg | Potassium: 838mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 1814IU | Vitamin C: 66mg | Calcium: 69mg | Iron: 4mg

How To Serve Doner Kebab?

You made the doner meat, roasted the veggies, and have the most delicious, silky tomato-butter sauce ready. Now it is time to serve. And if you want the full Turkish experience, pour yourself a cold Ayran, the simple salted yogurt drink we serve with every kebab dish. 

The good news is that you have a few options:

Make A Wrap (aka dürüm): 

Photo of the durum made with doner meat.

This is how they serve it in the viral videos, and, quite honestly, this is how you would find it in Turkey if you buy it from a street vendor. It is called dürüm and is usually made by rolling the meat in lavash bread.

To assemble, place a warm piece of lavash bread on a cutting board and spread it with a generous spoonful of the tomato sauce.

Add a handful of the doner meat, some roasted peppers and tomatoes, and a spoonful of Sumac Onions. Drizzle it with a tablespoon of the tomato sauce.

Roll the lavash tightly, tucking the filling in as you go. Slice in half, then serve immediately with extra sauce on the side. 

Pro Tip: If you prefer something sturdier or don’t have lavash on hand, you can use store-bought or Homemade Pita Bread or any of your favorite flatbreads instead.

Iskender-Inspired Plate: 

I grew up in Bursa, where doner kebab is often served Iskender-style. It uses the same ingredients you already prepared, but the assembly gives it a completely different feel. 

If you want to serve your doner meat this way, place torn pieces of warm pide bread on a plate, drizzle with tomato sauce, pile the meat on top, and finish with more sauce. 

Serve it with a dollop of creamy yogurt on the side, along with the roasted peppers and tomatoes.

With Rice:

Depending on the region, especially when you eat doner kebab in a restaurant, it often comes with rice, a few French fries, and some pickles on the side. After it is assembled, the tomato sauce is poured over the meat and rice, turning it into a simple yet just as delicious meal. 

If you want to serve it that way at home, I highly recommend making my Vermicelli Rice to keep it as close to the real thing as possible.

Viral Turkish doner recipe served with sumac onions and tomato sauce from the top view.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Reheat

Make ahead: You have a few great make-ahead options:

  • Prep the rolls the day before: You can fully roll the meat logs ahead of time and refrigerate them until you’re ready to bake. The only thing to keep in mind is the parchment paper. Some get soft and wet easily, so choose a good-quality one to help the logs hold their shape overnight. I like this precut parchment paper that is not only sturdy enough but also easy to roll.
  • Prep the meat mixture ahead: If you’d rather roll it fresh the next day, simply mix the meat mixture, transfer it to an airtight container, and refrigerate. This resting time allows the aromatics to mingle and develop even further.

Pro Tip – Make the sauce fresh: The tomato-butter sauce only takes a few minutes to make and tastes best when made right before serving. I do not recommend making it ahead of time for the best results.

Storage: If you know you will have leftovers, store the meat, sauce, and roasted vegetables separately. They all keep well in the fridge, in an airtight container, for 3-4 days. This helps the texture stay closer to its fresh state. 

If not, as long as stored in an airtight container, the rolls will still hold up nicely and keep well in the fridge for 1-2 days.

Freezing: You can freeze the doner meat in two easy ways:

  • Freezing raw rolled logs: Simply wrap each roll tightly in stretch film (or place it in an airtight freezer-safe container) and freeze for up to 2 months. When you’re ready to enjoy, thaw it overnight in the fridge, then bake as directed.
  • Freezing the cooked meat: After baking, tear the meat, let it cool completely, and freeze it in an airtight container or freezer bag. For the best texture, reheat it in a skillet rather than in the microwave.

Reheating: If you store the meat separately from the rest of the ingredients, you can warm it up in a skillet over medium heat with a splash of water or a little butter. I would recommend avoiding the microwave, as it tends to dry out the meat and make it chewy.

If you have leftover sauce, warm it up in a skillet and add a little warm water to thin it out.

FAQS

Can I make this with ground chicken or turkey?

Yes, you can. Just keep in mind that in this recipe, more fat equals more flavor. If you are choosing to use chicken or turkey, choose dark-meat ground chicken or dark-meat ground turkey to replicate the rich flavors doner kebab is known for.

Is this an authentic Turkish doner?

Not exactly. Traditional doner is made on a vertical spit and slowly roasted for hours. This version is a shortcut that went viral online because it captures the spirit of doner in a way that’s easy to make at home.

What’s the difference between doner, shawarma, and gyro?

All three are sliced, seasoned meats cooked on a rotating spit, but the spices and toppings vary depending on the part of the Mediterranean/Middle East they are served:
– Döner is Turkish. Compared to shawarma and gyro, it is less seasoned, usually made with beef or lamb, and served with tomato sauce, savory yogurt, and grilled vegetables.
– Shawarma (Middle Eastern) is heavily spiced with ground turmeric, clove, cinnamon, and cardamom. It is traditionally made with chicken and beef.
– Gyro (Greek) includes dried oregano, garlic, and Mediterranean herbs, and is typically served with tzatziki. It is usually made with chicken or beef.

Can I make this without parchment paper?

I don’t recommend it. The parchment is what helps the meat hold its shape as it bakes. Without it, the logs won’t roll tightly, and the meat can spread or fall apart.

Can I make this in the air fryer?

Yes, just make sure the rolls fit inside your air fryer basket. Cook them at 400°F (204°C) for about 15 minutes. Be sure to check it around the 12th-minute mark, as air fryers tend to cook faster than ovens.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Turkish Recipes You Might Also Like

If you enjoyed this homemade doner kebab recipe, here are a few more Turkish recipes I think you’ll love:

  • If you’re craving something bold and spicy, my Adana Kebab is as close to the authentic version as you can get at home. It’s the traditional lamb kebab I grew up eating, and this homemade version still captures the rich, smoky flavor of the original.
  • For a comforting and simple weeknight dinner, my Turkish Stuffed Eggplant is a classic. The roasted eggplant with the garlicky tomato-beef filling makes it one of the most iconic dishes in Turkish cuisine.
  • And if you want something quick and nostalgic, try my Turkish Meatballs. Made with just a couple of simple ingredients, they’re the meatballs I grew up eating in Turkey.


This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/doner-kebab/feed/ 14
Grilled Flank Steak Salad https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-flank-steak-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-flank-steak-salad/#respond Tue, 12 Aug 2025 20:16:42 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82744 During the summer months, I try to avoid turning on the stove or oven. If I can make it on…]]>

During the summer months, I try to avoid turning on the stove or oven. If I can make it on the grill, that is where you will find me, especially when peak summer produce is at its best. This marinated flank steak salad is the perfect way to celebrate the season in one big fresh bowl. 

Grilled marinated flank steak salad from the top view.

For years, I grilled flank steak with just salt and pepper, but lately, I have been marinating it for a few hours, which really amps up the flavor. The rest is simple: toss in whatever summer produce you have on hand, such as tomatoes, corn, or radishes, and make it your own. But really, take my recipe as a place to start and make it your own. 

It is a fantastic summer salad recipe you will want to make again and again.

Simple Ingredients You’ll Need

You’ll find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here are a few notes you need to bring this grilled steak salad to life: 

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Flank Steak: 

I usually use about 1½ pounds of flank steak. When buying flank steak to use in this salad, ask your butcher to give you a piece that is well marbled for the best flavor. 

You can certainly keep it simple with a little salt, pepper, and olive oil, but I opted to use my Flank Steak Marinade, which only takes about an hour to work its magic. 

Salad Dressing: 

I’m using my Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette for this recipe because it pairs beautifully with the grilled steak and vegetables. If you’re in the mood for something lighter, my Lemon Vinaigrette is a great option too. You can even make the dressing a day ahead and keep it in the fridge until you’re ready to serve.

For the Salad:

Lettuce: I like using romaine for the crunch, but any salad greens you have on hand will work. Arugula or a simple spring mix are great options, too. Just make sure they’re thoroughly washed, dried, and chopped into bite-sized pieces. 

Corn: I grill my corn on the cob right before grilling the flank steak, but any corn, whether it is thawed frozen corn or drained and rinsed canned corn, would work in this recipe.

Tomatoes: I like using cherry tomatoes, but any tomato will work. Roma, heirloom, or any ripe summer tomato is a good option. If you’re using cherry tomatoes, slice them in half or into quarters if they’re too big. For other tomatoes, cut them into bite-sized pieces so they’re easy to mix into the salad.

Radishes:  I use regular red radishes, but any variety works. Just slice them thinly so the acid in the dressing can cut through their bitterness and give them a lightly pickled taste.

Scallions: I opted for thinly sliced green onions (including both the white and green parts) for their milder flavor. But if you’re after something with more bite, thinly sliced red onions are a great option.

Avocado: Choose a ripe avocado. I recommend adding it just before serving so it stays fresh and does not turn brown. You can slice or cube it depending on your preference.

Cheese: I used fresh mozzarella for its mild flavors. If you can get your hands on them, fresh mozzarella pearls are ideal, but you can also buy a whole mozzarella and cut it into bite-sized cubes. 

Alternatively, for a bolder cheese option, crumbled goat cheese or blue cheese can also be used.

How To Make Grilled Flank Steak Salad?

This marinated flank steak salad recipe consists of two main parts: first, we marinate the flank steak, then we grill it and assemble the salad. I usually marinate the steak the night before so it’s ready to go, making this a perfect weeknight summer dinner. 

Below are the step-by-step instructions, along with helpful notes from my recipe testing:

Person making a flank steak salad and adding it into a bowl with the steak.

Step 1 – Make the Marinade: In a mixing bowl, combine all the marinade ingredients and whisk until smooth. I like to start with the wet ingredients first, then add the seasonings so everything blends evenly. Place the flank steak in a shallow glass dish or a resealable plastic bag. 

Pour the marinade over the surface, ensuring it’s evenly coated, then gently press or massage it in to allow the marinade to soak in. Cover and let it rest for at least 1 hour, or refrigerate up to overnight. Avoid marinating for more than 24 hours, as the acidity can break the meat down quite a bit and affect the texture.

Person making salad dressing and grilling the meat.

Step 2 – Make the Salad Dressing: In a small bowl, combine the balsamic vinegar, lemon juice, minced garlic, kosher salt, and pepper. Whisk to combine. Then, while whisking, slowly drizzle in the extra virgin olive oil until the dressing looks smooth and emulsified. Doing so helps the oil and vinegar come together without separating too quickly.

During my recipe testing, I’ve found that using a combination of balsamic vinegar and lemon juice gives the dressing a nice balance of depth and brightness, complementing the balsamic flavors in the steak marinade.

Step 3 – Grill the Steak: Preheat your grill to 500°F. High heat is key here because it sears the steak, creating those beautiful grill marks. Scrape the grates clean to remove any leftover bits so the meat can get even contact with the heat, then coat them generously with olive oil. Place the steak directly on the grill and cook for about 4 to 5 minutes per side for medium-rare. Use an instant-read thermometer (affiliate link) to check doneness and avoid overcooking, especially with lean cuts like flank steak.

If you’re not sure what temperature to aim for, here’s a quick guide to help you cook your steak just the way you like it:

  • Medium-rare: 130 to 135°F (3 to 4 minutes per side)
  • Medium: 140 to 145°F (4 to 5 minutes per side)
  • Medium-well: 150 to 155°F (5 to 6 minutes per side)

I usually aim for medium-rare to keep the steak juicy and tender. Going much past medium can cause it to dry out.

Step 4 – Rest the Steak: Transfer the steak to a platter and cover with foil. Let it rest for at least 10 minutes while you prepare the salad. This allows the juices to redistribute so they stay in the meat when sliced, keeping every bite juicy and tender.

A collage of images showing the dressing of the salad and the slicing of the grilled steak.

Step 5 – Assemble the Salad: In a large salad bowl, combine the chopped romaine lettuce, grilled corn, cherry tomatoes, thinly sliced radishes, thinly sliced green onions, avocado (sliced or cubed), and cubed mozzarella. 

That being said, if you are assembling this salad a few hours in advance, it is best to add the avocado at the last minute to prevent it from browning. The same goes for the dressing; it is best to drizzle it right before serving to keep the salad crispy and fresh.

Taste and adjust the seasoning as needed. Sometimes all it needs is a pinch of salt or a touch more acidity to bring everything together.

Step 6 – Slice the Steak: Slice the steak thinly (about ½ inch thick) against the grain. This means cutting across the natural lines you see running through the meat. Those lines are muscle fibers, and cutting across them makes each bite softer and easier to chew. 

The steak salad on a large plate from the top view.

Step 7 – Arrange and serve: Arrange the meat on top of the salad and serve while still warm.

Expert Tips for the Best Results

  • Plan ahead for grilled corn: If you’re planning to grill your corn, be prepared to set aside a bit more time, as it takes longer to grill corn than flank steak. Corn usually needs 10-15 minutes on the grill (depending on size), while flank steak takes about 5-7 minutes. I recommend starting with the corn first, so everything finishes around the same time.
  • Dressing and greens: The beauty of this salad is that it can be made with whatever salad greens you have on hand. I use romaine lettuce because I find that it gives a nice bite and crunch to the overall salad. It is also able to withstand the salad dressing for a longer time. 
    If you choose to use more delicate salad greens like arugula or spring mix, it is best to drizzle the salad with the dressing right before serving to prevent soggy greens.
  • Avocado: Add avocado just before serving to keep it fresh and prevent it from browning.
  • Best Timing for Serving: I recommend making the salad (without the dressing) while the steak is resting. Dress the salad, give it a quick toss, and then slice the steak and place it right on top so it’s ready to serve.

How to Store Leftovers?

Storage: I always recommend storing the steak separately from the salad because once the greens sit with the dressing, they start to get soggy pretty quickly. 

If you know you’ll have leftovers, let everything come to room temperature first, then place the steak and the salad in separate airtight containers before popping them in the fridge. Both will keep well for up to 3 days.

Reheating (optional): You can enjoy this straight from the fridge, but if you’d rather have it warm, just reheat the steak on its own before adding it back to the salad. Right before serving, give the salad a good toss to redistribute everything, and if needed, add a pinch more seasoning since the juices tend to settle at the bottom and the greens can lose a bit of their seasoning as they sit.

FAQs

Can I use a different cut of steak?

Yes. Skirt steak is the closest substitute and works really well with this marinade. Sirloin is another great option if you prefer something a little thicker and more tender. Just keep in mind that cooking times will vary depending on the cut and thickness, so use an instant-read thermometer to get it just right.

Can I make this salad ahead of time?

You can prepare the components ahead of time, such as making the dressing and cooking the steak. I recommend storing everything separately and assembling the salad just before serving so the greens stay crisp and fresh.

What if I don’t have a grill for the steak?

You can cook flank steak in a hot cast-iron skillet on the stovetop or under the broiler in your oven. For the stovetop, sear it in a lightly oiled skillet for 3-5 minutes per side for medium-rare. For the oven, broil it on a rack set over a baking sheet for about 5-6 minutes per side, depending on your preferred doneness. Always let it rest for 5-10 minutes before slicing against the grain.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Flank Steak Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you’re a fan of this grilled flank steak salad, you’ll want to try these other flank steak recipes:

  • Switch up your usual taco night with my Flank Steak Tacos, pairing them with your favorite toppings and enjoying them on warm tortillas.
  • For a satisfying and comforting meal, my Chimichurri Steak Sandwich has juicy grilled steak with fresh chimichurri on soft bread for a lunch or dinner you’ll want to make on repeat.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Grilled flank steak salad with utensils on the side.
Print

Grilled Flank Steak Salad Recipe

This grilled flank steak salad is packed with tender marinated steak, crisp romaine, sweet grilled corn, creamy avocado, and fresh mozzarella. Tossed in a tangy balsamic dressing, it's a fresh, meal-worthy summer salad perfect for weeknights or backyard gatherings.
Course Dinner, Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Marinating Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 551kcal

Ingredients

For the flank steak marinade:

  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more to oil the grill grates
  • cup soy sauce
  • ¼ cup balsamic vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 2 tablespoons Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon honey
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon sweet paprika
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 ½ lbs flank steak

For The Salad Dressing:

  • 3 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 garlic clove peeled and minced
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/2 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1/4 cup extra virgin olive oil

For The Salad:

  • 2 heads romaine lettuce rinsed, dried, and roughly chopped (about 6 cups)
  • 2 cups corn kernels grilled, or frozen, and thawed or canned and rinsed
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes cut in half
  • 3 small radishes sliced thinly
  • 3 scallions chopped (both white and green parts)
  • 1 ripe avocado sliced
  • 1 cup fresh mozzarella cheese cubed or crumbled goat cheese or blue cheese

Instructions

  • To make the marinade, grab a large enough container that can accommodate your flank steak and place ¼ cup of olive oil, ⅓ cup of soy sauce, ¼ cup of apple cider vinegar, 2 tablespoons of lemon juice, 2 tablespoons of Worcestershire sauce, 1 tablespoon of Dijon mustard, 1 tablespoon of honey, 3 cloves of minced garlic, 1 teaspoon of sweet paprika, ½ teaspoon of ground cumin, ½ teaspoon of kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon black pepper in it. Whisk until smooth.
    Flank steak marinade being poured into a bowl.
  • Cover and let it marinate in the fridge for at least an hour or overnight (no more than 24 hours.)
  • While the meat is marinating, make the salad dressing. In a small bowl, place 3 tablespoons of balsamic vinegar, 2 tablespoons of freshly squeezed lemon juice, 1 clove garlic, peeled and minced, 1 teaspoon kosher salt and 1/2 teaspoon freshly ground black pepper. Give it a whisk. While still whisking, slowly add the 1/4 cup of extra-virgin olive oil. Whisk until fully incorporated and smooth. Set it aside.
    A collage of images showing the dressing being made and the meat grilled.
  • To grill the steak, preheat a gas grill to 500 degrees °F. Scrape the grill grates and coat them generously with the oil.
  • Place the flank steak on the grill and cook for 3-4 minutes on each side for rare (internal temperature is 130 to 135 °F), 4-5 minutes on each side for medium (internal temperature is 136 to 145 °F), or 5-6 minutes on each side for medium-well (internal temperature is 146 to 155 °F).
  • When it reaches your desired doneness, transfer the grilled flank steak to a platter and cover it with foil. Let it rest while you prepare the salad.
  • To make the salad, place 6 cups of roughly chopped romaine lettuce, 2 cups of corn, 1 cup of chopped cherry tomatoes, 3 small sliced radishes, 3 thinly sliced green onions, 1 sliced avocado, and a cup of mozzarella pearls in a large salad bowl.
    Person adding the dressing over the salad and the steak is sliced.
  • Drizzle the dressing over the salad and toss to ensure that all of the ingredients are evenly coated. Add more seasoning to taste and adjust as needed.
  • Slice the steak against the grain (1/2-inch thick slices) and layer it over the salad just before serving.
    Grilled marinated flank steak salad from the top view.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 10 cups of salad that is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storing leftovers: If you know you’ll have leftovers, I recommend storing the salad and the meat separately. If not, place the leftovers in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Corn: You can use any corn you have on hand. Frozen (and thawed), Canned (and drained) or grilled fresh corn would all work. If you are planning to grill your corn, I recommend setting aside a bit more time as it takes longer for corn to grill (compared to the flank steak).

Nutrition

Calories: 551kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 35g | Fat: 34g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Cholesterol: 83mg | Sodium: 1721mg | Potassium: 1358mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 18731IU | Vitamin C: 25mg | Calcium: 224mg | Iron: 6mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-flank-steak-salad/feed/ 0
Flank Steak Marinade https://foolproofliving.com/flank-steak-marinade/ https://foolproofliving.com/flank-steak-marinade/#comments Tue, 12 Aug 2025 20:13:41 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82742 I’ve been making flank steak for years, but it wasn’t until we bought our first gas grill a couple of…]]>

I’ve been making flank steak for years, but it wasn’t until we bought our first gas grill a couple of summers ago that I really started perfecting it. I was first drawn to this cut because it’s budget-friendly and cooks quickly, which makes it perfect for busy weeknights or casual weekend grilling.

Back then, I kept things simple with just salt and pepper. The steak was fine, but it never had that “wow” factor. That changed once I began experimenting with marinades, and the version you see here quickly became my go-to. 

Grilled flank steak sliced on a plate.

What makes this the best flank steak marinade is the balance of soy sauce, vinegar, Dijon mustard, and a touch of honey (or brown sugar). Paired with high heat and a quick cook time, it transforms this lean cut into a tender, juicy steak that people can hardly believe is flank steak.

Ingredients You’ll Need

The full list of ingredients is in the recipe card below, but after making this recipe countless times, I’ve gathered a few notes on what makes these key ingredients so important:

Ingredient for the recipe from the top view.

Olive oil: Use a good-quality extra virgin olive oil here. Nowadays, my favorite brand is Garcia de la Cruz (affiliate link) with its smooth and earthy flavor. You’ll also want to keep a little extra oil to grease your grill grates right before grilling to prevent the meat from sticking to the grill. 

Soy sauce: Soy sauce is the secret ingredient that gives the steak its deep, salty, savory, and umami kick. I’ve tried using just salt before, but soy sauce adds so much more depth. If you’re following a gluten-free diet, tamari or coconut aminos work just as well.

Apple Cider Vinegar: As the primary acid in this recipe, vinegar helps tenderize the meat. I use apple cider vinegar in this recipe, as it is commonly found in most households. However, balsamic vinegar or red wine vinegar would also work. Keep in mind, though, depending on the vinegar you use, that the flavor profile of your marinade will be slightly different.

For example, using an aged balsamic from Modena will give you a deeper, sweeter taste.

Lemon or lime juice: I recommend using freshly squeezed juice for the best taste. I usually go with lemon juice for its slightly tangier flavor, but lime juice works just as well. While freshly squeezed juice is best, in a pinch, bottled juice will work too.

Dijon mustard: When it comes to mustard, I like to use Dijon mustard for its strong, tangy flavors, but if you prefer a bit of texture in your marinade, you can also use grainy mustard. Yellow mustard will work in a pinch, though it has a milder taste.

Sweetener of your choice: A small amount of sugar helps balance the tangy and umami flavors of the marinade. I use honey in my recipe, but brown sugar would also work.  Either way, be sure to whisk it well so that it’s fully dissolved to prevent the sugar burning on the grill.

Fresh garlic cloves: For the best taste, I recommend using freshly minced garlic. But if you prefer a milder flavor, garlic powder works too.

Seasoning for Flank Steak: For the spices in this marinade, I’ve found that sweet paprika and ground cumin work best, but if you prefer a smokier flavor, you can swap in smoked paprika. You can also add fresh or dried herbs that complement the rest of your meal. Choose ones that echo the flavors in your side dishes for a harmonious pairing.

Flank steak: When buying flank steak, look for a cut that is well marbled and has a bright red color that looks fresh and moist. It is best to choose a flank steak that is even in thickness. My recipe calls for 1 ½ lbs of flank steak that is  ¾ to 1 inch thick, which is ideal for grilling.

How to Marinate Flank Steak? Step-by-Step Instructions

Marinating flank steak is one of the simplest ways to ensure it turns out tender and full of flavor. It really is as easy as whisking a few ingredients together in a large bowl and letting the steak soak up all that goodness.

Here’s exactly how I do it with some helpful tips on every step:

Flank steak marinade in a bowl and being poured over the meat.

Step 1 – Make the marinade: In a mixing bowl, combine olive oil, soy sauce, vinegar, lemon juice, Worcestershire sauce, Dijon mustard, honey, garlic, paprika, cumin, salt, and pepper. Whisk until everything is fully incorporated and the marinade looks smooth. 

I find it helps to start with the wet ingredients first, then add in the seasonings so everything blends evenly. This is especially helpful when using ingredients like honey or Dijon mustard, as it ensures they dissolve smoothly and don’t clump.

Step 2 – Add the steak: Use a large, shallow dish (ideally one with a tight-fitting lid) that’s big enough to hold your flank steak in a single layer so it can lie flat and be fully coated in the marinade. 

If you’re working with a larger cut or want less cleanup, a resealable plastic bag will work as well. Pour the marinade over the top, making sure the entire surface is covered.

I like to press the steak gently into the marinade to help it really soak in. If you’re using a plastic bag, seal it tightly and massage the marinade into the meat to distribute the liquid evenly. 

Marinated flank steak before and after it is grilled.

Step 3 – Cover and marinate: Cover your dish with a tight-fitting lid (or seal your bag). If you can plan ahead, marinating overnight in the fridge is my go-to, but even a quick 1-hour marinade will still give you good flavor. Depending on your schedule, here’s how I do both:

  • 1 Hour Marinade: If all you have is an hour, you can let it sit at room temperature on your kitchen counter, which helps take the chill off the meat, allowing it to cook more evenly later. 
  • Overnight Marinade (preferred method): If you can plan ahead, marinating it overnight in the fridge is even better. Just don’t go past 24 hours; the acids in the marinade will start to change the texture, and instead of tender, the meat can turn a little mushy.

How To Cook Marinated Flank Steak?

Once your steak is marinated and ready to go, it’s time to cook. While my preferred method for cooking is on the grill, I know that it is not always possible. The good news is that you can cook your marinated steak on the stove or in the oven.

Below are the steps for each method:

On The Grill

Step 1 – Preheat the grill: When it comes to grilling marinated beef flank steak, we’re aiming for high heat, around 500°F. You want that grill nice and hot so you get a good sear on the steak without overcooking the inside. 

While the grill heats up, give the grates a good scrape to remove any residue. Then, use a paper towel dipped in oil to coat the grates generously to prevent sticking and help you get those beautiful grill marks.

Step 2 – Prepare the steak: Remove the steak from the marinade, letting the excess drip off. We don’t want it soaking wet when it hits the grill, which can cause flare-ups and burn the outside before the inside cooks. 

As the first side cooks, you can spoon a little of the leftover marinade over the top to keep the uncooked side moist. However, once you flip the steak, you should discard any marinade that has been in contact with raw meat.

Step 3 – Grill: Place the steak directly on the grill and cook for about 4 to 5 minutes per side for medium-rare. The best way to determine if it has reached your ideal doneness is to use an instant-read thermometer (affiliate link). If you’re not sure what temperature to aim for, here’s a quick guide to help you cook your steak just the way you like it:

  • Medium-rare: 130 to 135°F internal temperature (3 to 4 minutes per side)
  • Medium: 140 to 145°F internal temperature (4 to 5 minutes per side)
  • Medium-well: 150 to 155°F internal temperature (5 to 6 minutes per side)

I usually go for a medium-rare to medium level of doneness with flank steak to keep it juicy and tender, but feel free to adjust based on your preference. Just remember, since it’s a lean cut, going much past medium can start to dry it out.

Step 4 – Rest before slicing: Once your steak is cooked to your liking, transfer it to a cutting board or platter and let it rest for about 5 to 10 minutes. This will give the juices time to redistribute, so when you slice into it, they stay in the meat instead of running out and keeping every bite juicy and tender.

In The Oven

I’ll be honest, my favorite way of cooking flank steak is on the grill, but let’s face it, sometimes grilling is not an option. The good news is that you can get a similar result using your oven’s broiler, and it’s just as easy.

Step 1 – Turn the broiler on: Set your oven to the “broil” setting on high. For the best results, place the oven rack in the upper third section, about 5-6 inches from the heat source.

Step 2 – Prepare the pan: Line a baking sheet with parchment paper (or aluminum foil), then set a wire rack over it. The rack is key because it allows hot air to circulate completely around the meat as it roasts, helping us create crispy edges and evenly cooked flank steak.

Step 3 – Broil: Remove the steak from the marinade and let the excess drip off before transferring it to your prepared sheet pan. Broil for 5-6 minutes on each side, or until it reaches your desired doneness. The best way to know when it’s ready is by inserting an instant-read thermometer into the thickest part of the meat. For a quick guide on what temperatures to aim for, see the doneness temperature chart in the grilling section above.

Step 4 – Rest and slice: When the cooking time is completed, transfer the steak to a plate, cover loosely with foil, and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before slicing.

On The Stove Top:

When it comes to cooking your marinated steak on the stove top, a cast-iron skillet works best as it retains heat very well. Simply:

Step 1 – Heat the skillet: Grab a large (10 or 12 inch) cast iron skillet and heat it over medium-high heat until sizzling hot. You can check if it is hot enough by spraying it with a drop of water. If it evaporates right away, it should be good to go.

Step 2 – Prepare the steak: Remove the marinated flank steak from the marinade, making sure to remove any excess. This is an important step in that excess liquid will steam the meat instead of searing it. I even recommend patting it dry with a few sheets of paper towels to make sure that it is as “dry” as possible.

Step 3 – Cook the steak: Transfer the steak to the skillet and sear for 3-4 minutes or until nicely browned. Flip the steak and cook for another 3-5 minutes, depending on the level of doneness you prefer.

Expert Tips:

Even though marinating flank steak is a simple process, a few small details can make all the difference in how tender and juicy your steak turns out. Below, I am sharing my notes from my recipe testing to help you make the best marinated flank steak:

  • Don’t put cold meat on the grill: If you’re marinating your flank steak overnight, take it out of the fridge 30-60 minutes before grilling. You don’t want to put super cold steak onto a hot grill, as it won’t sear properly, and the outside can overcook before the inside comes up to temperature.
  • Let the excess marinade drip off: Before cooking, I always let the steak rest for a moment over the bowl or dish to let any extra marinade drip off. Too much liquid on the surface can cause the steak to steam instead of sear, especially if you’re grilling or using a cast-iron skillet. Also, since the marinade contains acid, putting the steak on the grill while it’s still dripping can cause flare-ups. Letting it drip off helps avoid all that and gives you better control over the cook.
  • Aim for medium doneness: Since flank steak is a thinner, leaner cut, I usually aim to cook it to medium. This gives you a tender, juicy result without drying it out. If you go much past that, it can start to get tough and chewy.
  • Let it rest before slicing: Just like with any steak, let it rest for 5 to 10 minutes on a cutting board before slicing. This allows the juices to redistribute throughout the meat instead of spilling out, keeping every bite tender.
  • Always slice against the grain: This is the key to keeping flank steak tender. The long muscle fibers run in one direction, and cutting across them shortens those fibers, making each bite easier to chew.

What To Serve It With?

One of the things I love most about this flank steak marinade recipe is how versatile the steak turns out. You can serve it on its own for a simple dinner or build it into bowls, tacos, or hearty salads. No matter how you enjoy it, here are some of my favorite recipes to round out the meal:

Grilled Vegetables: If you’re making this as a summer meal, it pairs beautifully with grilled vegetables like Grilled Eggplant or Grilled Corn on the Cob. Both are easy to prepare alongside the steak and bring that same fresh-off-the-grill taste to the plate.

Marinated flank steak served over a salad.

Salad: My Grilled Flank Steak Salad is a fantastic, meal-worthy salad that is everything you want in a bowl on a warm summer dinner. If you want a different option, my Original Caesar Salad, tangy Mediterranean Pasta Salad, or creamy Coleslaw with Greek Yogurt all complement the steak perfectly without overpowering it.

Potatoes: If you’re looking to add something hearty, try a side of crispy potatoes. I recommend my Fingerling Potatoes in an Air Fryer for a quick option or my simple Smashed Fingerling Potatoes.

Butter Sauce: And don’t forget a drizzle of something buttery to finish it off. A spoonful of Roasted Garlic Butter or my simple buttery Garlic Sauce takes this steak over the top and ties the whole meal together.

How To Store, Freeze, and Reheat?

If you have leftovers, this grilled flank steak keeps well and makes for an easy second meal. Remember, the key to great leftovers is preserving moisture. By following these simple steps, you can enjoy this delicious flank steak days or even weeks later with the same great taste:

Storage:

If you’re planning to store leftovers, I recommend keeping the steak whole. It helps lock in moisture and makes it easier to reheat without overcooking. Once it’s cooled, wrap it up or transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days. 

If it’s already sliced, that’s okay, you’ll just want to reheat it in a cast-iron skillet with a splash of water to bring back some of that texture.

Freezing:

If you plan on freezing it, I recommend freezing the cooked steak whole. Let it cool completely first, then wrap it tightly in parchment paper or plastic wrap to help prevent freezer burn. Place it in a freezer-safe bag and press out as much air as you can before sealing. It’ll keep well in the freezer for up to 3 months.

When you’re ready to enjoy it again, thaw it in the fridge overnight. For a quicker option, submerge the sealed bag in a bowl of cold water and let it sit for about 30 minutes.

Reheating: 

If you stored your steak whole, the best way to reheat it is in the oven. Preheat to 275°F, wrap the steak loosely in foil, and warm it for 10 to 15 minutes or until heated through. Covering is important as it will help lock in moisture and keep the steak from drying out.

If your steak is already sliced, I recommend reheating it in a cast-iron skillet over medium heat. Add a splash of water or beef broth to keep it moist, and warm just until heated through. This helps bring back some of that texture and gives the edges a slight crisp without overcooking the inside.

Whichever method you use, reheat low and slow. Since flank steak is lean, high heat can dry it out fast.

FAQs

How long can you marinate flank steak?

You can marinate flank steak for as little as 1 hour at room temperature if you’re short on time. For the best results, though, I recommend marinating it overnight in the fridge. Just be sure not to go over 24 hours, as the acid in the marinade can start to break the meat down and affect the texture.

Can I freeze raw flank steak in the marinade?

Yes, you technically can. Freezing pauses the marinating process, and as the meat thaws, it will continue to absorb the flavor. The key is to cook the meat as soon as it is thawed, to ensure that the acidic ingredients don’t alter its texture too much.
To freeze, place the raw meat and the marinade in a freezer-safe bag and remove all the air. Freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight before cooking.

Can I freeze marinated flank steak after it is cooked?

Yes, you can. For best results, freeze the steak whole. This helps maintain its moisture and texture when you reheat it. Make sure it’s fully cooled, then wrap it tightly in parchment paper or plastic wrap to avoid freezer burn. Transfer it to a freezer-safe bag, remove as much air as possible, and seal. It’ll keep well in the freezer for up to 3 months.

What is the best way to slice flank steak?

Always slice flank steak against the grain. This means cutting across the visible lines of muscle fibers rather than parallel to them. Doing this shortens the muscle fibers and gives you tender and easy-to-chew pieces every time.

Can I use this marinade for skirt steak as well?

Yes, you can. Skirt steak is a similar cut that is lean and perfect for high-heat cooking, so it benefits from the same balance of acidity, salt, and sweetness.

Flank Steak vs. Flap Steak: Are they the same?

Most people are confused about these two cuts of meat, but they are not the same. Flank steak comes from the cow’s lower abdomen, while flap steak is cut from the bottom sirloin, just next to the flank. With that being said, this marinade can be used for flap steak and deliver great results.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Steak Recipes You Might Like:

If you enjoyed this easy flank steak recipe, there are plenty of other ways to enjoy it too:

  • For an easy weeknight dinner or a get-together, you can’t go wrong with my Flank Steak Tacos. These pair perfectly with fresh toppings and warm tortillas.
  • If you’re craving something hearty and satisfying, my Chimichurri Steak Sandwich is always a hit.  Imagine perfectly cooked steak wrapped in chimichurri sauce in a soft, crusty bread. It’s everything you want in a sandwich.
  • Or if you’re in the mood for something lighter, try the cult-favorite, Houston’s Thai Steak Noodle Salad for an impressive yet easy steak dinner recipe.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Grilled marinated Flank steak sliced on a plate.
Print

Flank Steak Marinade Recipe

Here's an easy flank steak marinade that transforms a budget-friendly cut into a tender, juicy steak every time. Made with simple pantry staples, it's perfect for grilling, broiling, or searing flank steak for an easy, crowd-pleasing meal.
Course Meat
Cuisine American
Diet Halal
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Marinating Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 25 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 266kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more to oil the grill grates
  • cup soy sauce
  • ¼ cup apple cider vinegar or balsamic vinegar or red wine vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice or lime juice
  • 2 tablespoons Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon honey or brown sugar
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon sweet paprika
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 ½ lbs flank steak

Instructions

  • Select a container that is large enough to fit your flank steak comfortably, ideally one with a fitting lid. Alternatively, you can also use a resealable plastic bag.
  • Add in ¼ cup of olive oil, ⅓ cup of soy sauce, ¼ cup of apple cider vinegar, 2 tablespoons of lemon juice, 2 tablespoons of Worcestershire sauce, 1 tablespoon of Dijon mustard, 1 tablespoon of honey, 3 cloves of minced garlic, 1 teaspoon of sweet paprika, ½ teaspoon of ground cumin, ½ teaspoon of kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon black pepper. Whisk to combine.
    Flank steak marinade being poured over the meat.
  • Add the flank steak and ensure that the whole piece is submerged in the marinade.
  • Cover and refrigerate for at least 1 hour, preferably overnight, but no longer than 24 hours.
    Flank steak in the marinade and then on the grill.

To Cook it on the Grill:

  • When ready to cook, preheat a gas grill to 500°F.
  • Scrape the grill grates to remove any possible food residue. Dip a wad of paper towel into a bowl of oil and coat the grates generously with the oil.
  • Remove the flank steak from the marinade, letting the excess marinade drip off. Discard the marinade.
  • Place the meat on the grill and cook for 3-4 minutes on each side for rare (internal temperature is 130 to 135 °F), 4-5 minutes on each side for medium (internal temperature is 136 to 145 °F), or 5-6 minutes on each side for medium-well (internal temperature is 146 to 155 °F).
  • When it reaches your desired doneness, transfer the grilled flank steak to a platter and cover it with foil.
  • Let it rest for 5 minutes, and then slice it against the grain. Serve while still warm.

To Broil in The Oven

  • Set your oven to the "broil" setting on high. For the best results, place the oven rack in the upper third section, about 5-6 inches from the heat source.
  • Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set a wire rack over it.
  • Remove the steak from the marinade and let the excess drip off before transferring it to your prepared sheet pan. Broil for 5-6 minutes on each side, or until it reaches your desired doneness.
  • Transfer the steak to a plate, cover loosely with foil, and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before slicing.

On The Stove Top

  • Place a large cast-iron skillet over medium high heat and heat it until sizzling hot.
  • Remove the marinated flank steak from the marinade, making sure to remove any excess. Transfer it onto a clean plate and pat dry with a paper towel to remove as much of the liquid as possible.
  • Transfer the steak to the skillet and sear for 3-4 minutes or until nicely browned. Flip the steak and cook for another 3-5 minutes, depending on the level of doneness you prefer.

Video

Notes

  • Let it come to room temperature before grilling: If you are marinating your steak overnight, take it out of the fridge and let it rest on the counter 30 to 60 minutes before grilling. If you put cold marinated steak on a hot grill, it won’t sear properly. It’s likely that the outside will cook before the inside is cooked.
  • Level of doneness: Please use the grilling times I listed in the post as a place to start. The grilling time could change based on the thickness of your flank steak. The best way to check doneness is with a meat thermometer.
  • Storage: If you’re planning to store leftovers, I recommend keeping the steak whole. Once it’s cooled, wrap it up or transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days. If it’s already sliced, that’s okay too. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 266kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 68mg | Sodium: 1077mg | Potassium: 495mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 173IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 41mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/flank-steak-marinade/feed/ 2
Ground Beef Stroganoff Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/ground-beef-stroganoff-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/ground-beef-stroganoff-recipe/#comments Wed, 12 Feb 2025 15:08:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80118 If you are a fan of the traditional Beef Stroganoff made with sirloin steak tips but want a quicker way…]]>

If you are a fan of the traditional Beef Stroganoff made with sirloin steak tips but want a quicker way to make it, this recipe for beef stroganoff using ground beef is just what you need. It’s faster to make, more economical, and just as comforting—a total win-win!

This easy version still delivers the same rich, savory stroganoff sauce but swaps in hamburger meat for a more convenient twist. And if ground beef isn’t your favorite, my Chicken Stroganoff recipe is another delicious alternative.

Hamburger stroganoff recipe garnished with parsley in a pot from the top view.

Ingredients and Substitutions

Our stroganoff recipe with ground beef calls for only a few basic ingredients that you can find at your local grocery store—some you may even already have on hand at home:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.
  • Vegetable oil: Any neutral-tasting oil like olive oil, avocado oil, or ghee can be used. If you prefer a richer flavor, then you can also use unsalted butter.
  • Ground beef: Hamburger meat, aka chop meat, aka ground meat—whatever you want to call it—is what we’re using in this easy hamburger stroganoff recipe. I recommend using 93% lean ground beef. With that being said, if you are looking to lighten up the dish further, you’re also welcome to swap in ground turkey or ground chicken as an alternative to burger meat.
  • Onion: I find that this beef burger stroganoff pairs best with a white or yellow chopped onion. 
  • Mushrooms: This beef stroganoff skips the canned cream of mushroom soup, avoiding unnecessary additives and opting for fresh mushrooms instead. I find that baby bella mushrooms (also known as cremini mushrooms) add more depth of flavor, but white button mushrooms also work. Just be sure you slice them thinly in advance. 
  • Fresh garlic cloves: You really want the full flavor of fresh garlic—trust me. But if you only have granulated garlic (or garlic powder) on hand, you are welcome to swap that in instead.
  • Flour: Wondering the secret to making the best stroganoff sauce? It’s in the roux! In this homemade ground beef stroganoff recipe I use general all-purpose flour to prepare the sauce. However, if you need to make this as a gluten-free dish, then it is ok to use your favorite cup for cup gluten-free flour instead.
  • Beef broth: Use your favorite low-sodium beef broth brand or if you have the time, make your own.
  • Worcestershire sauce: This classic steak sauce gives homemade ground beef stroganoff its zing—don’t skip it!
  • Seasonings: This simple recipe requires nothing much in the realm of seasonings beyond Kosher salt and pepper, as the beef broth, burger meat, and mushrooms really bring out that umami flavor on their own. 
  • Sour cream: For the creamiest stroganoff sauce, I recommend using full-fat sour cream. If you’re seeking to lighten up the dish, you can substitute Greek yogurt in its place; however, just note that it will have a bit more tangy taste and a less creamy texture.
  • Egg noodles: Available in various sizes, egg noodles all work well in this recipe, but I prefer medium-sized noodles for the best texture and bite. With that being said, you can use plain dried pasta as well. I like short pasta like fusilli or penne. And if you use pasta, I recommend cooking it separately until al dente and then adding it to the sauce.
  • Acid: To brighten up the flavors, I prefer to use a generous squeeze of lemon juice, but apple cider vinegar would also work with this ground beef stroganoff recipe. Alternatively, you can also mix in ½ to 1 teaspoon of Dijon mustard to the sauce to brighten up the flavors.
  • Fresh parsley

How to Make Beef Stroganoff with Ground Beef?

This hamburger stroganoff recipe with homemade beef stroganoff sauce is so delicious and simple to make that you’ll no longer be tempted to grab the powdered box mix or that additive-laden can of cream of mushroom soup. Below are the steps:

  1. Start with warming your oil. Heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large skillet or Dutch oven over medium-high heat until it shimmers. 
A collage of images showing how to make hamburger stroganoff recipe.
  1. Cook your stroganoff hamburger meat. Add the ground beef to the warmed oil and cook it until it’s evenly browned, breaking it up as you cook to avoid large chunks. This should take only about 5 minutes. Then, transfer the now-cooked meat onto a platter using a slotted spoon and set it aside.
  2. Saute your mushrooms, onions, and garlic. Continue with the pan on medium-high heat, adding the remaining tablespoon of olive oil. Then, add the chopped onions and sliced mushrooms and saute them until the liquid from the mushrooms has evaporated—this takes about 6-8 minutes. 
  3. Add garlic: After the mushrooms are softened, reduce the heat if needed to avoid burning before you add the fresh garlic, sauteeing it for an additional 30 seconds.
A collage of images showing the steps of making this recipe.
  1. Make your roux. Sprinkle the flour over the cooked vegetables and stir continuously for 30-45 seconds, or until the flour turns golden brown. 
  2. Prepare your beef stroganoff sauce. Gradually pour in the broth, stirring frequently to deglaze the pan, scraping the browned bits at the bottom aka the fond) to thoroughly incorporate them. Then, bring the mixture to a boil and cook it until the sauce has thickened, which takes about 3-4 minutes.
  3. Combine your ground meat and seasonings to the stroganoff sauce. Add the now-browned ground beef, Worcestershire sauce, Kosher salt, and pepper to the skillet. Give it a good stir.
  4. Add in the noodles to cook them in the beef stroganoff sauce. Stir in the egg noodles and simmer, covered, on low heat for 10 – 12 minutes (or until tender), stirring occasionally.
  5. Remove from heat to finish the dish. Take the skillet off of the heat, then stir in the sour cream and lemon juice (or apple cider vinegar), if using. Adjust the seasoning to your desired taste.
  6. Garnish your pasta. When you’re ready to serve the one-pan hamburger stroganoff, sprinkle the top of it with the parsley.

How To Store and Freeze Leftovers?

  • To Make-Ahead: Brown the meat, sauté the vegetables, and make the sauce up to 2 days in advance. Store in an airtight container in the fridge and simply reheat before adding cooked noodles and sour cream.
  • To Store: Because this is truly the best hamburger stroganoff recipe, don’t anticipate that you’ll have leftovers (wink-wink), but if you do, recommend that you allow the beef burger stroganoff to come to room temperature first. Once it’s no longer hot, you can place it in an airtight container and store it in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. 
  • To Freeze: If you are planning to freeze your homemade hamburger stroganoff, it’s best to freeze the creamy sauce and ground beef mixture separately from the noodles for the best texture. The noodles don’t freeze well and the dish will taste far better when you prepare the noodles fresh on the day you plan to serve them. To do this, prepare the recipe through Step 6, then allow the sauce to come to room temperature. Place it in an airtight freezer-safe container and freeze it for up to 3 months. To defrost it, place it in the fridge overnight to thaw. 
  • To Reheat: When reheating this beef stroganoff with hamburger and mushrooms, I recommend that you do so over medium heat, stirring frequently. You may have to add a splash of water (or beef broth) to thin it out, depending on the consistency of the stroganoff sour cream sauce.

FAQs

Can you use cream cheese instead of sour cream?

Your finished this would have a slightly different flavor, but you can mix softened (room temperature) cream cheese with a few tablespoons of warmed beef broth and add it at the end (off the heat).

Can I use Greek yogurt instead of sour cream?

Yes, you can substitute Greek yogurt for sour cream, but the dish will have a slightly tangier flavor. I recommend using whole milk Greek yogurt, as its higher fat content creates a creamy texture similar to sour cream.

Can I add other vegetables to the sauce?

While it is not traditional, you can add vegetables to make it more nourishing. When choosing veggies, opt for quick-cooking veggies like peas and spinach.

Can I make ground beef stroganoff without mushrooms?

Again, not traditional, but you can make it without mushrooms. To maintain the umami flavors, you can add an extra teaspoon of Worcestershire sauce, a splash of soy sauce, or a beef bouillon to intensify the flavor.

What To Serve It With?

One of our favorite things about our beef stroganoff recipe with ground beef and sour cream is that the savory flavors pair well with practically any one of our vegetable side dishes. Can’t decide? Here are a couple of our top pairings.

Ground beef stroganoff with sour cream in a bowl garnished with parsley.

Expert Tips

Our beef stroganoff recipe with hamburger truly couldn’t be easier. However, here are a few added tips that we’ve discovered in our test kitchen to ensure your finished meal comes together seamlessly:

  • A large skillet is ideal. What you want for this recipe is a lot of surface area so that your ingredients aren’t piled up on top of each other and can cook evenly. This is my go-to skillet (affiliate link) for any time I make this easy ground meat stroganoff recipe. 
  • Have everything ready before you begin cooking. This recipe comes together so quickly that you won’t want to reach for ingredients that haven’t been set aside and measured yet. This is one of those recipes where an advanced mise en place really comes in handy. 
  • Watch the noodles closely. Once your noodles go into the skillet with the sauce, keep an eye on them, as egg noodles cook quickly and you don’t want them to turn into mush. 
  • Adjust your stroganoff sauce consistency as needed. The recipe written in the recipe card below will give you the creamiest sauce, but if it is thicker than you want, you can add a splash of beef broth to thin it out. And if it ends up being too thin, just continue to cook for a few minutes longer until it thickens, stirring often and keeping a close eye on it.
  • This dish can be prepared in the skillet with or without the noodles. You can prepare this dish in the skillet with or without the noodles. Some people prefer to cook and drain the noodles separately, then serve the stroganoff over them on the plate. If that’s easier for you, go for it! This method is especially useful if you plan to freeze leftovers, as I recommend freezing the stroganoff sauce without the noodles for the best texture.
  • Don’t add in your sour cream until the dish is off the stove. Sour cream will curdle if cooked over heat, so you will want to wait to add it to your hamburger stroganoff once you have finished cooking it and have taken it off the burner.

You Might Also Like

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make your own easy Ground Beef Stroganoff Recipe following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Ground beef stroganoff in a pot from the top view.
Print

Ground Beef Stroganoff Recipe

Our Ground Beef Stroganoff recipe is a quick, budget-friendly one-pan meal that’s hearty, comforting, and ready in 30 minutes. Made with hamburger meat, fresh mushrooms, and sour cream, it delivers a rich, savory stroganoff sauce perfect for busy weeknight dinners.
Course Weeknight Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Halal
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 376kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoons olive oil divided
  • 1 pound ground beef 93%
  • ½ medium onion roughly chopped (about 1 cup)
  • 8 ounces baby bella mushrooms cleaned and thinly sliced (aka cremini mushrooms)
  • 3 cloves garlic finely minced
  • 2 tablespoons all-purpose flour or your favorite gluten free flour
  • 2 cups beef broth
  • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ½ cup sour cream full-fat
  • 3 cups egg noodles uncooked (5 ounces)
  • 1 tablespoon fresh lemon juice or apple cider vinegar
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley minced

Instructions

  • Heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large skillet or Dutch oven over medium-high heat until it shimmers.
  • Add 1 pound of ground beef and cook until browned, breaking it up as you cook to avoid large chunks, about 5 minutes. Transfer the now-cooked meat onto a platter using a slotted spoon and set it aside.
    Hamburger meat being sauteed in a skillet.
  • Continue with the pan on medium-high heat, adding the remaining tablespoon of olive oil. Add the ½ cup chopped onions and 8 ounces of sliced cremini mushrooms and saute until the liquid from the mushrooms has evaporated, about 6-8 minutes. Reduce the heat if needed to avoid burning. Add 3 cloves of minced garlic and saute for 30 seconds.
    Person adding garlic to mushroom sauce.
  • Sprinkle 2 tablespoons of all-purpose flour over the cooked vegetables and stir continuously for 30-45 seconds, until the flour turns golden brown.
  • Gradually pour in 2 cups of beef broth, stirring frequently to deglaze the pan (scraping the browned bits at the bottom) and incorporate the fond. Bring the mixture to a boil and cook until the sauce is thickened about 3-4 minutes.
    Flour and beef broth is added to the skillet.
  • Add the now-browned ground beef, 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce, 1 teaspoon kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon black pepper to the skillet. Give it a good stir.
  • Stir in 3 cups of egg noodles and simmer, covered, on low heat for 10 – 12 minutes until tender, stirring occasionally.
    The stages of cooking the recipe is shown from the top view.
  • Off the heat, stir in ½ cup sour cream and a tablespoon (or more to taste) lemon juice (or apple cider vinegar), if using. Adjust the seasoning to your desired taste.
    Sour cream added to the ground beef stroganoff in a skillet.
  • When ready to serve, sprinkle with 1 tablespoon of chopped fresh parsley.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 7-8 cups of ground beef stroganoff, which is ideal for six servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storing leftovers: Bring leftovers to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 3-4 days. To reheat, place them in a large skillet over medium heat, adding a few splashes of water or broth if it is too thick.
  • A note on sour cream: For the creamiest texture, I recommend using full-fat sour cream, but a low-fat one can also be used. You can substitute cream cheese (by mixing 3-4 tablespoons with some of the liquid and adding it to the pan) for an even creamier taste. If you want a lighter alternative, while not traditional, you can use Greek yogurt, but keep in mind the taste will be tangier, and the texture will be less creamy.
 

Nutrition

Calories: 376kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 81mg | Sodium: 786mg | Potassium: 540mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 191IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/ground-beef-stroganoff-recipe/feed/ 6
Beef Barley Soup Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/beef-barley-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/beef-barley-soup/#comments Wed, 15 Jan 2025 18:42:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79780 Ingredients for Beef Barley Soup While you can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, here…]]>

Why This Version Succeeds Where Other Recipes Fall Short

Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

A big pot of beef soup on the stove is one of the coziest things during the colder months, and beef and barley soup is a true classic.

The problem is that many versions end up with mushy barley, dry beef, or a soup that’s either too thick or a little bland.

Over the last few years, I’ve made it my mission to develop a recipe that avoids those exact issues. After many tests, I am here with my version of the best beef and barley soup. Here are the reasons why:

  • Chuck roast stays tender during a long simmer. I cut a whole chuck roast myself (instead of buying precut stew meat made up of odds and ends of leftover cuts), so the pieces cook evenly, stay juicy, and taste consistent throughout the soup.
  • Barley is added later (after the meat is browned and veggies cooked) to prevent it from turning mushy. It gets just enough time to cook through while keeping a nice texture.
  • A splash of apple cider vinegar keeps the soup from tasting bland. It balances the richness of the beef and the earthiness of the barley.
  • Simmering with the lid slightly ajar helps control thickness. Keeping the lid ajar lets excess moisture escape slowly so the soup thickens naturally without becoming gluey or overly dense.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Ingredients for Beef Barley Soup

While you can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, here are a few helpful notes to guide you as you prepare the soup and make it your own.

Top-down view of Beef Barley Soup ingredients in small bowls, including cubed chuck roast, pearl barley, diced carrots, celery, onion, and fresh thyme on a blue tiled surface.

Choosing The Right Meat

Chuck roast: Chuck roast is my go-to cut for beef barley soup because it is well-suited for longer cooking times. Cut from the shoulder, it contains plenty of connective tissue that slowly breaks down as the soup simmers, resulting in fall-apart tender, rich bites of beef. 

Wouldn’t it be better (and more time-saving) to buy already-cut stew meat instead? It might seem easier to buy pre-cut stew meat, and yes, it does save you a few minutes.

But I still like to cut my own because most store-bought stew meat is usually a mix of different cuts that cook at different times. Some pieces turn tender while others stay tough.

Starting with one cut, like chuck roast, and cutting it into ½-inch cubes yourself helps everything cook evenly and stay tender.

Vegetable oil: You can use olive oil or any neutral oil, such as avocado oil, to sear the meat. The goal is to use an oil with a higher smoke point so the beef browns properly without burning.

For the Soup + Tips on Buying Barley

Pearl barley: When shopping for barley, be sure to choose pearl barley rather than hulled barley. Pearl barley differs in that its outer bran layer is removed, allowing it to cook more quickly and develop a tender, slightly chewy texture that works especially well in soups and stews. 

Hulled barley can be used, but it takes much longer to cook.

Vegetables: We are using chopped onion, carrots, and celery, the classic combination of veggies that pretty much any meat soup recipe like this uses. As you are chopping them, take your time to cut them into even pieces so they cook evenly.

Beef broth: You can use homemade beef stock or buy it from the store. If you choose to use store-bought, get low-sodium beef broth so you can easily control the salt level in your soup.

Selecting Your Broth: For the richest flavor, I recommend choosing a beef broth that lists real beef bones or beef stock as the first ingredient rather than “beef base” or artificial flavorings.

I tested this recipe with Kettle & Fire, and it worked beautifully.

Alternatively, you can use chicken stock. I have also tested this recipe with my homemade chicken stock, and while the color was slightly lighter, the soup was still delicious and satisfying.

Red wine: A medium-bodied red wine, such as Pinot Noir or Merlot, enhances the soup’s subtle, earthy flavor.

Can I make this soup without alcohol? Yes, for an alcohol-free barley beef soup recipe, you can substitute an equal amount of beef broth for wine.

Diced tomatoes: I use one 14-ounce can of diced tomatoes (unsalted) to add just a hint of acidity and subtle sweetness to the soup without overpowering it.

Worcestershire sauce: This classic seasoning adds a subtle umami depth to the soup. Its savory, slightly tangy notes help balance the richness of the beef.

Fresh herbs: I use a few sprigs of fresh thyme, tied together with kitchen twine so they are easy to remove before serving. I also add a handful of fresh chopped parsley at the end for a vibrant finish. You can use dried herbs in a pinch, but I would use no more than a teaspoon of dried thyme as a substitute.

Apple cider vinegar (optional): While optional, a splash of an acidic ingredient, such as vinegar or lemon juice, is my secret move to take this beef and barley soup from good to great. It adds a nice tang that helps balance the rich flavors of the beef and earthy flavors of all the veggies in the soup.

How to Make Beef Barley Soup (Step-by-Step)

This homemade beef barley soup comes together in one pot, making it both simple to prepare and easy to clean up. I highly recommend having all your ingredients ready before you start. Here is how I make it:

A collage showing aromatics being sautéed with tomato paste, deglazing the pot with red wine, and adding diced tomatoes and beef back into the broth.

Step 1 – Prepare the beef: Using a sharp knife, cut the meat into ½-inch cubes. You can cut them larger (about 1-inch cubes) if you prefer more stew-sized meat in your soup. It is a personal preference. 

Then, pat the beef really well with paper towels on all sides so it browns instead of steaming, which is what gives you that deep, rich base in the soup.  Once it’s dry, season all sides with salt and pepper so every piece is properly seasoned from the start.

Step 2 – Sear the meat: Heat the oil in a large Dutch oven (at least 5.5 quarts) over medium-high heat until it shimmers. Add the beef in an even layer. Since we’re using a large Dutch oven with a rather large surface area and the beef is cut into small pieces, we can add all the meat at once. 

Spread it out in an even layer as much as possible. Let it cook undisturbed for a minute or two before stirring, which gives it a chance to brown, which is imperative for building that rich meat flavor that this soup is known for.

But wait, there is so much liquid in the pan? During my recipe testing, I quickly found out that at this stage, the meat releases some of its juices as it cooks, and that’s okay.

As you let it cook and stir, some of it cooks off, and the meat starts to brown. The key is to continue stirring every few minutes so all sides get a chance to brown. It takes about 6-10 minutes (depending on your meat), so be patient.

Also, keep in mind that they will shrink as they cook.

Once done, transfer the now-seared beef to a plate and cover it with foil to keep it warm. Do not wash the pot!

Step 3 – Cook the vegetables: Using the same large pot, add the diced onion, sliced carrots, and sliced celery. Cook them over medium-high heat, stirring frequently, for about 10 minutes, or until they soften and start to release their natural sweetness.

Pro Tip: I usually don’t add extra oil at this stage since chuck roast is well-marbled and leaves enough fat in the pot to cook the vegetables. That said, if the pot looks dry, feel free to add a tablespoon of olive oil to help them sauté evenly.

A collage of images showing how to cook the vegetables and make the broth for this Dutch oven beef barley soup recipe.

Step 4 – Add the aromatics: Add the minced garlic and sauté for about 30 seconds, just until fragrant. Keep an eye on it, as garlic can burn quickly. Stir in the tomato paste, salt, and black pepper and cook, stirring constantly, for about 1 minute.

Step 5 – Deglaze the pot: Pour in the red wine, then use a wooden spoon to gently scrape up the browned bits from the bottom of the pot. Those bits hold a lot of flavor, and the wine helps lift them while adding depth to the soup. 

Let it simmer for a minute or two, so some of the alcohol cooks off and further concentrates before we move on to the next part.

Step 6 – Add the broth: Return the seared beef to the pot along with any juices collected on the plate (those juices are pure flavor, so don’t skip them). Add the beef broth, diced tomatoes, and the thyme sprigs tied together with kitchen twine.

Give everything a good stir, then reduce the heat to medium-low. Let the soup simmer, partially covered, for 30–45 minutes, allowing the beef to slowly tenderize while the flavors come together.

Step 7 – Add barley and finish cooking: Stir in the pearl barley and Worcestershire sauce, and let it simmer until the barley is tender, about 45-55 minutes. 

You’ll notice the barley absorbs liquid as it goes, so check on the soup and give it a stir about every 15 minutes to prevent it from sticking to the bottom. The barley is ready when it’s tender but still has a slight bite.

Step 8 – Season and serve: Remove the thyme bundle and stir in a splash of apple cider vinegar. Give it a taste and adjust the seasoning as needed, then finish with a sprinkle of fresh parsley and serve while hot.

A cozy close-up of a bowl of Beef Barley Soup garnished with parsley, served with crusty sourdough bread and a glass of red wine.

Expert Tips for the Best Beef Barley Soup Recipe

Making beef barley soup doesn’t have to be complicated, but a few small details can make a big difference in the final result. These are the tips I rely on every time to make sure the soup turns out just right:

Keep an eye on the consistency: As the soup simmers and the barley cooks, you might notice the liquid reducing quite a bit. This is completely normal. I usually keep the lid slightly ajar to minimize evaporation. You can also move the pot to the simmer burner (or to the smallest heat source on your stove top) and/or add more water or broth as needed. 

Add warm broth, not cold: If you need to thin the soup while it’s cooking or reheating, use warm water or warm beef broth. Adding cold liquid can slow down the cooking process and affect the overall texture.

Check the barley packaging: While pearl barley typically takes about 45-55 minutes to cook, different brands can vary slightly. It’s always a good idea to check the package and use the texture as your guide; the barley should be tender but still have a bit of bite.

Taste at the end: The flavors concentrate as the soup cooks, so it’s best to do your final seasoning right before serving. A quick taste at the end lets you adjust salt or add a splash of acid if needed.

Beef barley vegetable soup in a Dutch oven with a ladle full of soup.
Print

Beef Barley Soup Recipe

Warm yourself from the inside out with this foolproof, one-pot Beef Barley Soup recipe! Meticulously tested to ensure tender beef and perfectly cooked barley, it's a rich, satisfying comfort meal you can count on. Never mushy or bland.
Course Soup
Cuisine American
Diet Kosher
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 50 minutes
Total Time 2 hours 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 462kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

For The Meat:

  • 2 lbs chuck roast
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons vegetable oil such as olive oil or avocado oil

For The Soup:

  • 1 onion 340g/3 cups, roughly chopped
  • 3 carrots 180g/1 ½ cups, peeled and sliced thinly
  • 2 stalks celery about 1 cup, sliced thinly
  • 4 garlic cloves finely minced
  • 3 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ½ cup red wine
  • 7 cups beef broth plus more as needed
  • 1 14- ounce can diced tomatoes
  • 3-4 sprigs fresh thyme tied with kitchen twine
  • 1 cup pearl barley
  • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
  • 2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar optional
  • ½ cup fresh parsley roughly chopped plus more for garnish

Instructions

  • Using a sharp chef’s knife, cut 2 lbs of chuck roast into ½-inch cubes. Pat them dry using a sheet of paper towel.
  • Season the cubed beef with 1 teaspoon kosher salt and ½ teaspoon of black pepper on all sides. Set aside.
  • Heat two tablespoons of olive oil in the Dutch oven over medium-high heat until it shimmers.
  • Add the beef cubes and brown them on all sides for about 6-7 minutes, about a minute or two per side. Transfer them onto a plate, cover it with aluminum foil, and set it aside. Do not wash the pot.
  • Add 3 cups chopped onion, 1 ½ cups of carrots, and 1 cup celery to the pot and cook on medium-high heat, until softened, stirring frequently, for about 10 minutes.
  • Add the 4 minced cloves of garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
  • Add 3 tablespoons of tomato paste and cook, stirring constantly for about a minute or so. Season with 1 teaspoon of kosher salt and ½ teaspoon of black pepper.
  • Stir in ½ cup of red wine and scrape any brown “bits” at the bottom of the pot using a wooden spoon.
  • Add the browned beef (with all the juices), 7 cups of beef broth, one 14-ounce can of diced tomatoes, and 3-4 sprigs of fresh thyme. Give it a stir, place the lid ajar, and bring it to a boil. Then, turn the heat down to medium-low and let it simmer for 30-45 minutes or until your meat is fully cooked and tender.
  • Next, stir in 1 cup pearl barley and 1 tablespoon of Worcestershire sauce.
  • Let it simmer, with the lid ajar, for 45-55 minutes, keeping a close eye on it and stirring occasionally, until the pearl barley is tender but has a slight “bite”.
  • Turn the heat off, remove the thyme bundle, and stir in 2 tablespoons of apple cider vinegar if using. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • Add ½ cup of chopped fresh parsley and serve right away.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 11-12 cups of soup, enough to serve 6 adults. The nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Consistency of the soup: As the soup simmers, you’ll see some of the liquid evaporate, resulting in a thicker soup. I recommend keeping the lid slightly ajar while simmering to prevent too much liquid from evaporating. This helps maintain the soup’s rich flavor without diluting it. Still, you can add more broth or water for a thinner consistency. However, be sure to add warm liquid to keep the soup’s temperature consistent.
  • Storage and freezing: You can store the leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4-5 days and in the freezer for up to 3 months. Just be sure to bring it to room temperature before storing it. Thaw it overnight in the fridge.
  • Reheating: Transfer the leftovers to a saucepan, add a cup (more or less) of water or broth, and warm on medium heat, stirring regularly.
  • Slow cooker beef and barley soup: If you’re looking for a more hands-off approach, or want to make it ahead, you can cook this soup in your crockpot. The process is similar but with a few key differences. Simply:
    • Sear the meat, set it aside, sauté the vegetables, and cook the wine while scraping up those browned bits. 
    • Store the meat and veggies separately in airtight containers in the fridge overnight. 
    • In the morning, transfer everything to a slow cooker, along with the rest of the ingredients. Cook it on low for 7-9 hours or high for 4-5 hours until the meat is tender. If you can, stir it a few times during the process. 
    • When done, stir in the apple cider vinegar and parsley right before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 462kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 37g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 104mg | Sodium: 2069mg | Potassium: 1051mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 5700IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 89mg | Iron: 6mg

Storage, Freezing, and Reheating

One of the great things about this vegetable beef barley soup is that it tastes even better the next day as the flavors develop and meld, so you can make a big pot as a part of your meal plan and enjoy it throughout the week. 

Here is how I do it:

Storing leftovers: Let the soup cool to room temperature, then transfer it to an airtight container. It will keep well in the refrigerator for 4-5 days. As it sits, the soup will thicken since the barley continues to absorb liquid. When reheating, add a splash of broth (or water) to thin it out.

Freezing: Once it comes to room temperature, transfer it to freezer-safe containers and freeze for up to 3 months. When you’re ready to enjoy it, thaw it overnight in the fridge for the best texture and flavor.

Reheating: To reheat, transfer the soup to a saucepan and warm it over medium heat, stirring occasionally. Since it thickens as it sits, add a small amount (no more than ¼ cup) of water or beef broth as needed to loosen it.

Pro-Tip for Meal Prepping: If you are making this as a part of your meal prep, I recommend slightly undercooking the barley (about 5 minutes). This way, it will reach perfect tenderness during reheating.

Variations & Substitutions

What I love most about this recipe for beef barley soup is that it is easily adaptable with whatever you have on hand. Here are some substitution and variation ideas to make this soup your own:

Other types of beef: When it comes to meat choice, you have options:

  • Other cuts: Instead of chuck roast, you can also use boneless short ribs, beef shank, or brisket, all of which work for slow cooking.
  • Beef stew meat: You can use pre-cut packaged beef stew meat from most grocery stores, but be sure to check that it’s sourced from the same cut, such as chuck roast, rather than a mix of random trimmings from different leftover cuts. Doing so ensures that you end up with evenly cooked meat with a similar texture and taste.
  • Ground beef: You can use ground beef for a quick and easy beef barley soup. This version, often called hamburger barley soup, allows you to skip the longer cooking time required for tougher cuts. Simply sauté the ground beef (hamburger meat), then cook the vegetables in the same pot.
  • Already cooked (leftover) beef: If you have some leftover roast, prime rib, or beef tenderloin, you can cut them into bite-sized chunks and use them in this veggie beef barley soup. Since the leftover meat is already cooked, you can skip sautéing it at the beginning and add it when you add the broth.

Additional vegetables: Parsnips, turnips, mushrooms, peas, green beans, or leeks would all be delicious additions. And if you want to sneak in some greens, you can stir in a handful of baby spinach or even kale at the very end. 

Spices: While I kept the recipe simple with salt and pepper, you can enhance the flavors and bring warmth to your soup by adding a small amount of ground cumin, ground coriander, sweet paprika, and a few bay leaves. These additions add depth to the broth without overpowering the overall flavor.

FAQs

Why did my barley turn mushy?

Barley usually turns mushy if it’s added too early or cooked for too long. Pearl barley needs time to soften, but it should still have a slight bite. To avoid this, add it after the beef has had time to tenderize and keep an eye on the simmer so it doesn’t overcook.

What is the best cut of beef for beef barley soup?

The best cuts of beef for beef barley soup are those that can handle longer cooking times, such as chuck roast, short ribs, beef shank, or brisket. These cuts contain connective tissue that breaks down as the soup simmers.

How long does it take to cook barley in soup?

If you are using pearl barley, it typically takes about 45-55 minutes to cook in soup. The exact timing can vary slightly by brand, so it’s best to check the packaging for exact timing and use its texture as your guide.

Do you cook barley before adding it to soup?

No, there’s no need to cook the barley beforehand. Pearl barley is added uncooked and cooks directly in the soup, absorbing flavor from the broth as it softens.

Can I use quick-cooking barley?

Yes, but keep in mind that quick-cooking barley has a much shorter cooking time, usually 10-15 minutes, since it’s partially pre-steamed. If using it, add it toward the end of cooking to prevent it from becoming overly soft or mushy.

What to Serve With Beef Barley Soup

While this barley vegetable beef soup is excellent on its own, here are my favorite pairings:

Other Beef Soup Recipes You Might Like

It is no secret that beef soups and stews are the classic winter comfort food. If you are in need of more inspiration, here are a few more recipes:

  • Freezer favorite: If you love slow cooker meals, try my Crockpot Vegetable Beef Soup. It’s a set-it-and-forget-it version of classic vegetable beef soup, made with similar ingredients. It’s great for meal prep and freezes well.
  • An Old-Fashion Classic: For a quicker but similar soup, try my Vegetable Beef Soup is an old-fashioned favorite that comes together in under an hour. 
  • Weekend Meal Prep Favorite: If you’re in the mood for a cozy weekend supper, my Eggplant Beef Stew is a slow-simmered stew with pull-apart beef and a rich sauce.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/beef-barley-soup/feed/ 4
Turkish Pasta https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-pasta/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-pasta/#comments Sat, 04 Jan 2025 17:34:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79631 Growing up in Türkiye and making my fair share of Turkish recipes, this comforting Turkish pasta dish, known as kiymali makarna, was…]]>

Growing up in Türkiye and making my fair share of Turkish recipes, this comforting Turkish pasta dish, known as kiymali makarna, was one of my mom’s go-to weeknight dinners. So, when I came across Anna Paul’s TikTok video of her mom making it, I was instantly transported back to my childhood.

This dish is a simplified take on manti, the iconic Turkish dumplings known for their labor-intensive preparation. Making manti is usually a communal activity involving making the dough from scratch, filling it with spiced meat, and folding each piece by hand. It is a process that takes hours. This “cheat manti” (or sometimes referred to as “manti pasta”) offers the same bold and comforting flavors but in a fraction of the time, making it perfect for modern weeknight cooking.

Pasta Turkish garnished with dried mint and tomatoes from the front view.

Ingredients and Substitutions:

This dish is all about combining simple ingredients to create layers of flavor. While the list of ingredients may look long, there are plenty of options when it comes to substitutions. Below is what you’ll need:

Ingredients from the top view.
  • Pasta: I use farfalle, but other small pasta shapes like fusilli or penne would work. You can also use your gluten-free pasta if you are following a gluten-free diet. For a gluten-free option, use your favorite gluten-free pasta. While alternative pastas like chickpea or brown rice pasta can be used, note that their distinct flavors might slightly change the overall taste of the dish.
  • Ground beef: Lean ground beef (93%) works best for a lighter, flavorful meat sauce. You can also use ground lamb, turkey, or chicken, but keep in mind that each will bring a distinct flavor profile to the dish.
  • Yellow onion: You’ll need about a cup of finely chopped yellow onion. Any type of onion, like Walla Walla, Vidalia or even white onion would work.
  • Red Pepper Paste : Traditionally, this recipe uses mildly hot red pepper paste, which adds a unique depth of flavor. It’s readily available online (affiliate link). If you don’t have it on hand, tomato paste makes a great substitute.
  • Spices: You’ll need a combination of onion powder (to enhance the onion taste), ground cumin, sweet (or smoked) paprika, red pepper flakes (such as Aleppo or Urfa chili pepper), salt and black pepper.
  • Greek Yogurt: I like the thickness of plain Greek yogurt (as you can see in my Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce recipe), but regular unsweetened plain yogurt would also work. Go for full-fat yogurt for the most delicious creamy sauce or low-fat for a lighter one.
  • Fresh Garlic: Use fresh garlic cloves for the signature garlicky taste. However, while not traditional, you can use garlic powder for a milder flavor.
  • Lemon Juice: Similar to my yogurt dressing recipe, a squeeze of lemon juice helps balance the strong garlic flavor.
  • Unsalted butter: You can use salted or unsalted butter, but if you go with the salted version, be sure to adjust the seasoning accordingly.
  • Kosher salt
  • Garnish: Though they are optional, the traditional Turkish pasta is sprinkled with a handful of dried mint and sumac. Alternatively, you can use chopped parsley and chili flakes, if you don’t mind the heat. I also added a handful of cherry tomatoes for some color, but they are also optional. 

How To Make Turkish Pasta?

At first glance, this recipe might seem to have many steps, but most of them can be done simultaneously, making the process quicker and more efficient. Here is how I do it:

A collage of images showing how to make the tiktok viral Anna Paul's Turkish pasta recipe.
  1. Cook the pasta: Bring a large pot of generously salted water to a boil. Add the pasta and cook according to the package instructions until al dente. Save half a cup of the cooking liquid, drain the pasta, and set it aside.
  2. Saute meat: While the pasta is cooking, add the ground meat in a large skillet (or a pan). In the viral TikTok video, Anna’s mom intentionally does not use olive oil, saying that the meat releases its oils as you saute it. Initially, I was a bit skeptical, but she was right. Still, if you feel like your meat can benefit from a little olive oil, feel free to use it.
  3. Cook with the spices and add the onion: Add the spices and cook, stirring constantly, for about 5 minutes, or until the meat is no longer pink. Then, add the diced onion and red pepper paste (or tomato paste) cook until softened. As you are sauteing, use the reserved pasta as needed, ensuring that the meat sauce maintains its moisture levels.
  4. Make the garlicky yogurt sauce: Whisk yogurt, minced garlic, lemon juice and kosher salt in a bowl until super creamy. Taste for seasoning and make sure it is seasoned according to your taste buds.
A collage of photos showing the butter sauce drizzle.
  1. Make the butter drizzle: I recommend making the butter drizzle right before serving. The process is super simple. Melt butter in a small saucepan and then stir in 1 teaspoon sweet paprika, ¼ teaspoon (or more) red pepper flakes and ½ teaspoon kosher salt. Cook until butter is fully melted and bubbly.
  2. Assemble: To serve, grab a pasta bowl. Place the cooked pasta at the bottom, spoon 4 tablespoons of the yogurt sauce on top followed by ⅔ cup of the cooked beef. Finish it with a drizzle (about one or two tablespoons) of the paprika butter sauce. Repeat the same process for the rest of the bowls.
  3. Garnish: If preferred, garnish with a handful of cherry tomatoes, a tablespoon of dried mint (or fresh parsley) and a teaspoon of sumac, if using. 

Make Ahead and Storage Tips:

While this dish is quick to assemble, you can save time by preparing some components in advance to assemble it in a flash. It also stores well, making for a flavorful lunch the next day. Here is how I do it:

  • Make Ahead: 
    • Meat sauce: Cook the meat and onion mixture, let it cool to room temperature, and store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 2 days.
    • Garlic yogurt sauce: Prepare the sauce and store it in a jar or airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days.
    • On the day you plan to serve: Cook the pasta while reheating the meat sauce on the stovetop. Right before serving, make the chili butter sauce and assemble as written in the recipe.
  • Storage & Reheating: If you can, I recommend keeping each component of the leftovers separate in airtight containers in the fridge. When ready to serve, reheat the pasta, meat, and butter sauce and assemble as described in the recipe.
Cheat manti pasta recipe in a bowl with a fork on the side.

Helpful Tips:

  • Cooking onion: When I first saw the viral video, I was a bit skeptical about sauteing the onion after cooking the meat, but to my surprise, I found that this method preserves the onion flavor better, creating a distinct and delicious contrast, very similar to manti. It’s different from how my mom prepared it, but I really enjoyed the end result.
  • Spice levels: The spicy butter drizzle is a signature component of this recipe. While the recipe below is more on the milder side, feel free to up the amount of red pepper flakes if you love spicy food. The yogurt sauce beautifully balances the spiciness creating a harmonious flavor profile.
  • Let it sizzle: I’ve seen some people make the butter drizzle in the microwave. While I understand that it is convenient (and one last dish to wash), the butter drizzle is supposed to sizzle when drizzled. That is why, for the most authentic Turkish pasta experience, take the extra minute to melt and season the butter in a skillet. The sizzling adds a burst of aroma and flavor that truly elevates the dish.
  • Curry powder: In Anna Paul’s version of Turkish pasta, she adds a dash of curry powder. While you’re welcome to include it, I chose to omit it since curry powder isn’t traditionally used in manti. To stay true to the version I grew up eating, I opted for the classic spices instead.

Other Pasta Recipes You Might Like

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make your own Turkish Pasta following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Turkish pasta recipe being drizzled with the melted butter sauce.
Print

Turkish Pasta Recipe

The TikTok-viral Turkish Pasta recipe, made famous by Anna Paul, is a 30-minute wonder that's as delicious as it is easy. Made by layering cooked pasta with garlicky yogurt, spiced ground beef, and a chili butter drizzle, this recipe is easy to make, satisfying, and totally worthy of the hype.
Course Main Course – Pasta Dish
Cuisine Turkish
Diet Halal
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 563kcal

Ingredients

For The Pasta

  • 8 ounces pasta I use farfalle but any shape would work
  • Kosher salt

For The Meat Sauce

  • 1 lbs ground beef 93%
  • 1 medium size onion chopped (about 1 cup)
  • 1 tablespoon red pepper paste or tomato paste
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 2 teaspoons sweet paprika
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Garlic Yogurt Sauce

  • 1 cup Greek yogurt unsweetened plain (full fat or skim)
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

For The Butter Sauce

  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 1 teaspoon sweet paprika
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes or more to taste (such as Aleppo Pepper or Urfa Chili pepper)
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

As Garnish (optional)

  • ½ cup cherry tomatoes cut in half
  • 4 tablespoons dried mint or fresh parsley
  • 2 tablespoons sumac optional

Instructions

  • Bring a large pot of water to a boil. Season the pasta water generously with salt. It should taste like the ocean. Add the pasta and cook until it is al dente. Timing might differ depending on the brand you use, so be sure to check the instructions on the packaging. Mine took about 9-10 minutes. Save ½ cup of the cooking liquid*, drain the pasta, and set it aside.
  • While the pasta is cooking, make the meat sauce. In a large skillet over medium heat, add 1 pound ground beef. Cook, breaking up the large chunks of meat with a wooden spoon for about 4-5 minutes or until it is no longer pink. As it cooks, it should release some of its oils.
  • Add the 1 medium-sized chopped onion, 1 tablespoon red pepper paste (or tomato paste), 1 teaspoon onion powder, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 2 teaspoons sweet paprika, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper. Cook, stirring regularly, until onions are softened and meat is fully cooked, for about 5-6 minutes. If needed, use the reserved pasta water to keep the sauteed meat moist. Set it aside.
  • To make the yogurt sauce, whisk together 1 cup of Greek yogurt, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 1 tablespoon of lemon juice, ½ teaspoon kosher salt in a bowl. Give it a taste and make sure it is seasoned to your liking. Set is aside.
  • Right before serving, melt 4 tablespoons butter in a small saucepan over medium heat. Add 1 teaspoon sweet paprika, ¼ teaspoon (or more) red pepper flakes and ½ teaspoon kosher salt. Stir and cook until butter is fully melted and bubbly.
  • To assemble, place the now-cooked pasta in a bowl. Top it off with 4 tablespoons of the yogurt sauce and ⅔ cup of the cooked beef. Drizzle it with a tablespoon (or more) of the butter sauce. Repeat the same process for the rest of the bowls.
  • If preferred, garnish with a handful of cherry tomatoes, a tablespoon of dried mint (or fresh parsley) and a teaspoon of sumac, if using. Serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Reserved liquid: I always save some of the pasta water in case my pasta dries out while I am working on the sauce. In this recipe, you (most likely) will not need it since we work simultaneously, but still, it is a good backup in case you need it.
  • No olive oil for sauteing the meat: I stayed true to the TikTok viral recipe by not using oil to saute the beef as the meat releases its oils as you cook it. Initially, I was a bit skeptical, but she was right. As long as you keep stirring, the meat will eventually release some of its oils and brown nicely. Still, if you feel your meat can benefit from a bit of olive oil, feel free to use it.
  • Storage & Reheating: Store each component of the leftovers separately in airtight containers in the fridge for up to 2 days. When ready to serve, reheat the pasta, meat, and butter sauce and assemble as described in the recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 563kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 33g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 83mg | Sodium: 983mg | Potassium: 692mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1054IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 135mg | Iron: 5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-pasta/feed/ 29
Reverse Sear Filet Mignon https://foolproofliving.com/reverse-sear-filet-mignon/ https://foolproofliving.com/reverse-sear-filet-mignon/#respond Tue, 10 Dec 2024 17:54:54 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79318 If you’ve been a reader of our website for a while, you’ll know this isn’t the first time we’re raving…]]>

If you’ve been a reader of our website for a while, you’ll know this isn’t the first time we’re raving about the reverse searing method. This Reverse Seared Tenderloin steak recipe joins our collection of reverse-seared beef favorites, including Reverse Sear Whole Beef Tenderloin and Reverse Sear Prime Rib Roast.

We’re huge fans of this two-step, foolproof cooking technique (perfected by J. Kenji Lopez-Alt), where the meat is gently cooked at a low temperature first, then finished with a quick sear in a blazing hot cast-iron skillet or grill. The result? A perfectly crisp, caramelized exterior with a tender, juicy interior.

Reverse seared tenderloin steak in a cast iron skillet from the top view.

Recipe Ingredients

You’ll need 5 simple ingredients for this filet mignon reverse sear. Here’s a little more detail about each ingredient:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Filet Mignon: We used filet mignon steaks that were about 6 ounces each, 2 inches thick. You can use thicker steaks, but thickness and timing go hand-in-hand, so pay attention to cooking time if your steaks are thicker (see chart below).
  • Kosher salt: We used Diamond Crystal kosher salt, which has smaller flakes and promotes better coating around the steaks. Use half the amount if you use any other brand (such as Morton’s kosher salt).
  • Neutral oil: Use a high-heat vegetable oil, such as avocado oil, olive oil, or sunflower oil, or you can also use ghee.
  • Butter or ghee: Finishing the steaks with a butter baste is optional, but let’s be honest—it takes them to the next level. You can use butter, and ghee, or, if you have a little extra time, try making our Garlic Compound Butter for an added layer of deliciousness.
  • Fresh herbs: If you are basting, toss in a few fresh rosemary sprigs or fresh thyme for additional flavor.

How to Reverse Sear Filet Mignon?

Reverse searing is particularly suited for premium cuts like filet mignon because it highlights their tenderness. Because filet mignon does not have a lot of fat (or marbling) reverse searing filet mignon ensures even doneness throughout. Here’s how we do it:

Oven Method

Here is our step-by-step guide for reverse sear filet mignon in the oven:

A collage of images showing how to prepare filet mignon steaks for reverse searing in the oven.
  1. Prepare steaks: Remove the filet mignon from the fridge 30 minutes to 1 hour before cooking. Pat the entire surface dry with paper towels. Season all sides with salt.
  2. Prepare baking sheet: Line a large rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper and place a wire rack over it. Place the filet mignon steaks on the wire rack.
  3. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 250 degrees F/121 C.
  4. Roast: If you have a probe thermometer (affliate link), stick the probe in one of the filet mignons and bake until the internal temperature of the steak reaches your desired doneness (see the chart below). For a rare steak (doneness at 120 degrees F), you’ll need to bake it for 35 minutes, and for a medium-rare steak (doneness at 125 degrees F), 40 minutes should be sufficient. If you do not have a probe thermometer, you can use a digital meat thermometer to check the temperature of your steak.
A collage of images showing how to sear filet mignon on a cast iron skillet.
  1. Rest: Remove the steaks from the oven and rest them uncovered on the counter (while the cast iron skillet is heating). 
  2. Preheat skillet: Heat a large cast iron skillet over high heat for 5-10 minutes. You will know it is hot enough when you splash a drop of water into the pan, and it sizzles, dances around, and evaporates rapidly.
  3. Sear: Add the oil to the hot pan and sear the filet steaks for 45 seconds on each side (including the sides) until a nice brown crust forms. There is no need to rest the steak when reverse searing, you can serve them right away or baste them following the instructions below.
  4. Baste: Optionally, in the last 30 seconds of searing, add ghee or butter and a few sprigs of fresh herbs into the skillet. Spoon the melted butter over the meat for 10 seconds.
  5. Serve: Transfer the steaks to a platter or slice them against the grain and pour over any excess juices from the pan before serving.

On the Grill

Here are the step-by-step instructions for reverse sear filet mignon on a gas grill:

  1. Season steaks: Season the filets and let them rest for an hour at room temperature before grilling.
  2. Preheat grill: Preheat the grill by turning one side to high heat and leaving the other off, creating two zones (hot zone and cool zone).
  3. Prepare grill: Clean the grates with a grill brush, then dip a wad of paper towel into a bowl with oil, grab the paper towel with tongs, and generously coat the grates.
  4. Reverse sear: Place the filets over the indirect heat (cool side), cover, and cook depending on your desired level of doneness. Check doneness with a meat thermometer after 15 minutes of grilling. It took about 20 minutes to reach 130 degrees F (medium rare) for us.
  5. Sear steaks: When done, move the filets to the hot side of the grill. Grill, uncovered, for 45 seconds on each side and 30 seconds on each edge. Since this side is very hot, you should be able to get nice grill marks as soon as the steak hits the grates.
  6. Rest: Remove the steaks and place them on a platter, uncovered. Let them rest for 5 minutes before serving.

Temperature and Timing for Reverse-Seared Steak

How long to reverse sear filet mignon depends on the thickness and your desired degree of doneness. For the most consistent results, it’s important to remember to remove the filet steak from the fridge at least 30 minutes, and up to 1 hour, before cooking.

Even more so, the best way to test for doneness is with a probe thermometer, which takes the guesswork away, but an instant-read digital thermometer is the next best thing. If using an instant-read thermometer, I recommend beginning to check the internal temperature after 20 minutes of cooking.

Here is a handy time chart when reverse searing filet mignon:

DonenessInternal Temperature (°F)Approximate Time 250 degrees F oven
Rare120 – 125°F25 – 30 minutes
Medium Rare130 – 135°F35 – 40 minutes
Medium140 – 145°F42 – 45 minutes
Medium Well150 – 155°F45 – 48 minutes
Well160°F50 minutes
Cooking time and temperature chart for reverse sear filet mignon.
Reverse seared steak sliced and served on a bed of mashed potatoes.

Expert Tips

Follow the recipe as written, and you’re likely to nail it on your first try. That said, here are a few extra tips to ensure your reverse sear filet mignon steak turns out absolutely perfect:

  • Local Butcher: It is no secret that filet mignon is an expensive cut of beef. We recommend seeking your local butcher for the best quality if you can. The good thing is you can even have them cut it based on your desired thickness.
  • No wire rack? The wire rack helps circulate the hot air in the oven while the meat cooks, but the recipe will still work without one.
  • Cast iron: The cast iron skillet must be screaming hot to seal that dreamy crust. Let it get hot (at least 10 minutes) before adding the oil.
  • No Need to Rest: Unlike a traditionally seared steak, which needs to rest before slicing to allow the juices to redistribute, this method eliminates that step. Thanks to the low-temperature cooking, the juices have already settled evenly before the final sear, so you can slice and serve immediately after searing. Still, if you want, you can let it sit for a few minutes.
  • Overnight Salting: During our recipe testing, we found some methods that recommend salting the steak the night before and leaving it uncovered on a lined baking sheet in the refrigerator. While you can certainly do this if you have the time, we tested both approaches and found the difference to be minimal.

FAQs

What Is The Reverse Sear Method?

Reverse searing is a foolproof method that starts by cooking the steak in a low-temperature oven until it reaches your desired doneness. Then, it’s quickly finished in a blazing hot skillet to develop a beautiful crust.

Why Should You Reverse Sear Your Steak?

Because this technique ensures the inside stays perfectly cooked at the desired temperature while the outside achieves that irresistible sear. When followed to a t, this method will deliver perfectly cooked filet mignon every time.

Can I Reverse Sear Other Cuts Of Steak?

Yes, you can. You can follow the reverse sear method for any other thick cut of meat, such as bone-in rib eye, Tomahawk, New York strip, T-bone, or porterhouse. However, please keep in mind that there is a direct correlation between the thickness of the meat and the time of cooking in the oven for the meat to reach your desired level of doneness.

Storage and Reheating

Filet mignon is a special cut of meat and we do not want this expensive cut going to waste. Here are my best storage and reheating instructions for reverse-seared steak:

  • Storage: Bring leftover tenderloin steaks to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat the steaks in a low oven (300°F) until warm, about 10 minutes.

What to Serve with This Recipe

Filet mignon reverse sear is an elegant recipe that deserves the spotlight on your plate. A few of my favorite ways to serve that highlight this gorgeous piece of meat even further are:

You Might Also Like

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make this Filet Mignon Reverse Sear recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Reverse seared filet steak sliced and served on a bed of mashed potatoes.
Print

Reverse Sear Filet Mignon Recipe

Once you learn how to reverse sear filet mignon, you'll never go back to cooking steak any other way. This easy method is foolproof and works every time.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 2 minutes
Cooling time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 7 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 498kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 filet mignon steaks about 6 ounces each; 1 ½-2 inches thick
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt*
  • 1 tablespoon neutral oil such as ghee or vegetable oils like avocado oil
  • 1 tablespoon butter or ghee (optional)
  • 2 sprigs fresh herbs such as rosemary or thyme, (optional to finish)

Instructions

In The Oven:

  • Thirty minutes to an hour before you are ready to start cooking, remove the filet mignon from the fridge. Pat dry with paper towels to remove the excess moisture, and sprinkle them liberally on all sides.
  • Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and place a wire rack* over it. Transfer the filet mignon steaks to the wire rack. Loosely cover it with stretch film.
  • While the meat is resting, preheat the oven to 250 degrees F/121 C.
  • Transfer the filet mignon to the oven and bake until it reaches your desired doneness*. For a rare steak ( doneness at 120 degrees F), you’ll need to cook for about 35 minutes; for a medium-rare steak (doneness at 125 degrees F), it would take about 40 minutes for the meat to reach the ideal temperature.
  • Remove the steaks and let rest, uncovered on the counter ((while the cast iron skillet is heating).
  • Meanwhile, heat a large cast iron skillet over high heat for 5-10 minutes or until very hot. You will know it is hot enough when you splash a drop of water into the pan, and it sizzles, dances around, and evaporates rapidly.
  • Add the oil to the hot pan and sear the steaks for 45 seconds on each side (including the sides of the steak) until a nice brown crust forms.
  • At this point, you can remove the steaks from the pan and slice it right away. There is no need to let reverse seared filet mignon rest.
  • Optionally, in the last few seconds of searing, you can add a tablespoon of ghee or butter and a few sprigs of fresh herbs into the skillet and spoon the melted oil (baste) over the meat for 10 seconds.
  • Transfer the steaks onto a platter, or alternatively, slice them against the grain and pour over any excess juices from the pan before serving.

Grilling on a gas grill:

  • Pat dry, season the filets, and let them rest for an hour before grilling.
  • Preheat your grill by turning one side to high heat and leaving the other side off, creating two zones—we’ll use the cooler side for the initial cooking (until it reaches our desired doneness) and the hot side for searing.
  • Clean the grates well, dip a wad of paper towel into a bowl with oil, and then generously coat the grates.
  • Place the filets on the cool side, cover and cook depending on your desired level of doneness. It is best to check doneness (using a meat thermometer) after 15 minutes of grilling. It took about 20 minutes to reach 130 degrees F (for a medium-rare steak).
  • When done, move the filets to the hot side of the grill and grill, uncovered, for 45 seconds on each side and 30 seconds on each edge.
  • Remove from the grill. Serve as a whole or slice against the grain before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves two filet mignon steaks, which is ideal for 2 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving. If serving a larger crowd, you can multiple the recipe following the same method.
  • Checking doneness*: Using a probe thermometer is the best way to check doneness. You can find the one we like and use in the equipment section above. If you have one, insert it in one of the steaks before placing them in the oven. This way, it can alert you as soon as your steak reaches the set temperature. If you do not have a probe thermometer, we recommend using an instant-read thermometer and checking it (depending on the desired temperature) after the 20-minute mark.
  • A note on Kosher Salt: We used Diamond Crystal Kosher salt, which has a finer texture and less salty taste than Morton salt. I recommend decreasing the salt to ½ teaspoon if using Morton. You can always finish the steaks with Maldon flakey sea salt if desired.
  • Black pepper: We did not find the steaks needed black pepper since it changes the flavor of the meat. It also tends to burn during the last few minutes of searing. However, if you want, you can season your reverse-seared filet steak with black pepper right before serving.
  • Charcoal Grill: If you’re using a charcoal grill, start by lighting the charcoal and letting it burn until it’s covered in white ash. Then, create two zones—an indirect heat side for cooking and a direct heat side for searing—by arranging the coals to one side of the grill, leaving the other side empty.
  • Storage and reheating: Store leftover steak (after it comes to room temperature) in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat in a low heat (300 F) oven until warmed to your liking, about 10 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 498kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 31g | Fat: 41g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 119mg | Sodium: 1208mg | Potassium: 524mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 175IU | Calcium: 14mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/reverse-sear-filet-mignon/feed/ 0
Beef Shawarma https://foolproofliving.com/beef-shawarma/ https://foolproofliving.com/beef-shawarma/#comments Wed, 12 Jun 2024 21:27:15 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75914 What is Beef Shawarma? Flavorful, tender, and rich, shawarma beef is a popular street food in the Middle East. It…]]>

What is Beef Shawarma?

Flavorful, tender, and rich, shawarma beef is a popular street food in the Middle East. It comes from slow-cooking layers of marinated steak on a vertical rotisserie or spit, then shaving the beef’s outer layer into thin slices. Usually, chefs serve the meat on breads like pita or lavash, topped with fresh veggies and drizzled with tahini sauce. However, it’s also common to see this dish as part of a grain bowl or beef shawarma platter.

Steak shawarma on a plate with pickles, tahini sauce, tomatoes and salad greens.

Though less traditional, you might also find a layered mixture of chicken and beef shawarma in some Middle Eastern countries.

Beef Shawarma Ingredients

Selecting the right ingredients is key to making the tastiest homemade shawarma. This ingredient list has everything you need, from the best meat to expert seasoning suggestions.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Beef: Flank steak and skirt steak are my favorite meats for shawarma due to their tender consistency and easy marination. You can also use ribeye steak for a more decadent finish, though this cut tends to be more expensive. No matter which cut you choose, just be sure to salt it before marinating to help break down its proteins and free up space for the juices to fill.
  • Shawarma beef seasoning: You can make homemade beef shawarma seasoning by combining ground cumin, ground coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, ground turmeric, ground cloves, ground cinnamon, ground nutmeg, and ground cardamom. Otherwise, you can simplify your meal prep by trying out a store-bought brand. Sadaf’s and NYShuk are my favorite brands.
  • Marinade: To make a marinade for beef shawarma, you’ll need:
    • Olive oil 
    • Fresh lemon juice 
    • Finely minced garlic
    • White vinegar: While it is not traditional, you can also use white or red wine vinegar as a substitute, depending on what you have on hand.
  • Onion: A thinly sliced onion helps make the meat more tender by breaking down its proteins. Additionally, onions have natural sugars that add a rich, savory flavor to the meat as it marinates.
  • Sauces: This recipe’s heartier flavors can easily be balanced by topping the meat with fresh condiments like my Yogurt Tahini Sauce, Lemon Tahini Sauce, Tzatziki, or even Hummus.
  • Vegetables: Traditionally, beef shawarma is served with fresh vegetables (such as sliced tomatoes, cucumbers, and curly green lettuce) and pickled vegetables like dill Gherkins, red onions, or pickled turnips. However, this is where you can make it your own with whatever fresh or pickled vegetable you have on hand.

How to Make Beef Shawarma

This easy beef shawarma recipe is a great way to enjoy authentic Mediterranean eats any night of the week. These simple instructions will ensure you come out with a perfectly tender, tasty meal—all without a vertical spit!

A collage of images showing how to prepare shawarma meat.
  1. Prepare the shawarma meat: Pat dry the steak on both sides with paper towels, then slice it against the grain into thin strips (¼-inch wide, three inches long). Sprinkle the steak pieces with one teaspoon salt and set it aside. 
  2. Combine the beef shawarma spices: Add the cumin, coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, turmeric, cloves, cinnamon, nutmeg, and cardamon to a medium mixing bowl. Blend the seasonings until thoroughly combined. Alternatively, you can use 3 tablespoons of store-bought shawarma seasoning.
  3. Marinate: Add the olive oil, white vinegar, lemon juice, garlic, and shawarma spice mix to a large bowl and whisk them together until fully incorporated. Then, add the beef strips and onions to the bowl, toss to coat, and cover the bowl. Refrigerate the mixture for a minimum of four hours or up to overnight.
A collage of images showing how to cook and serve shawarma beef.
  1. Prepare the Lemon Tahini Sauce: Right before serving, in a small bowl, whisk together the tahini paste, lemon juice, garlic, and kosher salt until blended. Stirring constantly, slowly add in the water until you reach your desired consistency. Taste for seasoning, adding more if necessary, and then set the sauce aside until ready to serve.
  2. Cook beef: Remove the flank steak from the refrigerator 30 minutes before cooking to let it reach room temperature. Then, heat a large skillet, such as a cast iron skillet, on medium high heat and add the marinated steak and onions to the pan. Reduce the heat to medium and stir the mix occasionally as it browns, remembering not to overcrowd the skillet. Continue cooking until you achieve your desired doneness (4-6 minutes), then place the meat and onions on a plate. Cover the mix with a loose aluminum foil tent and let it rest for ten minutes.
  3. Serve: Transfer the now-rested meat to a large platter and serve it with tomatoes, cucumbers, pickles, and tahini sauce. If you plan on making shawarma wraps, spread the Tahini Sauce on the bread, layer it with your favorite accompaniments, and finish it with the cooked steak.

How to Serve Beef Shawarma? 

My favorite part about this homemade beef shawarma recipe is its versatility. Below, you’ll find countless ways to make this dish yours, whether you want to serve it by itself or turn it into a crowd-ready platter or a delicious meat shawarma sandwich.

  • Platter: Equal parts filling and flavorful, a beef shawarma plate is the ultimate weeknight dinner. Serve your meat with a helping of zesty Tabbouleh, flatbread, pickled veggies, and toum (Lebanese garlic sauce), and you’re guaranteed to get a five-star review from all your dinner guests (kids included!).
  • Sandwich: In the mood for a beef shawarma sandwich or pita pocket? Spread a piece of pita with my Tahini Yogurt Sauce, then add your steak slices, sliced tomatoes, pickles, and lettuce. If you want to feel like you are at a Lebanese restaurant, serve this dish alongside a plate of French fries for an authentic Middle Eastern dinner.
  • Wrap: You can quickly transform this dish into a delectable beef shawarma wrap by placing your meat, Pickled Red Onions, tomatoes, and green curly lettuce onto a slice of lavash. Then, drizzle your toppings with Lemon Tahini Sauce and wrap it tightly.
  • Bowl: Easy to eat and deliciously customizable, steak shawarma dinner bowls make meal planning a cinch. All you have to do is serve your shawarma beef, veggies, and fresh parsley atop a bowl of grains (Bulgur Pilaf and Rice with Vermicelli are my favorites!). You can even give your recipe an extra creamy finish by serving it with a side of Hummus, Baba Ganoush, or plain yogurt.
  • Salad: You can get your fill of fiber and protein by topping a bowl of fresh vegetables with this succulent beef shawarma recipe. In particular, this warmly-spiced beef makes a great pair with Lebanese fattoush and my Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad.
Beef shawarma sandwich drizzled with tahini sauce in someones hands.

Aysegul’s Expert Tips

Anyone can learn how to cook shawarma beef that’s worthy of being in a Middle Eastern restaurant. Below are a few tips to help you succeed on your first try:

  • Cut meat against the grain: To prevent your shawarma from becoming chewy, I highly recommend cutting your beef against the grain. Doing so shortens the muscle fibers, making the meat more tender and easier to chew.
  • Don’t overcrowd the pan: When cooking steak shawarma, it’s best to avoid overcrowding your skillet to ensure that the meat is cooked evenly. Furthermore, basting the beef with the pan’s juices throughout the cooking process will ensure that the meat won’t dry out.
  • Let it rest: Do not skip the resting time, as it gives the meat time to reabsorb and equally distribute its flavorful juices. For the best results, I recommend letting this steak shawarma recipe rest for at least ten minutes before serving.

FAQs

What’s the difference between a gyro and shawarma?

Both shawarma and gyros come from slow-cooking layers of meat on a vertical roasting spit and shaving it into thin slices. However, the primary difference lies in their flavor profiles, as they use different spices during the marination process. For instance, the Greek gyro—often made of pork, lamb, or chicken—offers a brighter, more herby Mediterranean flavor, and you’ll usually find it served alongside light, creamy sauces like Tzatziki. By contrast, Middle Eastern shawarma—primarily made from beef and chicken—tends to have a warmer, more aromatic finish and is often accompanied by earthier, nuttier recipes, like Tahini Sauce and Hummus.

What is the best cut of beef for shawarma?

I recommend using flank steak, skirt steak, or sirloin tip (also known as beef flap steak) when making shawarma because they’re tender and easy to marinate. You may also use ribeye—a richer, more expensive cut—if it’s in your budget. While it is not traditional, you can use the shawarma seasoning to saute ground beef for an easy weeknight meal, introducing the flavors of shawarma in a simpler way.

What nationality is shawarma?

Shawarma originates from the Middle East, including countries like Turkey, Israel, and other Arabic areas. Because of the dish’s broad popularity, it’s also known by many other area-specific names, such as “Lebanese shawarma” and “Mediterranean beef shawarma.”

Other Beef Recipes You Might Also Like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make your own Beef Shawarma following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Beef shawarma on a platter with tahini sauce and vegetables.
Print

Beef Shawarma Recipe

Learn how to make the best beef shawarma at home with tender, juicy marinated beef, aromatic shawarma spices, and delicious toppings. Perfect for shawarma platters or stuffing into warm pita pockets for an authentic Middle Eastern experience!
Course Dinner
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Marinading Time 8 hours
Total Time 8 hours 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 668kcal

Ingredients

For The Beef

  • 2 pounds flank steak or skirt steak
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt

For The Shawarma Seasoning

  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ teaspoon ground turmeric
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cloves
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ¼ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cardamom

For The Marinade

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ¼ cup white vinegar
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 4 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed
  • 1 small onion thinly sliced

Tahini Sauce

  • ½ cup Tahini paste
  • ¼ cup lemon juice
  • 2 garlic cloves pressed or grated
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 4-6 tablespoons water

Optional Wraps

  • 4 Pita bread or Lavash (or more)
  • ½ cup Pickled red onions
  • 2 fresh tomatoes sliced
  • 1 cucumber peeled and sliced thinly
  • 1 cup pickles sliced
  • 2 cups green curly lettuce roughly chopped
  • Slices of a lemon optional

Instructions

  • Pat dry the flank steak on both sides and cut it into 1/4-inch strips, each measuring 3 inches long (lengthwise), against the grain. Sprinkle with the kosher salt and set it aside.
  • Make the shawarma seasoning: In a medium bowl, mix the cumin, coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, turmeric, cloves, cinnamon, nutmeg, and cardamon until thoroughly combined.
  • Make the marinade: In a large bowl, whisk together the olive oil, white vinegar, lemon juice, garlic, and shawarma seasoning until incorporated.
  • Add the flank steak strips and onions to the bowl and toss to fully coat.
  • Cover and refrigerate for at least 4 hours or overnight.
  • Make the lemon tahini sauce: In a bowl, whisk together the tahini paste, lemon juice, garlic, and kosher salt until blended. Slowly add the water while whisking until you reach your desired consistency. Adjust seasoning to taste. Set aside until ready to serve.
  • Cook the meat: Remove the flank steak from the refrigerator 30 minutes before cooking. Heat a large skillet (a cast iron skillet works best) on medium-high. Remove the flank steak and onions from the bowl and place on the skillet. Reduce heat to medium and stir occasionally as it browns. Cook for 4-6 minutes or until you achieve your desired doneness. Do not overcrowd the skillet. You may have to cook in 2-3 batches. Once cooked, place it on a plate or platter, loosely tent it with foil, and let it rest for 10 minutes before serving.
  • To serve as a wrap: Spread the tahini sauce on the bread (or inside of a pita pocket) and layer it with sliced tomatoes, pickles, cucumbers, lettuce and beef shawarma. Drizzle with more tahini sauce and if preferred with a squeeze of lemon juice right before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves 4 people if you serve it with the toppings/veggies, but if you decide to turn it into sandwiches/wraps, it will be enough for 6 servings.
  • Shawarma Seasoning: We used our own homemade shawarma seasoning mix, but if you prefer to use a storebought brand, I recommend using 3 tablespoons of seasoning.
  • The longer you marinate, the better: Technically, you can cook it after it has marinated for an hour, but like most meat recipes, the longer the beef stays in the marinade, the more delicious it becomes. If you have the time, I recommend marinating your meat overnight for the most profound flavor. This is one of those recipes where planning ahead pays dividends.
  • Store: You can store leftover steak shawarma in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 2-3 days.
  • Freeze: If you plan on preparing a few batches in advance, I highly recommend freezing the raw marinated meat (with the marinade) in a freezer-safe Ziploc bag until ready to use. However, you can also freeze the cooked meat in an airtight container for 2-3 months.
  • Thaw: To thaw your shawarma steak, place it in the fridge overnight and cook as directed in the recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 668kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 56g | Fat: 41g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Cholesterol: 136mg | Sodium: 1300mg | Potassium: 1273mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 529IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 155mg | Iron: 6mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/beef-shawarma/feed/ 1
Stuffed Cabbage Soup https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-cabbage-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-cabbage-soup/#comments Fri, 15 Mar 2024 01:05:17 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=17720 When it is this chilly outside, I can’t imagine anything better than a big pot of hearty soup for dinner,…]]>

When it is this chilly outside, I can’t imagine anything better than a big pot of hearty soup for dinner, which is exactly why I have so many soup recipes on my blog. The newest addition to the collection, this stuffed cabbage soup recipe, is inspired by the world-famous Golabki soup, which is made with ingredients used in Polish stuffed cabbage rolls.

Now, before we continue, let’s clarify the name because this weeknight soup/stew goes by many names. While traditionally called stuffed cabbage soup, many people refer to it as unstuffed cabbage roll soup and deconstructed cabbage soup. Why? Well, there’s no stuffing involved! To make matters a bit more confusing, since it is made with ground beef, some people refer to it as beef cabbage soup or even hamburger soup with cabbage.

A bowl of cabbage roll soup garnished with yogurt from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need:

The good news is that this easy soup recipe is made with simple ingredients that you probably already have on hand. If not, you can customize it based on the recommendations below. To make it, you will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Vegetable oil: I usually use olive oil but avocado oil or ghee would also work.
  • Onions and garlic: You will need one medium-sized yellow onion and two small fresh garlic cloves. Be sure to chop them finely.
  • Ground meat: You can make this cabbage soup with any ground meat. In my version here, I used lean ground beef, but you can also use an equal amount of ground chicken or ground turkey (my favorite – Turkey Cabbage Soup is also a regular in our house.) The flavor will be lighter, but I think ground turkey is a wonderful substitution for a leaner cabbage casserole soup recipe.
  • Spices: Paprika is a classic spice used in pretty much all versions of this beef cabbage tomato soup. However, I love the addition of ground cumin, which adds a new layer of flavor, but it is optional.
  • Tomato sauce and diced tomatoes: You’ll need one small (8-ounce) can of tomato sauce and one large (28-ounce) can of diced tomatoes.
  • Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper
  • Sweetener: A small amount of sugar helps balance the savory flavors. I used a tablespoon of honey, but an equal amount of granulated sugar or brown sugar would also work.
  • Chicken Stock: You can make homemade chicken stock or buy low-sodium chicken broth from the store. Alternatively, beef broth, vegetable stock, or water can be used in a pinch.
  • Head of cabbage: To make this recipe, you will need approximately 2 pounds of green cabbage, which should yield 6-7 cups of cored and thinly sliced cabbage. As you are buying green cabbage, be sure to get regular cabbage rather than the milder Napa or Savoy cabbage. Additionally, slicing the cabbage is the most time-consuming part of the whole process, so if you are short on time, you can use an equal amount of packaged coleslaw mix. However I would pick a brand that uses only green cabbage.
  • Rice: Half a cup of white rice helps thicken the soup. Brown rice can also be used but keep in mind that it takes longer to cook.
  • Vinegar: A glug of apple cider vinegar or white wine vinegar added at the last minute brings all the flavors together and adds a nice tanginess to the soup.
  • Fresh herbs: I used fresh Italian parsley to finish it off but chopped fresh thyme leaves would also work.

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

  • Quinoa or cauliflower rice: If you prefer a gluten-free version, you can substitute rice with an equal amount of rinsed quinoa or 1 ½ cups of cauliflower rice (about 1 package.) The cauliflower rice will hold its shape during cooking, so add it at the same time you add the rice.
  • Ground pork: The traditional cabbage roll soup recipe uses a combination of ground beef and ground pork. If you prefer, you can use half pork and half beef in your cabbage roll stew.
  • Greens and Vegetables: To increase the nutritional content, add a few handfuls of baby spinach or sliced kale at the very end when you add the garnish. The residual heat from the soup will naturally warm the vegetables, so no need to extend the cooking time.
  • Worcestershire sauce: It is optional but you can add a tablespoon of Worcestershire sauce for a welcome earthy and umami flavor.
  • Tomato: During my recipe research, I have seen several versions of this recipe made with various tomato-based ingredients, such as tomato soup (Southern versions use canned tomato soup) and spaghetti or marinara sauce. Honestly, I prefer the basic tomato sauce and diced tomatoes, but if you are in a pinch (and are okay with flavors being slightly different), you can use those ingredients instead.

How to Make This Recipe?

This healthy cabbage roll soup is prepared on the stovetop in a few easy steps. Simply:

Person showing how to make stuffed cabbage soup in a collage of images.
  1. Sweat the aromatics: Heat the olive oil over medium-high heat in a large soup pot or heavy-bottomed pot, such as a Dutch oven. Sautee the onion until translucent.
  2. Brown the meat: Add the ground beef, ground cumin and paprika and cook, breaking up any larger pieces of meat using a wooden spoon, until browned, about 5-7 minutes. Add the minced garlic to the beef mixture and cook for an additional 30 seconds.
  3. Add the tomatoes and seasonings: Stir in the tomato sauce, diced tomatoes, salt, pepper, honey, and chicken stock.
  4. Stir in the cabbage and rice: Add the shredded cabbage and white rice. Cover it with the lid and bring the cabbage rice soup to a boil. 
Cabbage roll stew being garnished with fresh herbs.
  1. Simmer: Once boiled, reduce the heat to a simmer and let it simmer for 25-30 minutes or until the rice is fully cooked and the cabbage is tender to your liking. Make sure to stir a few times during the cooking process.
  2. Garnish and Serve: Remove from the heat, add the vinegar, and garnish with parsley. Ladle into soup bowls and serve it while still warm.

How To Make It In a Crock Pot? 

If you prefer a more hands-off approach, you can make this ground beef cabbage soup in your slow cooker. Here is how to do it:

  1. Saute onion and ground beef: Heat olive oil in a large skillet and add onion. Saute for 5-7 minutes or until softened. Add the ground beef and cook, breaking the large chunks, for 7-8 minutes or until no longer pink.
  2. Add everything to the slow cooker: Transfer the onion and meat to the bowl of your slow cooker, along with all the other ingredients except vinegar and parsley.
  3. Stir to combine: Give it a good stir to ensure that cabbage leaves are thoroughly mixed with the rest of the ingredients.
  4. Slow cook: Set it on low heat setting for 4 hours or high heat setting for 2 hours.
  5. Garnish and serve: Once the cooking is completed, stir in the vinegar and garnish with parsley. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Ladle into bowls and serve.

 How To Store, Freeze, Thaw, and Reheat?

My favorite thing about this homemade cabbage soup recipe is that the leftovers store and freeze well. Below are my tips for storing and freezing. However, keep in mind that the soup thickens as it sits, so when it is time to reheat it, you may have to add a cup (or two) of additional stock or water as necessary. Also, I recommend giving it a taste and adjusting the seasoning if needed.

Here is how I do it:

  • Storage: Bring your soup to room temperature and transfer it into an airtight container. Store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Freezing: Transfer the soup to 4-5 individual freezer-safe containers (affiliate link) or a large freezer bag. Seal tight, label and date, and put in the freezer for up to 2 months.
  • Thawing & Reheating: To reheat, thaw the frozen soup in the fridge overnight. Transfer to a large pot (or smaller pot for smaller portions), cover, and bring to a boil over medium heat, stirring a few times in between. 
A pot of unstuffed cabbage roll soup with rice with a wooden spoon on the side.

What To Serve It With?

This stuffed cabbage stew is a wonderful dinner on its own. However, you can easily take it to the next level by serving it with some of the below recipes:

  • Bread: I cannot imagine a better accompaniment to this stew than a loaf of crusty bread. You can buy a French baguette from the store or make my No Knead Bread
  • Toppings: I love to finish this soup with a spoonful of yogurt dill sauce or tzatziki. Alternatively, you can also top it off with a dollop of sour cream for a tangy finish.
  • Salad: You can turn it into a whole meal by serving it with a simple salad such as my Spring Mix Salad or Yogurt Cucumber Salad.

Expert Tips:

While the recipe for unstuffed cabbage soup is pretty straightforward and easy, there are a few important things that I’d like to share to help you succeed on your first try:

  • Slice the cabbage thinly: Taking the time to slice your cabbage as thinly as possible will help the soup cook faster. Feel free to chop the longer slices into smaller pieces to make sure they are small and thin.
  • Use a large pot: Initially, when you place all of the ingredients in the pot, it may seem like a large amount, but as the cabbage cooks, it will shrink in volume. Nevertheless, it’s crucial to use a large pot (I used a 5 qt Dutch oven – affiliate link) to facilitate easy mixing of all the ingredients.
  • Keep an eye on it: Cabbage cooks quickly and loses its volume. To ensure everything is cooking evenly, it is best to give it a stir a few times during the process.
  • Taste for seasoning: The seasoning (both salt and vinegar) I listed below is minimal, so I recommend tasting it and adjusting accordingly before serving.

FAQs

What is stuffed cabbage soup?

Stuffed cabbage soup is a hearty and comforting soup recipe inspired by the traditional ingredients and flavors of stuffed cabbage rolls, a popular meal in Eastern European countries like Poland and Hungary. It is a deconstructed version of the original recipe, where instead of wrapping meat and rice filling in cabbage leaves, this soup brings all the key components together in a single pot. People in the US referred to it mostly as Rolled Cabbage Soup, Unstuffed Cabbage Soup, and even cabbage soup with hamburger and rice because it is usually made with ground beef.

Can stuffed cabbage soup be frozen?

Yes, it can be. Simply bring it to room temperature, place it in an airtight container, label, date, and freeze for up to 2 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator.

Similar Recipes You Might Also Like:

Other Cabbage Recipes You Might Also Like:

Other Heartwarming Soup Recipes You Might Like:

If you try this Stuffed Cabbage Soup recipe or any other soup recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

Stuffed cabbage roll soup in a bowl.
Print

Stuffed Cabbage Soup Recipe

Stuffed Cabbage Soup recipe that tastes just like the stuffed cabbage rolls, but done in one pot and in less than 45 minutes. This dish freezes well and is a great way to feed a crowd.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 449kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 large onion chopped
  • 1 pound ground beef *
  • 1 teaspoon cumin
  • 1 tablespoon paprika
  • 2 cloves of garlic minced
  • 8 oz. tomato sauce
  • 1 28 ounce can diced tomatoes
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon honey or granulated, cane or brown sugar
  • 3 cups homemade chicken stock
  • 3 cups water
  • 1 medium-sized head of cabbage approximately 6-7 cups, cored and sliced thinly
  • ½ cup white rice
  • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar or white wine vinegar
  • ¼ cups fresh Italian parsley chopped – more as garnish

Instructions

  • Heat olive oil in a large pot (with a lid) over medium-high heat. Add in the onion and cook until translucent.
  • Stir in the beef, cumin, and paprika. Cook, breaking the large pieces of the meat with the back of a wooden spoon, for 5-7 minutes.
  • Stir in garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
  • Add in the tomato sauce, diced tomatoes, salt, pepper, and honey and give it a stir.
  • Pour in the stock and water. Stir in the cabbage and rice.
  • Put the lid on and bring it to a boil. Keeping the lid ajar, turn down the heat to medium, and let it simmer for 25-30 minutes or until rice is fully cooked and cabbage is tender to your liking. Be sure to stir it a few times during the cooking process.
  • Right before serving, stir in the vinegar and parsley. Taste for seasoning and add more if ncessary.
  • Serve immediately with crusty bread and, if preferred, with a dollop of yogurt or Tzatziki sauce.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes a big pot of soup (7-8 cups) ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Meat: If you want to switch things up, you can substitute ground beef with ground turkey or ground chicken. While they taste slightly different, I like both versions.
  • Liquid: I love using a blend of chicken stock and water as the cooking liquid for this recipe. While chicken stock adds depth of flavor, I find that incorporating some water helps balance the richness, creating a lighter and more enjoyable dish. Of course, if you prefer a richer flavor profile, you can certainly omit the water and use all chicken stock.
  • A very forgiving recipe: I used a medium-sized green cabbage, which yielded 6-7 cups of sliced cabbage, but there are no rules here. If you have a bit more cabbage, add in a little bit more liquid and vice versa.
  • Freezing: This dish freezes well. If you have leftovers, feel free to put them in an airtight container and freeze them for up to two months. A day before you want to serve, thaw them in the fridge overnight.
  • Reheating: Place the thawed soup in a large pot and reheat it on the stove. The soup thickens as it sits, so you may need to add 1-2 cups of additional stock or water. Also, be sure to taste for seasoning and adjust it as necessary.

Nutrition

Calories: 449kcal | Carbohydrates: 43g | Protein: 24g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 57mg | Sodium: 1053mg | Potassium: 886mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 12g | Vitamin A: 611IU | Vitamin C: 66mg | Calcium: 128mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-cabbage-soup/feed/ 35
Beef Kabobs in Oven https://foolproofliving.com/beef-kabobs-in-oven/ https://foolproofliving.com/beef-kabobs-in-oven/#respond Fri, 01 Mar 2024 14:12:17 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=73915 There’s a reason why we can’t get enough shish kabob recipes in the oven. Not only are these dishes visually…]]>

There’s a reason why we can’t get enough shish kabob recipes in the oven. Not only are these dishes visually stunning, but they’re also incredibly versatile! Of course, my oven beef skewers are undeniably tasty, with their tender bite and savory flavor. If you’re in the mood for chicken, my Baked Chicken Kabobs boast a light and zesty taste that pairs amazingly with everything from veggie sides to rice dishes.

If you are a fan of kabobs, also check out our Grilled Shrimp Kabobs.

Beef shish kabob skewers on a bed of rice from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

With all-natural ingredients and the choicest cuts of meat, this beef kabobs recipe couldn’t be tastier. Below, you’ll find the three sets of ingredients—beef, seasoning, and veggies—to transform your steak into a restaurant-quality meal.

Beef

If you’re wondering, “What kind of beef is best for kabobs?” I’ve got you covered! I’ve found the best cuts to make your easy steak kabobs as tender and flavorful as possible.

  • Sirloin: Sirloin is my favorite choice when making beef kebabs in the oven due to its flavorful composition. This inexpensive cut is widely available at most grocery stores. We tested this recipe both with top sirloin steak and sirloin roast. They both worked beautifully, so you can use either cut you can get your hands on.
  • Tenderloin: Also referred to as “filet mignon,” beef tenderloin boasts one of the most tender textures among steaks. However, it tends to be more expensive than sirloin, so keep your budget in mind when selecting your type of kabob meat.
  • Ribeye: The thorough marbling and heartiness of ribeye steak make it a no-brainer for those who value richness in their beef. However—similar to tenderloin—ribeye tends to be pricier than other steaks, so I prefer more cost-effective variations for this recipe.
  • Chuck roast: Though this cut will technically work in this recipe, I don’t recommend it. Chuck roast tends to produce chewier and tougher meat—even given its long marination time—which will interfere with this recipe’s desired texture.

Beef Kabob Seasoning / Marinade Ingredients

Marinating your meat is the key to making the most tender, full-bodied oven steak kabobs. My go-to easy seasoning for beef kabobs strikes the ultimate balance between savory, sweet, and umami flavors—all with pantry-ready ingredients!

Ingredients for the marinade that we use in the recipe.

If preferred, you can use an alternate steak kabob marinade to achieve your desired flavor profile. However, just be sure to choose a marinade that will help break down the meat’s fibers to enhance the tenderizing process. Below are the ingredients for our favorite marinade for this recipe:

  • Olive oil: We used olive oil, but any other vegetable oil, like avocado oil, would work in this recipe.
  • Soy sauce: Salty, bright, and full of umami flavor, soy sauce is one of the primary ingredients in my seasoning recipe. You may also substitute this ingredient with coconut aminos if you follow a gluten-free diet.
  • Balsamic vinegar: Balsamic vinegar is a must in this recipe, as its acidic base best helps tenderize the steak and lends the meat complexly sweet undertones. However, lemon juice would also work in a pinch.
  • Worcestershire sauce: Adding Worcestershire sauce to this steak marinade is my favorite way to lend it tangy, savory-sweet flavors. However, you may omit this ingredient if you prefer a gluten-free recipe.
  • Dijon mustard
  • Honey: A spoonful of honey is just what this recipe needs to balance its sharper flavors with a finger-licking sweetness. You may also use a tablespoon of brown sugar as an alternative to honey.
  • Fresh cloves of garlic: Garlic is an excellent ingredient to add pungent, buttery notes to your steak seasoning. Though you can technically use garlic powder, I recommend fresh garlic, as it better infuses its flavors into the marinade.
  • Kosher salt and black pepper

Vegetables

If preferred, you can easily make oven-baked beef kabobs without vegetables. However, I prefer adding veggies to my skewers to add a sumptuous balance of tender-crisp texture, nutritious taste, and a pop of color. 

Ingredients needed to make steak kabobs in oven.

When selecting which veggies to use, choose those that cook quickly to avoid raw or undercooked pieces. For a better picture of what I mean, below are my favorite vegetables to add to oven kebabs:

  • Bell peppers: Bell peppers are one of my go-to’s when I want to give my beef skewers a garden-fresh bite. Any color of bell pepper would work in this recipe, from crisp green to sweet red. 
  • Red onions: Mildly sweet and oh-so-colorful, red onions expertly bring out steaks’ more robust flavors. Just be sure to separate the onion into layers before threading your skewers to avoid overly thick, undercooked slices.
  • Mushrooms: Mushrooms are the perfect addition for anyone who can’t get enough umami-rich flavors. I usually opt for baby Bella mushrooms in this recipe due to their deep, earthy taste and firm texture.
  • Cherry tomatoes: Want to brighten your easy beef kabobs with robust tomatoey flavors? Adding cherry tomatoes to your oven shish kabobs will give each bite a light, juicy finish.

How to Cook Beef Shish Kabobs in the Oven?

Cooking steak kabobs in the oven couldn’t be easier with my step-by-step instructions. Below, I’ll walk you through the process, covering everything from expert marination to pro cooking techniques.

A collage of images showing how to make this recipe.
  1. Make the marinade: In a large bowl, whisk together the olive oil, soy sauce, balsamic vinegar, Worcestershire sauce, Dijon mustard, honey, garlic, kosher salt, and ground pepper.
  2. Cut the steak: Use paper towels to pat dry the sirloin steak. Then, use a fork to gently pierce the meat in a few places and slice it into one-inch cubes.
  3. Marinate the meat: Add the cubed beef to the bowl with the marinade and toss it until all of the chunks of meat have direct contact with the mixture. Seal the bowl tightly with plastic wrap and refrigerate for at least six hours or preferably overnight.
  4. Soak the skewers: If you’re using wooden skewers, soak them in water for thirty minutes before you begin assembly. If you are using metal skewers, you can skip this step.
  5. Prep the oven: Place the oven rack in the middle position and preheat the oven to 375 degrees F. (190 degrees C.). Then, line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
A collage of images showing how to thread beef and vegetables to make steak kabobs.
  1. Assemble the kebabs: Loosely thread the marinated beef cubes on the skewer, tap off any excess marinade, and alternate them with the onion and peppers. For 1 ½ pounds of steak cubes, you should have about 10-11 skewers, with each skewer having 3-4 pieces of steak.
  2. Arrange the skewers: Place kabobs to the prepared baking sheet and discard the excess marinade.
  3. Bake: Put the beef skewers in the oven and bake for ten minutes, flipping them halfway through. After ten minutes, turn on the broiler and broil the kabobs in the oven for 3-4 minutes, again turning them halfway through to ensure even browning.
  4. Let the meat rest: Remove the broiled shish kabobs from the oven and tent them loosely with aluminum foil. Let the meat rest for five minutes, then serve with your favorite side dishes.

How to Store, Freeze, and Thaw?

Learning how to cook steak skewers in the oven isn’t just good for an easy weeknight meal. It’s also a fantastic way to meal prep throughout the week! These simple storage tips will ensure you can enjoy this easy recipe whenever you want, whether you eat it tomorrow or in a week.

  • Store: After cooking shish kabobs in the oven, let them come to room temperature. Then, transfer them to a sealed container and store them in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Freeze: Beef does well when frozen. However, veggies tend to become soggy when exposed to low temperatures, so I recommend removing them from your beef skewers before freezing. Then, you may freeze your beef in an airtight container until ready to thaw.
  • Thaw: You can thaw your steak kebaps by placing them in the fridge overnight. Then, heat and serve the beef when ready to eat.
  • Reheat: I recommend reheating your shish kabobs in a low-heat oven (300 degrees F.) for 5-10 minutes or until heated through.

What to Serve With Kebabs Cooked in the Oven?

Oven beef kabobs are a must for anyone who loves a nourishing, tasty, and versatile plate. This hearty main pairs exquisitely with everything from rich grains to finger-licking sauces.

  • Grains: Want to transform your oven-baked steak kabobs into a filling menu? This meaty base tastes delicious with a side of basic rice pilaf, Wild Rice, or Brown Jasmine Rice. Or, if you want a more herbaceous, zestier option, my Herbed Quinoa and Tabbouleh recipes will easily convince your guests that you’re a professional chef.
  • Salad: Nutritious, crisp, and delicious, green salads are just the perfect side dish to lighten this beefy main. If you want to pack your table with a colorful, superfood-packed side, I highly recommend serving your steak kabobs alongside a tangy Butter Lettuce Salad or zesty Kale Brussel Sprout Salad. Or, if you’re in the mood for gourmet Italian classics, my cheesy Caprese with Burrata and savory La Scala Salad will give your menu a five-star finish.
  • Sauces: If you love the complex taste of savory meats dipped in flavor-packed sauces, these recipes are just what you need. I love pairing oven-baked shish kabobs with a creamy Yogurt-based sauce, such as my cool Mediterranean Tzatziki. Otherwise, my zesty Pesto Dressing will enliven every bite with a fresh, herby taste.

Expert Tips

Learning how to prepare beef kabobs is a cinch with these chef-level tips. This simple guide will ensure you have everything you need to prep, thread, and cook your skewers to perfection.

  • Cutting beef: When cutting your steak into cubes, try to cut them into equal bite size pieces. Doing so will ensure each piece cooks at an even rate, thereby avoiding over- or undercooked meat.
  • Poke the meat: If you want to infuse every bite of meat with a sumptuous flavor, I highly recommend poking or gently piercing the steak (from a few places) with a fork before beginning the marination process. These perforations will help the marinade infuse your meat’s fibers more deeply, ensuring the center is as well-seasoned as the exterior. 
  • Don’t skip on the marinade: Marination is vital to ensure your beef tenderizes and has a complete infusion of flavor. I recommend marinating steak for a minimum of six hours or up to twelve hours for best results.
  • Soak wood skewers: If you’re using wooden or bamboo skewers, be sure to soak them in water for a minimum of thirty minutes before assembly. Soaking skewers in water will keep the wood from scorching when exposed to high heat.
  • Thread them lightly: You mustn’t thread your kebabs too tightly when assembling them. Looser threading will ensure every component of the kabob—whether meat or vegetable—has the same amount of surface area exposed to the oven’s heat, thereby allowing for even cooking.
  • Temperature of the oven: Though we tried cooking these beef kabobs at 450 and 400 degrees F., we found that these high temperatures tended to cook the meat and veggies unevenly, leading to undercooked vegetables and overcooked meat. In the end, we decided that a milder, 375 degrees F. oven followed by a quick broil worked best to mimic the flavors of grilled beef kabobs.
  • Check for doneness: The best way to check the doneness of your steak shish kabobs is by inserting a meat thermometer into the center of a piece of beef. If you want your meat to be medium (which I prefer in this recipe), aim for an internal temperature of 140-145 degrees F., or 63 degrees C. If you want your beef to be medium-rare instead, the internal temperature of the steak should reach 130-135 degrees F. (57 degrees C.). No matter what level of doneness you prefer, however, try to avoid overcooking the meat to maintain its delicious flavor and tender texture.
  • Let the meat rest: For the juiciest, most flavorful meat, it’s essential to let your steak rest for a minimum of five minutes after cooking. This resting time ensures the steak’s juices don’t spill out after the first cut and give you dry, flavorless meat. Instead, the juices will have time to redistribute evenly throughout each piece, giving every bite a rich, juicy flavor.
Oven beef skewers with vegetables on skewers.

FAQs

Have more questions about this tasty steak kabob recipe? This beginner-friendly FAQ will answer all your questions, from ideal cooking temperatures to whether you should put kabobs in the broiler.

Can you put kabobs in the oven?

Absolutely! Baking beef kabobs in the oven is an easy way to make a savory, protein-packed meal without the hassle of prepping the grill. 

What temp. to cook kabobs in the oven?

I recommend cooking beef kabobs at 375 degrees F. for 10-15 minutes to achieve your desired level of doneness. Though you may cook this recipe at higher temperatures (400-450 degrees F.), remember that vegetables don’t cook at the same rate as steak. Therefore, a lower temperature is ideal if you include meat and veggies on your skewers.

How long to cook steak kabobs in the oven?

How long you bake your steak kabobs depends on the size of your meat cubes and what final temperature you’re aiming for. However, I cooked my kabobs at 375 degrees F. for ten minutes and broiled them for 3-4 minutes—flipping halfway through during both cooking times—to achieve a medium doneness in one-inch pieces of steak.

Can you broil kabobs?

Definitely! Broiling shish kabobs gives them a light crust, mimicking the charred taste of an outdoor grill without the extra prep. However, I recommend baking the steak skewers at a 350-degree F. oven first and finishing with a quick broil to avoid meat with burnt exteriors and uncooked centers.

If you try this Beef Kabobs in Oven recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Baked beef kabobs on a bed of rice garnished with parsley from the top view.
Print

Beef Kabobs in Oven Recipe

No grill? No problem! With this easy-baked steak kabobs recipe, you can make beef kabobs in the oven all year long. Simply marinade the beef, thread the skewers, bake in the oven, and call it a dinner. With a little advance prep, this is a fantastic low-carb dinner that you can meal prep for the week.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Halal
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Marinading Time 8 hours
Total Time 8 hours 45 minutes
Servings 11 skewers
Calories 197kcal

Ingredients

For the marinade:

  • ½ cup olive oil
  • ¼ cup soy sauce
  • ¼ cup balsamic vinegar
  • 1 ½ tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon honey or brown sugar
  • 5 cloves garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

For the beef kabobs:

  • 1 ½ lb top sirloin steak or sirloin roast*
  • 3 bell peppers seeded and cut into 1-inch pieces (any color would work)
  • 1 small red onion peeled and cut into 1-inch pieces

Instructions

  • To prepare the marinade, in a large bowl, combine olive oil, soy sauce, balsamic vinegar, Worcestershire sauce, Dijon mustard, honey, garlic, kosher salt, and ground black pepper. Whisk thoroughly to combine.
  • Pat dry sirloin steak (or roast) and pierce, using a fork, gently into a few places. Cut it into 1-inch cubes.
  • Place the cubed beef into the bowl with the marinade. Toss to ensure that all beef cubes have direct contact with the marinade. Seal tightly using stretch film. Refrigerate for a minimum of 6 hours or overnight.
  • If using wooden skewers, soak them in water for 30 minutes before assembling the steak kabobs. If using metal skewers, you can skip this step.
  • Arrange the oven rack in the middle position and preheat the oven to 375 degrees F /190 degrees C. Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Loosely thread the beef chunks on the skewer tapping off any excess marinade, and alternate with the onion and peppers. For 1 ½ pounds of cubed beef, you should have 11-12 skewers, with each skewer having 3-4 pieces of meat (depending on the size of the beef cubes.)
  • Transfer the beef kabobs onto the prepared baking sheet. Discard the marinade.
  • Bake the beef kabobs in the preheated oven for 10 minutes, flipping halfway. When done, turn the broiler on and broil the kabobs for 3-4 minutes, making sure to turn them once halfway through the process for even browning.
  • Remove from the oven and loosely tent with foil. Let the meat rest for 5 minutes before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 11-12 beef skewers, which is ideal for serving 5 people (with 2 skewers per person.) The nutritional values below are per skewer.
  • Meat: We tested this recipe both with top sirloin steak and sirloin roast. Both cuts worked beautifully. Of course, you can use filet mignon or rib-eye if you have the budget.
  • Store: Let beef kabobs come to room temperature. Then, transfer them to an airtight container and store them in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Freeze: Beef does well when frozen. However, veggies tend to become soggy when exposed to low temperatures, so I recommend removing them from your beef skewers before freezing. Then, you may freeze your meat in an airtight container until ready to thaw.
  • Thaw: You can thaw your steak kebobs by placing them in the fridge overnight. Then, heat and serve the beef when ready to eat.
  • Reheat: I recommend reheating your shish kabobs in a low-heat oven (300 degrees F.) for 5-10 minutes or until heated through.

Nutrition

Calories: 197kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Cholesterol: 36mg | Sodium: 484mg | Potassium: 350mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1020IU | Vitamin C: 43mg | Calcium: 27mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/beef-kabobs-in-oven/feed/ 0
Beer Braised Short Ribs https://foolproofliving.com/beer-braised-short-ribs/ https://foolproofliving.com/beer-braised-short-ribs/#comments Tue, 27 Feb 2024 17:13:18 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=73857 Here at Foolproof Living, we love cooking meat in Dutch oven. If you are a fan as well, be sure…]]>

Here at Foolproof Living, we love cooking meat in Dutch oven. If you are a fan as well, be sure to check out our Beef Eggplant Stew and Barefoot Contessa’s Pot Roast, too.

If you have never thought of making braised short ribs in beer, I can assure you that this recipe is going to change your life. That’s right, braised short ribs without wine. Dare I say, better? They are meaty, juicy, and tender, with incredible depth of flavor. What a great recipe to serve for St. Patrick’s Day, with some extra dark beer to wash it all down.

Beer braised beef short ribs on a bed of mashed potatoes with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients

Beef short ribs braised in beer require fewer ingredients than you may think, all of which are probably already in your pantry or easy to find in grocery stores. Here’s a bit more detail about what we need:

Seasoning needed to coat the meat.
  • Seasonings: A simple yet flavorful mix of paprika, curry powder, cumin, Kosher salt, and black pepper provide ample flavor. If you are looking for an intense smoky kick, feel free to swap paprika with smoked paprika.
Ingredients needed to make the recipe from the top view.
  • Sugar: Adding a small amount of sugar not only helps intensify the rest of the spices but also ensures browning. You can use either dark brown sugar or coconut sugar.
  • Beef short ribs: Pick up a set of well-marbled beef short ribs with the bone-in at the butcher counter. You will need 8 pieces, which should be roughly 4-5 pounds.
  • Olive oil: Use olive oil, or swap it out for avocado oil instead.
  • Vegetables: Onions, carrots, and celery provide layers of flavor, aromatics, fiber, and color.
  • Fresh garlic cloves: Use fresh garlic for the most punchy flavor.
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh bay leaves (or dried) and sprigs of thyme give the beer-braised beef short ribs a special aromatic background. You also have the option to garnish with fresh parsley at the end.
  • Stock: I love deeply rich beef stock, but you can use low-sodium chicken broth as well.
  • Dark beer: Brown ale or porter provides a delicious, mild, sweet taste and special umami notes. My favorites are Newcastle Brown Ale, Samuel Smith’s Nut Brown Ale, and Sierra Nevada Porter. While we prefer brown ale for these beer-braised beef ribs, your favorite stout beer, such as Guinness, is a good option.
  • Tomatoes: One full can of diced tomatoes, with all their juices, provides a great level of acidity. For an even richer flavor, you can add 1 tablespoon of tomato paste sauteed right alongside the garlic.

How to Make Beer Braised Beef Ribs?

This beef short ribs Dutch oven recipe takes an easier, hands-off approach thanks to the help of our trusty oven. No more standing over a hot stove with hot splatters of grease all over your kitchen. Here’s how I like to make these Dutch oven beef short ribs:

  1. Prep equipment: Arrange the oven rack to the middle position. Preheat the oven to 425 °F (218°C). Place a wire rack on a baking sheet and set aside.
A collage of images showing how to season the short ribs.
  1. Mix dry seasoning: In a small bowl, mix the paprika, curry powder, cumin, salt, black pepper, and dark brown sugar.
  2. Prepare short ribs: Dry the entire surface of the short ribs, on all sides, with paper towels. 
  3. Season: Evenly sprinkle the seasoning mixture on all sides of the beef short ribs.
Person showing how to roast seasoned ribs.
  1. Roast short ribs: Place the seasoned short ribs onto the wire rack in a single layer. Roast in the preheated oven for 15 minutes until the top of the ribs are just browned. Remove from the oven and set aside while you prepare the rest of the ingredients. Lower the oven temperature to 350 °F (177 °C.)
A collage of photos showing how to cook veggies and prepare ribs to cook them in the oven in a Dutch oven.
  1. Saute vegetables: In a large Dutch oven (6-7 quart), heat olive oil over medium heat. Add the onion, carrots, and celery, and cook, stirring frequently, until the vegetables have softened, about 10 minutes.
  2. Stir in garlic: Add the garlic and cook until fragrant, about 30 seconds, making sure to scrape any brown bits at the bottom of the pan using a wooden spoon. 
  3. Pour in liquids: Add the bay leaf, beef stock, beer, and diced tomatoes. Increase to medium-high heat and bring the mixture to a boil. This may take up to 15 minutes.
  4. Braise: As soon as the braising liquid comes to a boil, remove it from heat. Nestle in the short ribs, cover with a lid and transfer to the oven. Cook for 2 hours, removing the lid during the last 30 minutes of braising time. After 2 hours, the meat should fall off the bone tender.
  5. Serve: Serve braised beef short ribs over rice, mashed potatoes, or polenta with a spoonful of the braising liquid and some of the vegetables. Enjoy!

How to Store and Freeze?

Dutch oven short ribs are an expensive cut of beef, so we want to ensure we are getting the most out of this additional cost. To ensure all your efforts do not go to waste, here are my best storage tips for this Dutch oven beef short ribs recipe:

  • Storage: Cool completely, skim off any excess fat, then transfer the Dutch oven beef ribs to an airtight container. Store in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Freeze: Cool to room temperature, then store in a freezer-safe airtight container with some space at the top for expansion. Label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw overnight in the refrigerator.
  • Reheat: Reheat in a 325-degree F oven for 30-35 minutes or until bubbly and warmed through. We want to reheat at a lower temperature to prevent overcooking the meat.

What to Serve with Beer Braised Beef Short Ribs?

These Dutch oven braised beef short ribs are a great way to feed a crowd. So whether you are serving this at your next dinner party or as an elegant weeknight dinner for two, there are so many serving options to choose from. Here are my favorite ways to serve them:

Beer Braised Beef short ribs in Dutch oven from the top view.

Expert Tips

Here are some of my expert tips for making the best braised beef short ribs recipe:

  • When buying beef short ribs, make sure to purchase English-cut short ribs that are well-marbled with the rib bones intact. All that muscle, fat, tendon, and bone will give a lot of strong beefy flavor. I do not recommend boneless short ribs.
  • Wire rack: Most short ribs recipes sear the short ribs before braising them in liquid. This recipe is different because we give the ribs a quick roast by baking them on a wire rack at a high temperature. Using a wire rack placed in a baking sheet (affiliate link) is important here because it helps circulate the air helping mimic the searing effect.
  • Dutch oven: I used a 7-quart Dutch oven (affiliate link) for this recipe, which fit the ribs and liquid perfectly. I did test it in a 5 ½-quart Dutch oven (affiliate link) as well. The recipe still worked, but it was filled to the brim.
  • Cook it low and slow: Braising the short ribs for an extended period in low heat extracts the collagen and allows the muscle fibers to slowly break down. This is the trick to fall off-the-bone meat. So, do not rush the process. Let the oven do most of the work. Trust me, your patience will be rewarded.
  • Slow Cooker: Alternatively, you can cook ribs in a slow cooker after they are roasted in the oven. If you decide to do so, add sauteed veggies, all the liquid (including the beer), and the short ribs to the bowl of a slow cooker. Cook on low for 8 hours.
  • Skim the fat: After the short ribs are cooked, skim away some of the fat off the top of the sauce for a cleaner flavor. You can also do this once cooled after the fat solidifies at the top.
  • Beer: Some sources say when making short ribs in a cast iron Dutch oven, using Stout beer (such as Guinness) may result in a bitter flavor. We tested this recipe with Guinness and didn’t think that it tasted bitter. However, overall we thought that the version made with brown ale had more complex flavors compared to stout braised short ribs. 

FAQs

How long to cook short ribs in a Dutch oven?

In general, it takes about 2 to 3 hours to cook 5 pounds of beef short ribs in a Dutch oven in the oven. The timing might slightly vary depending on the recipe you are using. It is advisable to keep a close eye on especially after the 2-hour mark.

Can you overcook braised beef short ribs?

As long as you stick to the low and slow cooking method, it’s very difficult to overcook Dutch oven short ribs. As soon as the meat falls off the bone, it’s ready.

Can you make braised short ribs ahead of time?

Yes, you can make beer-braised beef ribs up to 2-3 days in advance. Beef short ribs in beer taste better the next day, and the longer they sit, the flavors have time to marry together.

Other Beef Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you are in need of more show-stopper beef dinners, be sure to check out our entire catalog of red meat recipes. Below are a few hand-picked favorites we think you might like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Beer Braised Short Ribs recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Beef short ribs braised in beer in a cast iron Dutch oven from the top view.
Print

Beer Braised Short Ribs Recipe

If you think you can’t make braised short ribs without wine, think again! These beer braised short ribs cooked in the Dutch oven make the most richly flavored short ribs recipe thanks to brown ale added to the cooking liquid. Serve with mashed potatoes, rice, or a simple green salad on the side and accept the compliments.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 2 hours 30 minutes
Total Time 3 hours
Servings 8 servings
Calories 386kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon paprika or smoked paprika
  • 1 tablespoon curry powder
  • 2 teaspoons ground cumin
  • 2 teaspoons Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons dark brown sugar or coconut sugar
  • 4-5 lbs bone-in beef short ribs cut in 4-inches (about eight to nine pieces)
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 medium onion chopped – 1 ½ cups
  • 4 medium carrots chopped ~ 2 cups
  • 4 celery stalks chopped ~ 2 cups
  • 4 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 bay leaf
  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme chopped, plus more for garnish
  • 2 cups beef broth or chicken stock
  • 1 bottle brown ale or porter 12-ounce
  • 1 can diced tomatoes 28-ounce – with juices

Instructions

  • Arrange the oven rack to the middle position. Preheat the oven to 425 °F (218°C). Place a wire rack on a baking sheet and set it aside.
  • Mix paprika, curry powder, ground cumin, salt, pepper, and dark brown sugar in a small bowl.
  • Pat dry the bone in short ribs on all sides using a sheet of paper towel.
  • Sprinkle them with the seasoning mixture on all sides.
  • Transfer them onto the wire rack and transfer to the preheated oven. Roast for 15 minutes. Take them out of the oven and set them aside while you are working on the rest of the ingredients.
  • Decrease the oven temperature to 350 °F (177 °C.)
  • Heat olive oil in a large (6-7 quart) Dutch oven over medium-high heat. Add the onion, carrots, and celery. Cook, stirring frequently, for 10 minutes or until vegetables are softened.
  • Add the garlic and cook for another 30 seconds scraping the bottom of the pot with a wooden spoon.
  • Add the bay leaf, beef stock, beer, and diced tomatoes into the pot. Turn the heat to medium-high and bring it to a boil. This takes about 15 minutes.
  • Off the heat, nestle the short ribs in the liquid. Cover it with a lid, transfer it to the oven, and cook for 2 hours, removing the lid in the last 30 minutes of cooking. At the end of the cooking time, the meat should be falling off the bone tender.
  • Serve braised beef short ribs over rice, mashed potatoes, or polenta with a spoonful of the braising liquid and some of the vegetables.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 8 or 9 pieces of bone in beef short ribs depending on the size of your ribs. We think one rib is ideal per serving, so we listed it as 8 servings. The nutritional information below is per serving.
  • This recipe is adapted from The Staub cookbook: Modern Recipes with Classic Cast Iron with minor changes to the original recipe.
  • Beer: We recommend using a brown ale or porter for this recipe. Newcastle is our favorite but any brand you like to drink would work. You can make it with a stout as well, but we like the overall taste of brown ale braised ribs better.
  • Dutch Oven: A large Dutch oven (7 qt) is ideal for this recipe. You can also use a 5 1/2 qt one as well but be aware that it will be filled to the rim. If you do not have a Dutch oven, a large casserole dish covered tightly with aluminum foil will work.
  • Storage: Cool your ribs completely, skim off any excess fat, then transfer them to an airtight container. Store in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Freeze: Cool to room temperature, then store in a freezer-safe airtight container with some space at the top for expansion. Label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator.
  • Reheat: Reheat in a 325-degree F oven for 30-35 minutes or until bubbly and warmed through. We want to reheat at a lower temperature to prevent overcooking the meat.

Nutrition

Calories: 386kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 34g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 98mg | Sodium: 944mg | Potassium: 901mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 5653IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 67mg | Iron: 5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/beer-braised-short-ribs/feed/ 2
Leftover Prime Rib Sandwich https://foolproofliving.com/prime-rib-sandwich/ https://foolproofliving.com/prime-rib-sandwich/#respond Wed, 31 Jan 2024 19:13:28 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=73428 Don’t you just love a delicious Prime Rib Roast with its juicy, perfectly pink center? I know I do, and…]]>

Don’t you just love a delicious Prime Rib Roast with its juicy, perfectly pink center? I know I do, and I never want to see any prime rib leftovers go to waste. Since it is such a large meal with lots of leftovers, I am always in search of new recipes.

Enter leftover prime rib sandwiches! It’s a fun way to transform an elegant dinner into a casual meal.

Leftover Prime Rib Sandwich from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

Leftover prime rib sandwiches start with the meat, of course. After that, it’s your typical toppings of condiments, cheese, greens, and more. As always, use these ingredient quantities as a guide, and feel free to use more or less based on your preference and whatever other fixings you prefer.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Bread: I love classic French bread or baguette, but you can use ciabatta bread, Italian bread, or even a hoagie roll to make it more of a prime rib sub.
  • Prime rib: Use leftover Prime Rib that’s thinly sliced or shaved (more on this below) or even smoked prime rib. While prime rib is the meat of choice today, you can use this same recipe for any slow-roasted meat, like Pot Roast, corned beef, pastrami, or leftover roast beef.
  • Condiments: Creamy Horseradish Sauce with Sour Cream is classic, or go for a healthier approach with Horseradish Yogurt Sauce. Or, keep it simple by whipping together a horseradish mayo, or simply use plain mayonnaise, stone ground, or Dijon mustard.
  • Cheese: I love slices of provolone cheese, but you can also use Havarti, Swiss cheese, mild white cheddar cheese, or Pepper Jack cheese as well.
  • Baby arugula: Peppery arugula cuts through the richness of the meat and cheese, but feel free to use thinly sliced romaine, iceberg lettuce, or even mixed greens.
  • Sweet caramelized onions: Rich caramelized onions take this prime rib leftover sandwich up a notch, but you can keep it simple with sliced onions, Pickled Red Onions, sautéed onion, or Sauteed Shiitake Mushrooms.

How to Make Prime Rib Sandwiches

This leftover prime rib sandwich recipe comes together in a few easy steps. Here’s how I like to do it:

  1. Preheat the oven: Preheat the broiler to High. Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper. 
  2. Slice prime rib: Remove any excess fat from the roast, then slice the prime rib thinly with a sharp knife.
A collage of photos showing how to prepare bread for standing rib roast sandwich.
  1. Cut bread: Cut the baguette into four equal pieces. Then, slice each piece in half lengthwise, ensuring not to cut all the way through.
  2. Spread with horseradish cream sauce: Open the bread and spread two tablespoons of horseradish sauce on each side.
Photos showing how to assemble Prime rib sandwiches.
  1. Layer with meat and cheese: On one side of the bread, layer a few slices of leftover meat and one slice of cheese. Repeat the same process with the remaining sandwiches. Transfer them to the prepared baking sheet.
  2. Broil: Broil for 2 minutes or just until the cheese melts.
  3. Finish and serve: Remove from the oven and finish each sandwich with a handful of fresh arugula, caramelized onions, and some freshly cracked black pepper, if desired. Enjoy!

How to Store and Reheat Leftovers?

Since leftover rib roast sandwiches have so many components, it’s best to assemble them fresh the day you are going to serve or up to 1 day in advance. And to ensure none of that delicious prime rib meat goes to waste, proper storage is key. For the best storage and reheating, simply:

  • Storage: Wrap the leftover prime rib roast (or assembled sandwiches) tightly in plastic wrap or keep it in an airtight container. Store the sandwiches in the fridge for 1 day and the prime rib for up to 3 days.
  • Reheat sandwiches: If reheating the entire sandwich the next day, remove the arugula and wrap the sandwich in foil. Then, reheat sandwiches in a low oven (250 – 300 degrees F) for 10-15 minutes or until warmed to your liking.

Variations

Thinly sliced prime rib is just as delicious served open-faced, pressed, wrapped, or mini. Some of my favorite variations for rib roast sandwiches include:

  • Open Face Prime Rib Sandwich: Slice the bread all the way through and serve it open-faced with an extra slice of cheese on each side.
  • Prime Rib Panini: Use sliced sourdough or ciabatta and press it on a panini press. Or, press the sliced prime rib sandwiches down in a large skillet with a baking sheet weighed down with a skillet or small saucepan. You can also use a panini press if you have one.
  • Prime Rib Wrap: Wrap all the workings of a prime rib sandwich in your favorite flatbread, like Lavash Bread, pita bread, or corn tortillas.
  • Leftover Prime Rib Sliders Recipe: Purchase a package of slider buns or make Homemade Brioche Rolls and assemble the sandwiches as directed.
Person holding a shaved prime rib sandwich in her hand.

What to Serve with Prime Rib Sandwiches?

Whether you want a sauce for prime rib sandwiches or some extra side dishes to make it more filling, here are my favorites ways to serve:

  • Au Jus Sauce: Serve a classic French Dip sandwich by simply having some warm Au Jus Sauce in a small bowl on the side. Dip and enjoy!
  • Horseradish Sauce: Serve with extra horseradish sauce on the side to wake up your taste buds.
  • Gravy: If you have some leftover beef gravy, it would make a good dipping sauce or a drizzle.
  • Coleslaw: Give it some crunch with some Yogurt Coleslaw or No Mayo Coleslaw on the side.
  • Roasted Vegetables: Balance this hearty meal with some roasted vegetables, like Roasted Asparagus or Air Roasted Red Potatoes, served on the side – or right on top of the sandwich!
  • Green Salad: Keep it light with a simple green leafy salad such as my Spring Mix Salad or Butter Lettuce Salad.
  • Pickle Spears: I love any type of sandwich with pickle spears, and it gives it that special deli appeal. Go for traditional pickles or Gherkins.

Expert Tips

  • Slicing the meat: When cutting the prime rib into thin slices, patience and a steady grip are key, but there are a few extra techniques to pay attention to:
    • Chill: Keep the prime rib roast chilled and in the fridge until the moment you are ready to slice. Cold meat is sturdy, with all the muscle fibers held in place, and as a result, it is easier to slice.
    • Use a sharp knife: While I’m sure many of us do not have a meat slicer lying around, the key to achieving super thin slices is to use a sharp knife and sturdy work surface. A long, sharp chef’s knife or a serrated knife will produce even cuts without turning the meat into shreds.
    • Trim the fat: If there is an extra thick layer of fat on the outside, trim it down a bit, but make sure to keep some for extra flavor.
    • Control thickness: Slice the meat about ⅛ to ¼ inch in thickness, and always against the grain (slice perpendicular to the direction of the muscle fibers).
    • Storage: If you are not enjoying the slices of prime rib right away, store them in an airtight container in the fridge with pieces of parchment paper between every few slices.
  • Reheating the prime rib slices: It is optional, but if you want, you can reheat the shaved prime rib before assembling the sandwiches. To do so, place ½ cup of leftover au jus or beef broth in a small skillet over medium heat and bring to a simmer. Add the leftover prime rib slices and heat for 2-3 minutes or until warm. Remove the meat slices with tongs and allow the excess liquid to drip off before assembling the sandwiches.
  • Keep an eye on it when broiling: Keep the oven rack in the middle, and watch closely as the cheese can burn easily!
  • Fresh bread: Some say that a sandwich is as good as its bread, and this one is no exception. Regardless of the type of bread you use, the freshest bread is the best bread for prime rib, so make sure to stop at your local bakery for a freshly baked baguette just before assembling.

FAQs

How to shave prime rib for making prime rib sandwiches?

Thinly sliced prime rib is easy with a long, sharp chef’s knife, a steady work surface, and cold meat. This ensures whole, even slices without turning the meat into shreds.

How to reheat prime rib sandwich?

Reheat a prime rib sandwich in a low heat oven (250 – 300 degrees F) wrapped in foil for 10-15 minutes. The low heat prevents overcooking the meat, while the foil wrap keeps the bread crispy.

What cheese for prime rib sandwich?

The best cheese for prime rib sandwich is your preference, but a classic pairing can be either provolone, Havarti, Swiss, mild Cheddar, or even Pepper Jack.

Other Sandwich Recipes You Might Also Like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Shaved Prime Rib Sandwich recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Prime rib sandwiches served with au jus on the side.
Print

Leftover Prime Rib Sandwich Recipe

Make this Prime Rib Sandwich, and never let leftover prime rib go to waste. Thinly sliced prime rib layered with horseradish sauce (or mayo), provolone cheese, caramelized onions, and fresh arugula, this easy sandwich is the best way to use leftover rib roast.
Course Lunch, Sandwich
Cuisine American
Diet Halal
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 2 minutes
Total Time 17 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 446kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 crusty bread such as baguette*, French bread, or Ciabatta
  • ½ cup horseradish sauce or mayonnaise
  • 1 pound cooked prime rib
  • 4 slices Provolone cheese
  • 2 cups arugula rinsed and drained
  • 1 cup caramelized onions or sliced red onions (optional)
  • Salt and pepper to taste

Instructions

  • Arrange your oven rack in the middle position. Preheat the broiler. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set aside.
  • Using a sharp chef’s knife, slice the prime rib thinly, making sure to remove any excess fat.
  • Divide the baguette into four equal sections. Slice each section lengthwise, ensuring not to cut completely through, keeping the halves attached.
  • Open the bread and evenly distribute two tablespoons of horseradish sauce (4 tablespoons in total per sandwich) on both interior sides.
  • Layer a few slices of prime rib and one slice of cheese on top. Repeat the same process to assemble the rest of the sandwiches. Transfer them onto the prepared baking sheet.
  • Broil for 2 minutes or until the cheese is melted.
  • Remove from the oven and top each sandwich with fresh arugula or caramelized onion (if using).
  • Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • Serve while they are still warm.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4 sandwiches. The calorie information below is per sandwich.
  • Slicing the prime rib: We find that it is easier to slice meat when it is cold using a sharp knife. This way, you can get equally cut slices based on your desired level of thickness.
  • Horseradish Sauce: We used our horseradish sauce here but you can substitute it with mayo. Alternatively, you can also make horseradish sauce with yogurt for a lighter option. 
  • Warming up the meat: It is optional, but if you prefer, you can warm up the meat. To do so, place half a cup of leftover au jus or beef broth in a small skillet and bring to a simmer. Add the rib roast slices and heat for 2-3 minutes or until warm. Remove the meat slices with tongs and allow the excess liquid to drip off before assembling the sandwiches.
  • Storage: This sandwich is best on the day it is made, but you can store leftovers in the fridge for up to one day. Simply wrap the leftover sandwiches tightly in plastic wrap or keep them in an airtight container before placing them in the fridge.
  • Reheating: To reheat, remove the arugula and wrap the sandwich in foil. Then, reheat sandwiches in a low oven (250 – 300 degrees F) for 10-15 minutes or until warmed to your liking.

Nutrition

Calories: 446kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Cholesterol: 82mg | Sodium: 321mg | Potassium: 474mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 406IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 199mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/prime-rib-sandwich/feed/ 0
Reverse Sear Prime Rib https://foolproofliving.com/reverse-sear-prime-rib/ https://foolproofliving.com/reverse-sear-prime-rib/#comments Sat, 23 Dec 2023 14:02:05 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=72707 Ingredients You’ll Need: This reverse-sear rib roast recipe uses a short list of everyday ingredients you already have on hand.…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from the front.

Why I Swear by the Reverse Sear?

I still remember the first (and last!) time I ruined an expensive prime rib. I followed a recipe I found online that started by cooking the meat in a high-temperature oven, then turned the heat off and finished the rest with the residual heat.

Well, even though it sounded good, I ended up with a raw interior and an overcooked exterior. It was a costly and embarrassing lesson.

Determined to find a reliable method, I discovered the concept of reverse searing, popularized by one of the most curious cooks of our time, Kenji López-Alt. This technique instantly delivered a perfectly roasted rib roast on my first try, so nowadays it’s the only method I trust. 

Here is why the Reverse Sear method is the key to perfect results:

  • Uniformly Cooked Meat (The “No Gray Band” Promise): Unlike traditional methods, our signature low-and-slow approach starts by cooking the entire roast, from center to edge, in a low-temperature oven (250°F/120°C), eliminating the unappetizing gray outer ring most people face.
  • Maximum Control Over Doneness: Cooking low and slow gives you a wide margin of error, reducing the stress of timing. I pull the meat right before it reaches its final temperature, knowing the final high-heat sear will carry it over to perfect doneness.
  • The Perfect Texture and Flavor: Controlled, low-heat cooking allows the beef’s internal fibers to break down slowly, and the fat’s moisture is reabsorbed into the meat, which ensures maximal tenderness and juicy flavor in every slice.

And since I cannot, in good conscience,  publish a recipe without my own creative spin on it, I used my own custom Prime Rib Seasoning to elevate the herb crust and paired it with the easiest 5-Minute Prime Rib Au Jus (you’ll use the roast drippings!).

So, if you are ready to learn how to reverse sear a prime rib and get the perfect results every time, consider this post your ultimate guide. I made sure to cover everything you need to know, from how to buy the right cut of beef to my tested times, temperatures, and serving suggestions for a flawless dinner.

Ingredients You’ll Need:

This reverse-sear rib roast recipe uses a short list of everyday ingredients you already have on hand. You can find the full list of ingredients with exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here you can find some helpful notes from my recipe testing:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Prime Rib

Shopping for this cut can be intimidating (and expensive!), but here is what you need to know to pick the perfect roast:

Don’t let the name confuse you: If you are new to buying prime rib, it might be confusing at first because it goes by other names, such as rib roast, standing rib roast, ribeye roast, or prime rib roast. They are essentially all the same thing.

The Grade (Prime vs. Choice): When you’re shopping for prime rib, look for cuts labeled “prime” or “choice.” Prime is usually more expensive but has more marbling and guarantees the tenderest texture.

Choice is a great option, too, if you want something a little more budget-friendly. I buy my prime rib from Whole Foods or Costco, both of which often carry prime or choice cuts.

Look for heavy marbling: A lot of the flavor in this slow-roasted prime rib recipe comes from its intermuscular fat, also called marbling. This fat melts as the roast cooks, keeping the meat juicy and full of flavor. So, when shopping for it, look for one with plenty of marbling rather than a cut that looks mostly red throughout.

The cost (look for the sale): Prime rib is one of the priciest cuts of beef, usually anywhere from 11 to 20 dollars per pound. The good news is that it often goes on sale around the holidays, which makes it a great option for big seasonal gatherings.

Bone-in vs. boneless roast: When possible, I prefer cooking a whole prime rib, including the bones. Not only does bone-in prime rib look extra fancy, but the bones are also great insulators, helping the beef cook more evenly at both low and high temperatures. The bones also help keep the meat upright in the oven, with the fat cap facing up. However, boneless prime rib would also work for this reverse-sear recipe.

Look for “Frenched” prime ribeye: This refers to the style in which the meat and fat are trimmed from the bottom inch or two of the bone. It gives the roast that elegant, restaurant-style look and makes it much easier to carve later. While you can do this yourself, it requires some serious knife skills. I highly recommend buying it pre-Frenched or asking your butcher to do it for you.

How to Tie a Prime Rib: Tying your prime rib with butcher’s twine is essential to maintain its shape for even cooking and keeping the bones intact throughout the cooking process. You can always ask your butcher to tie it for you, but it’s also simple enough to do at home. Simply:

Person tying a standing rib roast with kitchen twine.
  • Line up your string at the center of your prime rib so that it lies between the innermost bones.
  • Wrap the string around the body of your meat and double-knot it close to the flesh.
  • From there, you can tie 2-4 more strings (depending on the size and weight of your meat), moving outward from the beef’s center until you secure the entire cut in a uniform shape.

Helpful Tip: For this recipe, I used a 7-pound bone-in roast, but you can use any size you like. Just keep in mind that cooking time depends on weight, so be sure to refer to my “Cooking Time Chart” below.

Seasonings

You don’t need to spend extra money or time making a fancy seasoning blend for a rib roast reverse sear. This cut already has such a rich, buttery flavor, so my simple Prime Rib Seasoning is all you need to bring out its natural deliciousness.

Here is what you will need:

Kosher salt: I prefer Diamond kosher salt for its coarse yet delicate texture and mild flavor. If you use Morton kosher salt, which has a more concentrated flavor, I recommend using half the amount to avoid over-salting your beef.

Fresh herbs: Fresh thyme and rosemary help brighten the richness of the meat. If you prefer dried herbs, I suggest using half the amount as they are a little stronger.

Garlic: Garlic powder adds a nice savory boost to the roast. You can use fresh garlic if you prefer, but I find that the powder is easier to spread evenly over the meat. Plus, fresh garlic can burn easily during roasting, especially during the final (high-heat) searing.

Optional Add-Ins

Other seasonings: If you want a hint of smoky spice, you can mix in a little paprika or smoked paprika. Onion powder is another easy add if you want extra savory-sweet depth.

Oil/Ghee: If you prefer a glossier finish or if your roast has a very thin fat cap, you can rub the meat with a neutral oil. However, since we are blasting the roast at 550°F (288 °C) in the end, I recommend using an oil with a high smoke point, such as ghee (clarified butter), avocado oil, or canola oil.

Butter is not ideal for cooking at these high temperatures. If you go in that direction, I recommend using around 4 tablespoons for a 6-7 lb. bone-in prime rib.

Why I Skip the Butter? You might be wondering why I did not slather my roast in butter as many other recipes do. The short answer? I tested it, and honestly, it was just too much.

Don’t get me wrong, I’m usually the first person to say “butter makes everything better.” But prime rib is already the king of rich, fatty cuts. When I added butter during my recipe testing, I found it masked the natural beef flavor and made the final dish feel greasy rather than succulent.

Plus, with the high heat and the natural fat melting off the cap, I think the butter (or any other oil for that matter) was unnecessary.

Equipment You’ll Need

One of the best ways to get perfectly cooked prime rib is to begin with the right equipment. Luckily, you only need a few basic tools to ensure your roasting is as simple as possible:

  • Kitchen Twine: This is a small investment that pays off big time by keeping your meat intact and uniform. I have been using this brand for years; it is sturdy and handles high-heat cooking perfectly.
  • Sheet pan fitted with a wire rack: If possible, I recommend cooking your reverse-sear prime rib on a wire rack set over a sheet pan. The holes in the rack will help circulate hot air, allowing the meat to cook more evenly and letting any drippings from the meat (which will give you a stellar base for making Prime Rib Au Jus later) fall into the pan. You can also roast your prime rib on a baking sheet or a V-rack roasting pan.
  • Meat thermometer: The secret to this method’s success is knowing the exact temperature of the meat, and the best way to do that is with a probe thermometer, which will alert you exactly when the beef reaches your preferred temperature. You can still get good results using an instant-read thermometer following the timing guide I share in the temperature chart below.

How To Reverse Sear a Prime Rib

There is something so comforting about knowing that a truly foolproof method will yield great results even on your first try.

Follow the simple steps below to take all the guesswork out of making a standing prime rib roast and treat your family and friends to a restaurant-quality prime rib that is perfectly juicy, tender, and cooked to perfection from edge to edge.

Person showing how to prepare prime  rib for reverse searing in a collage of images.

Step 1 – Dry brine the prime rib: One day before cooking, place a wire rack on a sheet pan and place your meat on top. Use a paper towel to dry the meat on all sides, then sprinkle two tablespoons of kosher salt over its entire surface, firmly pressing it into the flesh to help it adhere.

Transfer the salted prime rib to the refrigerator and let it sit, uncovered, at least overnight or up to 48 hours.

Short on time? If you can plan ahead, I highly recommend the longer overnight dry brining. However, I tested this recipe with only an hour of sitting in the fridge after it was salted, and it worked well.

Step 2 – Remove the prime rib from the fridge: Two hours before roasting, remove the meat from the refrigerator and let it come to room temperature. Dry the excess moisture with paper towels right before coating it with the spice rub.

A collage of images showing how to season a prime rib roast before reverse searing it.

Step 3 – Make the seasoning: While the rib roast warms up, add the black pepper, rosemary, thyme, and garlic powder to a small bowl. Mix the spices until thoroughly combined.

Step 4 – Prepare the oven: Preheat the oven to 250°F (120°C).

Step 5 – Season the meat: Rub the prime rib with the seasoning mixture, making sure it covers all sides. Firmly press the seasoning into the meat so it adheres, then place the rib roast on the wire rack with its fat side (fat cap) facing up.

If you are using a thermometer with a probe, insert it lengthwise into the center of your beef, avoiding the bones.

A collage of images showing how to slow cook a ribeye roast in the oven using the reverse searing method.

Step 6 – Cook the prime rib low and slow: Transfer the beef to the oven and roast it for 3 to 3½ hours or until it reaches your desired doneness. Use the roast time chart below to help you choose the right cook time for your preferred level of doneness.

Pro Tip: I recommend roasting it 5-10°F degrees below your preferred doneness, as the meat will continue to cook once you remove it from the oven due to carry-over cooking. For a medium-rare prime rib, I recommend roasting it until it reaches 115°F (46°C).

Step 7 – Let the meat rest: When ready, remove the prime rib from the oven and tent it loosely with aluminum foil. Let the beef rest on the counter for 30 minutes (up to 45 minutes).

Step 8 – Heat the oven: Increase the oven’s temperature to 550°F (288°C) while the meat rests. If you want, this is also a great time to make the Au Jus for Prime Rib.

Step 9 – Oven sear the prime rib: Add the rested rib roast to the preheated oven and let it roast for five minutes or until a nice crust forms.

Pro Tip: Watch the meat closely! At that high temperature, things happen fast, so it is imperative that you keep a close eye on it to avoid burning the exterior of the meat.

Step 10 – Serve: Once the cooking time finishes, you can enjoy your reverse sear rib roast immediately, as there’s no need to let it rest first. To carve, cut the meat off the bone by following the curve of the rib and slicing against the grain, cutting the beef into your desired thickness. 

Reverse seared prime rib sliced from the top view.

Reverse Sear Prime Rib Temperature Chart

Learning how long to cook a standing rib roast is the key to getting the most tender, delicious roast with an edge-to-edge pink center.

The simple chart below walks you through each level of doneness and shows you the temperature to pull the roast from the oven, along with the final temperature it will reach as it rests.

The “Carry-Over” Factor: It’s also important to know that prime rib will continue to cook after you remove it from the oven, increasing its internal temperature by 5 to 10°F (3 to 6°C) while resting.

For example, if you want a perfect medium-rare prime rib, remove your beef from the oven when it reaches an internal temperature of 115°F (46°C). While resting, the meat’s temperature will rise to 125 to 130°F (52 to 54°C), yielding a juicy, pink center after the final roasting.

Doneness Level of Prime RibInternal Temperature (When Removed From the Oven)Final Temperature
Rare110°F (43°C)120°F (49°C)
Medium-Rare (recommended)115°F (46°C)125°F (52°C) to 130°F (54°C)
Medium120°F (49°C)130°F (54°C) to 135°F (57°C)
Medium-Well130°F (54°C)140°F (60°C) to 145°F (63°C)
Well done140°F (60°C)150°F (66°C) to 155°F (69°C)

My recommendation: For the tenderest results, I highly recommend staying in the Medium-Rare to Medium range. Cooking beyond 145°F can toughen the meat.

How Long to Reverse Sear Prime Rib? (Cooking Time Per Pound Chart at 250°F (120°C))

One of the most challenging parts of cooking prime rib is knowing how long to cook it. To ease any stress, I’ve created a simple guide to help you estimate your cooking time, whether you’re cooking a large or small prime rib.

The General Rule of Thumb: Plan for approximately 25 to 30 minutes per pound at 250°F.

Keep in mind, however, that these are only approximate times. How long you roast your beef may change depending on your desired level of doneness and the temperature of your meat before putting it in the oven. 

Pro Tip: The temperature of the meat before placing it in the oven is often overlooked. You never want to put prime rib in the oven right after taking it out of the fridge when it is very cold.

The cooking times below assume you take your prime rib out of the refrigerator 2 hours before putting it in the oven.

WeightCooking Time
4-5 lbs.2½ – 3 hours
6-7 lbs.3 – 3½ hours
8-9 lbs.4 – 4½ hours
10-12 lbs.5 hours
A slice of reverse seared standing rib roast served with mashed potatoes and green beans.

What to Serve with Prime Rib

Making reverse sear prime rib in the oven is one of the easiest ways to impress your guests with tender, perfectly cooked beef. 

How much prime rib per person?

As a general rule, plan for about 1 pound of bone in rib roast per person. If you are using a boneless ribeye roast, you can scale it down to about ¾ pound per person.

Once your roast is ready, you can round out the meal with a few simple sides and sauces. 

  • Sauces: Reverse cooking prime rib ensures that your meat is so delicious that it doesn’t need any additions to impress your guests. However, you can still enhance its flavors by drizzling your sliced prime rib with a creamy Horseradish Sauce or Prime Rib Au Jus. If you prefer a smoother, richer topping, you can also prepare a Roasted Garlic Butter or a simple Beef Gravy for extra creaminess.
  • Vegetable side dishes: You can’t go wrong with a classic when planning a menu around reverse sear bone in prime rib. My Garlic Butter Green Beans will brighten up your plate with a tender-crisp flavor, and for a sweeter take on traditional veggie sides, my Maple Roasted Carrots have a soft, caramelized taste that balances the savoriness of roasted beef.
  • Potatoes: If you are making this for a holiday dinner like Christmas or New Year’s, no table feels complete without potatoes. Whether mashed, roasted, or baked until crisp and golden, they pair beautifully with prime rib. My personal favorite pairing is my creamy Garlic Rosemary Mashed Potatoes. Check out my Holiday Potato Recipes to find your perfect match.

Notes From My Recipe Testing

Even though this recipe is simple, a few helpful tips can make a big difference. These are the steps I always follow to make sure the reverse sear prime rib turns out perfectly every time, especially if you are making it for the first time.

  • Bones + Tying = Even Cooking: Yes, you can make this recipe with either bone-in or boneless prime rib. However, if I were to choose, I would go with bone-in prime rib. Not only do bones act as a heat shield, but when tied with kitchen twine, they also help ensure even roasting and maintain the shape of the roast.
  • Salt the night before: The best dry brine for prime rib comes together with a single, simple ingredient: kosher salt. Put simply, it pulls moisture from the surface, guaranteeing a perfectly browned exterior. Though I recommend salting the exterior of your beef 24-48 hours before cooking, if you’re short on time, you can let it sit for at least one hour.
  • Don’t skip resting in the middle: Let your rib-eye roast rest for 30 minutes after first removing it from the oven. This resting time will allow the meat to reabsorb and redistribute its juices. Additionally, this resting time is the reason why you can carve the meat without having to wait.
  • Ventilation is key: When you expose meat to high temperatures, it can burn quickly, especially with such a thick layer of fat on its top. Therefore, you must stay close to your oven during this step to keep your beef from charring. Additionally, since we are roasting a large piece of meat at a very high temperature, there will be some smoke, so it is best to ensure your kitchen is properly ventilated.
  • Leave the probe in: If you are using a thermometer with a probe, insert it lengthwise through the center of your beef, avoiding the bones. Also, don’t remove the probe from the meat until just before serving. Otherwise, the juices may run out of the hole, draining your rib roast of its flavor and juiciness.
  • Slice against the grain: When slicing the meat, draw your blade along the bone, carving against the grain to your desired thickness. This direction will shorten the meat fibers, yielding more tender portions that are easier to cut and chew.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Reverse sear prime rib roast being sliced from the front view.
Print

Reverse Sear Prime Rib Recipe

Learn how to Reverse Sear Prime Rib to get an evenly cooked interior and a perfectly browned crust. Slow-roasting standing rib roast using this low and slow cooking method produces better control over doneness, resulting in a perfectly cooked prime rib at your preferred doneness level.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 4 hours
Resting time 1 day
Total Time 1 day 4 hours 15 minutes
Servings 8 people
Calories 1189kcal

Ingredients

  • 7 pound bone-in prime rib silver skin and any excess fat removed, tied*
  • 2 tablespoons kosher salt*
  • 1 tablespoon black pepper coarsely ground
  • 1 tablespoon fresh rosemary finely chopped
  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme finely chopped
  • 2 teaspoons garlic powder

Instructions

  • A day before you are planning to cook your prime rib, place a wire rack on a sheet pan. Place the meat on top and dry it on all sides using paper towels. Sprinkle 2 tablespoons of kosher salt over the entire rib roast, firmly pressing to adhere.
  • Place it in the fridge, uncovered, overnight, or for up to 48 hours*.
  • Two hours prior to roasting, remove your prime rib from the fridge and let it come to room temperature.
  • Meanwhile, prepare the prime rib seasoning by mixing together the black pepper, rosemary, thyme, and garlic powder in a small bowl. Mix until fully combined.
  • Preheat the oven to 250 degrees F (121°C)
  • Dry the prime rib thoroughly with paper towels on all sides. Rub it with the prepared seasoning mixture on all sides, pressing down firmly to ensure that it adheres to the meat. Ensure that the meat is on the wire rack with the fat side (aka fat cap) up.
  • Slow roast the beef in the oven for 3 to 3 ½ hours until it reaches your desired doneness. It is best to use a meat thermometer (*please read the note below for more information) for foolproof results. We recommend cooking it until it reaches 115 degrees F (46 °C) for medium rare. Keep in mind that it will continue to cook after you remove it from the oven with the help of carry-over cooking.
  • Remove the standing rib roast from the oven, tent it loosely with foil, and let it rest for 30 minutes (and no more than 45 minutes) on the counter.
  • While the meat is resting, turn the oven temperature up to 550 degrees F. (288 °C) If preferred, make prime rib au jus while the prime rib is resting.
  • Transfer the meat to the now-preheated oven and let it roast for 5 minutes or until a nice crust is formed. We recommend keeping a close eye on it during this time to avoid burning the crust of the meat.
  • Once the cooking time is completed, you can enjoy it right away. There is no need to let it rest. To carve, cut the meat off the bone using a serrated (or a very sharp) knife, following the curve of the rib and slicing against the grain to your desired thickness. Serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yield & Serving Size: We found that a 7-pound (3175 g.)uncooked bone-in prime rib weighed about 4 1/2 pounds (2041 g.) after it was cooked (and the bone was removed). It gave us about eight 1/2-inch slices of prime rib per serving, with each slice weighing about ~ 9 ounces (227 g.)
  • Tying: If the butcher does not already tie your meat, you can easily do it yourself. Simply line up your string at the center of your prime rib so that it lies between the innermost bones. Then, wrap the string around the body of your meat and double-knot it close to the flesh. From there, you can tie 2-4 more strings (depending on the size and weight of your ribeye roast), moving outward from the beef’s center until you secure the entire cut in a uniform shape.
  • Short on time? While I recommend a longer dry brining, I have tested this recipe with only an hour of salting and it still worked well. 
  • Salt: We used Diamond kosher salt in this recipe. If you are using Morton kosher salt, use half the amount.
  • Herbs: You can also use dried herbs, but if you decide to do so, we recommend using 1 1/2 teaspoons of the dried version (of each herb.)
  • Placement of the probe: If you are using a meat thermometer with a probe, insert it into the center of the roast (the thickest part of the meat) lengthwise, approaching from the side, ensuring that it doesn’t hit any of the bones. Do not remove it until you are ready to carve the meat so that the juices will stay in the meat. If you do not own one, you can check the temperature using a meat thermometer periodically.
  • Store: Let the meat come down to room temperature. Once cooled, store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat sliced prime rib, place it in a low-temperature oven (about 300 degrees F.) until warmed through. The heating process should take around 5-7 minutes, though the timing will vary depending on the thickness of your slices and how you like the doneness of your prime rib. No matter your personal preference, be sure to keep a close eye on your meat, as the heating process happens quickly.
  • Freeze: We highly recommend freezing without slicing the beef to protect against freezer burn and retain as much juice as possible. To do so, bring your meat to room temperature and wrap it tightly in plastic wrap as further protection against freezer damage. You can then store your wrapped meat in the freezer for up to a month and thaw it in the fridge overnight when ready to eat.
  • Using oil or butter: I opted not to use any oil because my prime rib already had a fat cap on top. However, if you want a glossier finish, I recommend using an oil with a high smoke point, such as ghee (clarified butter) or avocado oil. Butter will burn during the high heat, 550°F searing.

Nutrition

Calories: 1189kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 54g | Fat: 106g | Saturated Fat: 44g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 46g | Cholesterol: 240mg | Sodium: 1922mg | Potassium: 903mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 0.02g | Vitamin A: 53IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 39mg | Iron: 6mg

FAQs

When is the best time to season prime rib?

For the most tender and flavorful roast, start by dry brining the meat with kosher salt for 12 to 48 hours before cooking. Then add the rest of your seasoning right before you put it in the oven.

Do you cover prime rib when cooking? 

No. With the reverse sear method, the roast cooks low and slow, so it stays juicy without burning. There is no need to cover it, as it could trap steam and keep the heat from circulating properly.

Can you make prime rib ahead of time? 

Technically, you can cook prime rib ahead of time, but I don’t recommend it. This roast tastes its best the day it is made. Simply salt the beef 24 to 48 hours before cooking. On the day you plan to serve, add the seasoning and start roasting a few hours before serving.

How to Store, Reheat, and Freeze?

One of the best parts of making prime rib is how simple it is to store and reheat. With a few easy tips, your leftovers stay tender and juicy, whether you are enjoying a second round of your holiday dinner or turning the meat into a Leftover Prime Rib sandwich, a quick stir-fry, or a stew.

How to store: When storing prime rib, first let it come down to room temperature. Once cooled, store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.

Reheat: To reheat sliced prime rib, place it in a baking dish with a splash of Au Jus or beef broth (to keep it moist), cover it with foil, and warm it in a low-temperature oven at 300°F (150°C).

It should take about 5-7 minutes, though the timing will vary depending on the thickness of your slices and how you like your prime rib done. Keep a close eye on it, as it reheats quickly.

Freeze: If you want to freeze your prime rib for future use, I highly recommend freezing it without slicing the beef to prevent freezer burn and retain as much juice as possible.

To do this, let your prime rib come to room temperature after cooking, and wrap it tightly in plastic wrap as further protection against freezer damage. You can then store your wrapped meat in the freezer for up to a month and thaw it in the fridge overnight before eating.

More Holiday Beef Recipes You Might Also Like

I don’t know about you, but I am always looking for special occasion dinners that I can trust. Below are a few more recipes that I stand behind.

  • If you want something just as elegant, my Reverse Sear Beef Tenderloin is a beautiful option. It follows the same cooking method to cook yet another popular cut, beef tenderloin.
  • For a restaurant-quality steak at home, try my Reverse Sear Filet Mignon. This recipe is ideal if you want a dish that is quick to make but just as impressive.
  • If you are craving cozy comfort food, Ina Garten’s Pot Roast is a classic. My step-by-step guide includes her original version plus slow cooker and pressure cooker options, so you can pick the method that works best for you.

This post includes Amazon links and as an Amazon Associate I may earn commissions if you make a purchase using my links at no cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/reverse-sear-prime-rib/feed/ 10
Prime Rib Au Jus https://foolproofliving.com/prime-rib-au-jus/ https://foolproofliving.com/prime-rib-au-jus/#comments Sat, 23 Dec 2023 13:49:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=72726 It’s no wonder why red wine au jus is a staple in fancy steak restaurants. This classic, incredibly delicious sauce…]]>

It’s no wonder why red wine au jus is a staple in fancy steak restaurants. This classic, incredibly delicious sauce comes from a mixture of meat juices, red wine, and seasonings, making it the ultimate pairing with dozens of meats. While you might be used to seeing this savory side at your favorite steak houses (I’m looking at you, Outback and Texas Roadhouse!), this super-easy recipe will teach you how to bring the same five-star flavors to your home.

Prime Rib Au jus being drizzled on a slice of prime rib.

Au Jus Ingredients

Making au jus for prime rib is an easy way to add delicious layers of juicy, beefy flavor to your scrumptious main. With three simple ingredients, you won’t have to spend extra time or money preparing this must-have taste enhancer.

  • Beef broth or beef stock: You can use either beef broth or beef stock in this rib roast au jus sauce recipe. I prefer beef broth, as it has a less overpowering, concentrated flavor that better balances the richness of the pan drippings. However, if you decide to use beef broth, try to purchase a low-sodium variety to avoid oversalting your sauce.
  • Worcestershire sauce: This pantry staple is essential to giving your standing rib roast au jus delectable umami flavors.
  • Red wine: Though the classic au jus recipe uses red wine to get its crisp, acidic flavors, this ingredient is optional. If you want to make this au jus recipe without wine, simply add the equivalent amount of beef broth to your mixture. However, if you do use red wine, be sure not to use cooking wine. Cooking wine tends to be of lesser quality, filled with preservatives and extra salt that may negatively affect your recipe’s flavor profile. Instead, I suggest using a French red drinking wine, such as Cabernet Sauvignon or Pinot Noir.
  • Seasonings: Because beef drippings already pack a ton of meaty, flavorsome taste, all you need to season your prime rib roast au jus is a simple mix of salt and pepper.
  • Pan drippings: If you’re making prime rib, I highly recommend adding the drippings deposited in your roasting pan to your au jus, giving it a hearty, beefy finish. Remember, too, that straining your drippings is optional for this recipe. I prefer not to strain my pan drippings for an extra deep taste and thicker texture (thanks to the generous coating of my Prime Rib Rub), but you can strain yours if you want a clear au jus. Furthermore, you can also make this prime rib au jus without drippings, though it will have a less full-bodied flavor profile.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Optional Add-Ins

These tasty additions are guaranteed to add delectable notes of bright, robust flavors to your prime rib au jus sauce recipe. Whatever you add, however, be sure to strain your mix before serving.

  • A sprig of rosemary or thyme: Floral, fragrant, and bright, these fresh herbs add a light finish to rib roast jus, perfectly balancing its heartier base.
  • A few cloves of smashed garlic while simmering: If you want to give your au jus bold, savory-sweet undertones, add a few cloves of smashed garlic to your sauce while it simmers. The heat will help develop its depth of flavor, more thoroughly infusing the recipe with garlicky flavors. 

How to Make Au Jus for Prime Rib?

Making au jus from prime rib is an easy way to bring your gourmet meal to the next level—in just three steps! Not to mention, it is a great way to use the leftover prime rib drippings!

A collage of images showing how to make the recipe.
  1. Place the ingredients in a saucepan: Add the pan drippings, beef broth, red wine, Worcestershire sauce, kosher salt, and black pepper to a saucepan, and set the burner to medium heat.
  2. Simmer: Let the mixture simmer until you’re ready to serve your prime rib.
  3. Serve: Taste the au jus for seasoning, add more if necessary, and transfer the sauce to a pitcher. Serve alongside your prime rib, and enjoy!

How to Store, Freeze, and Thaw?

Once you make this homemade au jus for prime rib, you’ll want to use it in all your favorite meat recipes. These expert storage tips will ensure you can keep your sauce as fresh and flavorful as possible, no matter how (or when!) you want to use it.

  • Store: Store your prime rib jus in an airtight container, such as a jar, in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Freeze: To freeze this delicious au jus recipe, bring it to room temperature. Then, transfer it to a freezer-safe container or jar, or pour it into an ice cube tray for easy future use. However, if you use a jar, leave a few inches at the top to accommodate any expansion, especially as a top layer forms over the sauce. You can then store your au jus in the freezer until ready to use.
  • Thaw: When ready to thaw your leftover au jus, place it in the refrigerator overnight. Then, reheat it in the microwave or stovetop before using.

How to Use Prime Rib Au Jus Sauce in Your Daily Cooking?

Though this recipe shows you how to make au jus for a rib roast, this tasty dish has countless other delectable uses. Use this savory sauce in anything from warming stews to tasty braising liquid, and you’ll enjoy top-notch dishes every night of the week. Below are a few ideas to get you started:

  • Dipping sauce: The most popular way to enjoy this flavorful sauce is to use it as an au jus dipping sauce for prime rib, beef tenderloin, and other beef dishes. This tantalizing pair will ensure every bite has maximal moisture and flavor.
  • Drizzle over meat for extra moisture or flavor: If you’re on the hunt for the juiciest, most flavorful meat, au jus is precisely what you need. Drizzle your steak, filet mignon, or prime rib with au jus sauce, and every bite will come to life with succulence and hearty taste.
  • Sandwiches: Not only does this recipe make a great addition to various meat-based mains, but it also makes an incomparable dip for your go-to sandwiches. You’ll get dozens of compliments when you serve this gourmet sauce alongside everything from delicious Leftover Rib Roast Sandwiches to tender French dip sandwiches to gooey Philly cheesesteaks or even Chicago-style Italian beef.
  • Mashed potatoes: You don’t need to prepare a fresh batch of gravy to enliven your mashed potato recipe. Instead, pour some meaty au jus on top of your fluffy potatoes, and you won’t be able to resist a second helping.
  • Cooking or braising liquid: Infused with bold, meaty flavor, this prime rib jus recipe is a no-brainer when preparing an equally flavorful, all-purpose cooking liquid. Use it to braise protein-packed meats or cook your favorite vegetables; every forkful will astound you with its ample flavor.
  • Soups and stews: If you want a hassle-free solution for bland soup recipes, au jus is your answer! Pour some of this mouthwatering blend into your savory soup or stew recipes—especially beef-based ones!—and you’ll be spooning even more into your bowl in no time.
Au jus for prime rib in a glass pitcher.

Expert Tips

There’s no need to stress over this easy au jus for prime rib. These helpful tips will ensure your savory mixture tastes delicious with any meaty meal, whether you prepare prime ribeye roast for special occasions or roast beef sandwiches for a weekday lunch.

  • Pan drippings: When you make au jus from prime rib drippings, it’s up to you whether or not you want to strain your pan drippings before adding them to your au jus mixture. I usually use un-strained drippings, as the thicker bits add extra flavor to the juice. Still, you may strain your drippings if you prefer a clearer sauce.
  • A word on reducing: It’s important to let your ribeye au jus simmer a bit to help the flavors fully develop, concentrate, and blend during the cooking process. However, be careful not to over-simmer the mixture. Otherwise, the sauce will become too intense as it reduces, giving it an unpleasantly overpowering taste.
  • Seasoning: The best au jus sauce for prime rib is one that has an ideal amount of seasoning. Therefore, it’s essential that you taste your beef sauce before serving and add additional seasoning if necessary.
  • Fat content: While preparing your au jus sauce for prime rib, you may find that the mixture produces too much fat for your liking—especially when the drippings come from your prime rib’s fat cap. If your simmered liquid has too much, feel free to skim the top to eliminate excess fat.
  • Ideal consistency: A classic French au jus sauce is very liquidy, making it the perfect addition to hearty beef mains, whether drizzled on top or served as a dipping sauce. While it is not traditional, if you prefer a more creamy au jus sauce, you can mix a tablespoon (or more – depending on the consistency you are after) of cornstarch with some of the liquid and make a cornstarch slurry. Then you can pour it into the au jus sauce and mix until combined and reached a creamer consistency.

FAQs

What is au jus?

French for “with the juice,” this iconic recipe is a savory, light sauce made from cooked meat juices, broth, and a few seasonings. Most often, people serve au jus as a sauce or drizzle to enhance the juiciness and flavor of beef dishes.

What is au jus sauce made of?

Au jus comes together with a basic mixture of meat drippings, broth or stock, red wine, and Worcestershire sauce, simmered over medium heat until ready to serve.

Can you freeze au jus?

Yes! Freezing au jus is a great way to simplify future meal prep and eliminate kitchen waste. Just be sure to let the sauce come to room temperature before transferring it to an airtight jar or ice cube tray, and leave some room at the top of your jar to accommodate expansion during storage.

What is the difference between brown gravy and au jus?

Though both are rich, meat-based sauces, gravy is much thicker, using butter, cornstarch, and/or all-purpose flour to create a creamier texture. Brown gravy also uses more seasonings to achieve its full-bodied taste, sometimes adding ingredients like garlic or onions to fill out its profile. By contrast, au jus is a thinner, more natural blend of ingredients, getting its buttery, savory flavor from the natural juices that melt off of cooked meats—especially prime rib. Instead of adding extra thickeners, au jus uses a blend of red wine and Worcestershire sauce as its primary flavor additives.

If you try this Prime Rib Au Jus recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Prime rib with au jus sauce being drizzled.
Print

Prime Rib Au Jus Recipe

Prime rib au jus sauce is the perfect condiment to serve along with any prime rib recipe. Easy and quick to make, this simple recipe delivers big results with minimal effort.
Course Condiment – Dip, Condiment/Sauce
Cuisine American/French
Diet Kosher
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 2 cups
Calories 71kcal

Ingredients

  • Pan drippings
  • 1 ½ cups beef broth
  • ½ cup red wine such as Cabernet Sauvignon or Pinot Noir
  • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Place the pan drippings, beef broth, red wine, Worcestershire sauce, kosher salt, and pepper in a small saucepan over medium heat.
  • Once it comes to a boil, turn it down to low heat and let it simmer until you are ready to serve it with your prime rib.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in more, if necessary. Transfer the au jus to a pitcher for easy serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 2 cups plus a few tablespoons of au jus. It is ideal for serving with a 7-pound prime rib, which serves 8 people. The calorie information below is per cup.
  • Pan drippings: The pan drippings of our Reverse Seared Prime Rib recipe were about 3 tablespoons. We prefer not to strain it as we enjoy the bits and pieces coming from the bottom of the pan (thanks to a generous coating of our Prime Rib Seasoning), but if you prefer a clear au jus, feel free to strain the juices prior to adding to the pan.
  • Without wine: If you prefer to make this recipe using no wine, use an equal amount of beef broth instead.
  • Without drippings: If you do not have any drippings, simply omit them. It won’t be as flavorful, but it will still be good.
  • Storage:  Store your prime rib jus in an airtight container, such as a jar, in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Freeze: To freeze, bring it to room temperature. Then, transfer it to a freezer-safe container or jar, or pour it into an ice cube tray for easy future use. However, if you use a jar, leave a few inches at the top to accommodate any expansion, especially as a top layer forms over the sauce. You can then store it in the freezer until ready to use.
  • Thaw: When ready to thaw your leftover au jus, place it in the refrigerator overnight. Then, reheat it in the microwave or stovetop before using.

Nutrition

Calories: 71kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.4g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.02g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 1364mg | Potassium: 245mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 9IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 26mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/prime-rib-au-jus/feed/ 2
Prime Rib Seasoning https://foolproofliving.com/prime-rib-seasoning/ https://foolproofliving.com/prime-rib-seasoning/#comments Sat, 23 Dec 2023 13:40:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=72734 Prime Rib Seasoning Ingredients Before you start mixing your seasoning, here’s a quick look at what goes into this seasoning…]]>
Aysegul

Prime rib is one of those cuts I only cook a few times a year, usually for Christmas dinner or Easter lunch. Let’s be real, it is a very expensive piece of meat, so there isn’t much room for mistakes.

For years, I relied on store-bought seasonings, but most were either too sweet or had long ingredient lists that took over instead of supporting the meat.

So I started testing my own blend using basic ingredients I already had on hand. I kept adjusting the ratio until the herbs added gentle warmth, the garlic complemented the meat, and the salt brought everything together. I think these 5 ingredients are more than enough, but I also included optional add-ins in case you want to make it your own.

Whether you season the roast a day or two ahead or prepare everything the same day, this has become the mix I reach for. And you can stir it together faster than it takes to find a seasoning at the store.

Another bonus? As the meat cooks, this blend seasons the pan drippings perfectly, giving you a head start on a rich Prime Rib Au Jus you can make in minutes.

Prime Rib Seasoning Ingredients

Before you start mixing your seasoning, here’s a quick look at what goes into this seasoning for prime rib roast and a few easy substitutions if you need them:

Ingredients for prime rib rub from the top view.

Kosher salt: I prefer Diamond Crystal because its larger flakes make it easier to control the seasoning. If you are using Morton Kosher Salt, use half the amount since the grains are denser and saltier.

Pro tip: If you are dry-brining your roast ahead of time (meaning you are pre-salting your meat 24-48 hours prior to cooking), omit the salt from this rub. Adding it twice would over-season the meat.

Black pepper: While both work, I highly recommend using coarse black pepper over fine black pepper, which will give you that classic steakhouse crust and holds up well during long roasting times.

Rosemary: I usually use dried rosemary for convenience, but fresh works too. If you use fresh rosemary, use twice as much as dried. Regardless of which one you use, be sure to chop it finely so you don’t end up with needle-like pieces.

Thyme: Similar to rosemary, I opted for dried thyme, but if you have fresh thyme, that would work too. If using fresh, double the amount.

Garlic powder: I opted for garlic powder as it can handle high heat, whereas fresh garlic tends to burn and turn bitter during high-heat roasting.

Optional Prime Rib Seasoning Variations

My approach to this prime rib seasoning recipe is to keep it simple, as it already has a naturally rich flavor. However, you can experiment with different spices and seasonings to achieve a different flavor profile.

If you decide to use one (or more) of the prime rib spices below, I recommend starting with a small amount (no more than ½ teaspoon to a teaspoon) and adding more as needed so you don’t overseason your meat.

  • Onion powder: Onion powder is a bold addition that can immediately satisfy anyone who loves a robust flavor profile. 
  • Paprika: Paprika adds a warm, subtle smokiness to the rub. You can use regular or smoked paprika, whichever you prefer.
  • Red pepper flakes: If you want a little heat, add a pinch. It gives the rub a subtle kick without overpowering the meat.
  • Brown sugar: A small amount of brown sugar helps with caramelization, helping create that dark, crisp crust.Though please keep in mind that a little bit of sugar goes a long way.
  • Oil: If you choose to make a wet rub, I recommend using an oil with a high smoking point, such as avocado oil, olive oil, or ghee, to avoid burning. I would recommend using 4-5 tablespoons of oil for a 7-pound prime rib.
  • Dijon mustard: Even a small amount of Dijon adds a light tang and helps the seasoning stick to the roast. It gives the beef a subtle sharpness without overpowering the other flavors.

When To Season Your Prime Rib? Dry Brining vs Immediate Seasoning

Before we get to the instructions, I want to clarify something crucial regarding when you plan to season your roast, as this determines how you mix the spices. The best time to season prime rib depends on how much time you have. 

However, both methods would work whether you are roasting, reverse searing, or smoking your prime rib.

You have two options:

Option 1: Dry Brining (Plan Ahead) – Recommended: 

This is when you salt your meat 24-48 hours before cooking (which I use in my Reverse Sear Prime Rib recipe). I prefer this method because salting such a large cut early helps draw out moisture, dries the surface, and gives the salt enough time to permeate deep into the meat. To me, this is the secret to a perfectly seasoned prime rib.

How to do it: If you go this route, do not add salt to the seasoning mix below. Instead, salt your meat now and let it rest in the fridge for 24 to 48 hours. Mix the remaining ingredients and apply them to the rested meat right before cooking.

Option 2: Immediate Seasoning (Cook Today): 

This is when you are short on time, and you plan to cook your prime rib today. 
How to do it: Simply add the salt to the spice mix as written below and season your meat generously right before cooking.

How to Make Prime Rib Seasoning

Once you decide on your timing, putting it together takes a few minutes. Think of this prime rib seasoning blend as your base mix for any standing rib roast you make.

The steps are simple, but a few small details make a big difference in how evenly the seasoning sticks and how your crust turns out. Here is how I make it:

A collage of images showing how to make prime rib seasoning.

Step 1 – Mix all dry ingredients: Start by adding the kosher salt (if immediately seasoning), black pepper, rosemary, thyme, and garlic powder to a small bowl. Try to break up any lumps that you see. I like using a spoon or a small whisk.

Pro Tip: If you are using fresh, finely chopped herbs instead of dried, rub them gently between your fingers as you add them. This helps release their natural oils and gives the rub more aroma.

Step 2 – Rub onto roast or store for later: At this point, you can go in two directions:

  1. Using it right away: Pat your prime rib dry with paper towels so the surface is not wet. This helps the rub stick better and gives you a nicer crust. Before seasoning, let the roast sit at room temperature for 45 to 60 minutes to help it cook more evenly from edge to edge.
    How To Do It: Sprinkle the seasoning all over the roast, including the sides and any crevices, and use your hands to gently press it in. Once it’s seasoned, place it on a roasting pan with a rack and proceed with your preferred cooking method. 
  2. Saving it for later: If you are prepping ahead, transfer the seasoning to a small jar with a tight-fitting lid. Store it in a cool, dry place. It will keep well for several weeks, which makes it easy to have the seasonings you need for your next prime rib roast ready, whether you are making it for the holidays or a special dinner.
    How To Do It: Before you cook, give the jar a quick shake in case any of the spices have settled. Then use it just as you would a store-bought seasoning.
Seasoned prime rib from the front view.

How Much Prime Rib Seasoning You Need (Per Pound Guide)

The amount of seasoning you need depends on the size of your roast. A good rule of thumb is to use about ½ to 1 tablespoon of seasoning per pound of meat. However, if your roast has a thicker fat cap, I recommend leaning towards the higher end of the range.

My recipe here makes 4 tablespoons of seasoning, for reference.

Here is a quick table you can follow when measuring out your rub:

Roast WeightSeasoning Needed
5 lb / 2.26kg3 Tbsp
6–7 lb / 2.72kg – 3.18kg4 Tbsp
8–10 lb /3.63kg – 4.54kg5–6 Tbsp

Expert Tips for Best Results

Having been making this recipe for several years now, I’ve learned a couple of tricks that make a big difference in how your seasoning sticks, how your crust turns out, and how evenly your roast cooks.

Dry the roast well: Before you season it, pat it dry with paper towels. A dry surface helps the rub cling to the meat and gives you a better crust. If the roast is a little wet, the seasoning can slide off.

Know the best time to salt your meat: Some recipes call for a dry brine 24 to 48 hours ahead, while others season right before cooking. Know which method you will be following to prevent over-salting the meat.

Evenly distribute it on all sides: Make sure you coat every part of the roast, including the fat cap and the sides. Since prime rib is thick, seasoning only the top will not give you the full flavor you want in each slice.

Homemade prime rib rub seasoning sprinkled over meat.
Print

Prime Rib Seasoning Recipe

Quick and easy to make, this prime rib seasoning is the perfect coating for your prime rib. Thanks to this spice mix, you end up with the perfect crust and super flavorful pan drippings.
Course Condiment
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 tablespoons
Calories 10kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoons of kosher salt*
  • 1 tablespoon black pepper coarsely ground
  • 1 ½ teaspoons dried thyme or 1 tablespoon fresh thyme (chopped)
  • 1 ½ teaspoons dried rosemary or 1 tablespoon fresh rosemary (chopped)
  • 2 teaspoons garlic powder

Instructions

  • Mix together the salt*, black pepper, dried thyme, dried rosemary, and garlic powder in a small bowl. Mix until combined.
  • Spread the spice mixture evenly on your seasoned prime rib before cooking. Alternatively, you can store the mixture in a jar and store it until you are ready to use it.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4 tablespoons of prime rib seasoning (including the salt), enough for a 7-pound prime rib roast. You can multiply the recipe if you are cooking a larger roast.
  • Kosher Salt: We used Diamond kosher salt in this recipe. If you are using Morton kosher salt, please use half the amount. 
  • Read your prime rib recipe fully before preparing this spice mix: Before making and using this spice mixture, be sure to check the recipe you are using, as some prime rib recipes (such as our Reverse Sear Prime Rib recipe) suggest dry brining the meat 24 hours before cooking and letting it sit in the fridge. If that is the case, use the salt for dry-brining your meat, and then spread the rest of the mixture over it right before cooking.
  • Make it a wet rub: If you choose to make a wet rub, I recommend using an oil with a high smoking point, such as avocado oil, olive oil, or ghee, to avoid burning. I would recommend using 4-5 tablespoons of oil for a 7-pound prime rib. Additionally, you can add a teaspoon (or two) of Dijon mustard for a tangy flavor.
  • Storage: This spice mix will store well in a small jar for up to 2 months if you use dried herbs. If you use fresh herbs, it should be used within 2-3 days of making it.

Nutrition

Calories: 10kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 0.4g | Fat: 0.1g | Saturated Fat: 0.04g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.02g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.02g | Sodium: 3490mg | Potassium: 42mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 24IU | Vitamin C: 0.2mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 1mg

How to Store Prime Rib Seasoning

Having rib roast seasoning ready to go is one of the easiest ways to stay ahead during the holidays or prep for a simple weeknight roast. How you store it depends on whether you made a dry mix or a wet version:

  • Storing a dry rub: If you made the seasoning with only dry ingredients, place it in an airtight glass jar and keep it in a cool, dark spot in your pantry. It will stay fresh for up to 2 months.
    Dry spices last longer because there is no moisture to cause clumping or reduce their flavor. 
  • Storing a wet rub: If you used fresh herbs (or mixed any of the optional seasonings with liquid), treat it like any other fresh marinade. Store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator and use it within 2 to 3 days.
    A wet rub has more moisture, so the flavor changes quicker and they do not keep as long.

Other Ways to Use This Seasoning

The beautiful thing about this homemade blend is that it is not only the best seasoning for a standing rib roast dinner, but it is also versatile. You can use it in everything from bread dips to veggies, taking all your favorite dishes to the next level in just minutes. Here are some of my other favorite ways to use it:

  • In other meat cuts: Though I love using this rub to make seasoned prime rib, it also makes a great addition to pork, chicken, turkey, and other beef recipes, such as traditional steak or my Reverse Sear Beef Tenderloin.
  • Sprinkle over vegetables: This recipe also makes for a delicious seasoning blend for vegetables, whether you follow a vegetarian diet or want easy veggie side dishes to complete your dinner menu.
  • Turn it into a marinade: Add a little oil to the seasoning mix, and it quickly becomes a simple marinade that adds even more richness to any kind of meat.
  • Make it a bread dip: Mix the seasoning with olive oil and a little shredded parmesan, and you get the easiest appetizer ever. If you want a more complete version with additional herbs and garlic, check out my Bread Dipping Oil Recipe.
  • Make herb butter: Mixing this seasoning into softened butter is one of the easiest ways to add rich, savory flavor to anything you are cooking. Stir it into plain butter, or use it with my Roasted Garlic Butter for even more depth. It spreads beautifully on warm bread, steaks, or roasted veggies.
Person mixing the ingredients in a bowl.

FAQs

Should I season the prime rib the night before?

Yes, if your recipe calls for it. Seasoning the roast with salt the night before (or even 24 to 48 hours ahead) helps draw out excess moisture and gives the salt time to work its way into the meat. This is the best way to get deeper, more even seasoning. Add the rest of the rub right before cooking.

Can I use fresh herbs?

Yes, fresh herbs work really well in this seasoning mix. But since they are milder, use twice as many dried herbs.

Should I put butter on prime rib before seasoning?

It depends on the cooking method and the recipe you are using, but most of the time, no. Many prime rib recipes rely on high heat at some point, and butter can burn quickly in that environment. If you want to use oil for flavor, choose one that can handle higher heat. A neutral, high-smoke-point oil like ghee (clarified butter) or vegetable oil works better than butter.

Should I season the fat cap?

You absolutely should. The fat cap is a key part of the roast, and seasoning it will ensure that every slice is perfectly seasoned.

Can I use this on boneless and bone-in roasts?

Yes. This seasoning works for both bone-in and boneless prime rib. Bone-in roasts take a little longer to cook, but the rub performs the same on either cut.

Complete Your Prime Rib Dinner

Congratulations, you made the best prime rib seasoning on the internet. Now, it is time to turn it into dinner. Here are the rest of the recipes you’ll need for a showstopping dinner:

  • How to cook it? My go-to recipe is this Reverse Sear Prime Rib. It is a two-step cooking method that starts in a low-temperature oven, brings it to your desired doneness, and then finishes in a high-heat oven. I use this seasoning for this recipe, and it works wonderfully.
  • The dipping sauce: Don’t let those herb-crusted pan drippings go to waste. Use them to make my 10-minute Prime Rib Au Jus recipe for the perfect dipping sauce.
  • What to serve it with? You can’t have prime rib without horseradish sauce. Yes, you can buy it online, but making Horseradish Sauce at Home is really easy. Alternatively, if you prefer a lightened-up version, my Horseradish Yogurt Sauce might be what you need.
  • Got leftovers? Don’t let a single bite go to waste and make my Leftover Prime Rib Sandwich.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/prime-rib-seasoning/feed/ 1
Slow Cooked Beef Brisket Tacos https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooked-beef-brisket-tacos-2/ https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooked-beef-brisket-tacos-2/#comments Tue, 02 May 2023 17:24:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=7564 Whether you’re planning a Cinco de Mayo party, a Tex-Mex-themed gathering, or looking for a tasty weeknight dinner doesn’t matter.…]]>

Whether you’re planning a Cinco de Mayo party, a Tex-Mex-themed gathering, or looking for a tasty weeknight dinner doesn’t matter. These crock pot brisket tacos will delight your tastebuds with their fresh, smoky taste. Top them with my Easy Guacamole, or serve them alongside my fan-favorite Mexican Street Corn for an authentic Mexican meal. Add a pitcher of Pineapple Margaritas, and you’ll never be at a loss for party ideas again!

Person squeezing lime over beef brisket tacos.

Ingredients

To make these easy slow-cooker beef brisket tacos, you’ll need two sets of ingredients:

For the Slow Cooker Brisket

Made with the most flavorful and fresh ingredients, this is easily the best brisket taco recipe for Mexican food lovers. Crowds will go wild for this simple recipe’s rich, seasoned taste.

Ingredients for brisket slow cooker tacos from the top view.
  • Brisket: I recommend using 3-4 pounds of brisket for this beef brisket taco recipe—the perfect size for six servings. When selecting your taco brisket, find a piece of meat with significant marbling and a layer of fat on top for extra flavor.
  • All-purpose flour: Flour is the key to making a thick, flavorful sauce for brisket tacos. However, you can omit this ingredient if you follow a gluten-free diet.
  • Onion: Robust yet mellow, onions give great depth to these brisket crock pot tacos. Cut your onions into thick half-moon slices before adding them to the slow cooker.
  • Peppers: Spice lovers will love the addition of jalapeno or poblano peppers to this easy taco recipe. Chop your peppers well, and you’re good to go!
  • Beef broth: I use beef broth in my taco beef brisket to give it a complex, hearty taste. However, chicken broth or even vegetable broth would also work.
  • Tomato paste: Rich tomato paste will give your brisket gorgeous color and an irresistibly piquant taste.
  • Fresh thyme sprigs: Thyme is the ultimate flavor-booster ingredient in hearty meat dishes. Earthy and lemony, this simple addition will lighten your beef’s taste.
  • Seasonings: I recommend using paprika, chili powder, onion powder, garlic powder, and salt for seasoning your beef.
  • Red wine vinegar: A small dash of red wine vinegar will brighten the smoky sweetness of this slow cooker brisket recipe. However, you could also use apple cider vinegar or any other vinegar you have on hand.

Brisket Taco Toppings

The sky is the limit when it comes to toppings for brisket tacos. Any of your favorite taco toppings would work, but you can find nearly a dozen tasty ideas below. You can use flour tortillas, make your own corn tortillas (following this masa tortilla recipe), or buy them at the store if you are short on time.

Brisket tacos toppings portioned and photographed from the top.
  • Guacamole: No one can resist a classic when considering what to put on brisket tacos. You only need four ingredients to make my creamy, fresh, and super easy guacamole recipe, perfect for shredded brisket tacos.
  • Tomatoes: Lighten up these brisket slow cooker tacos with the simple addition of tomatoes. You can use your favorite store-bought salsa, cherry tomato salsa, dice up fresh tomatoes, or make homemade pico de gallo.
  • Jalapenos: If you’re a fan of spice, topping a handful of fresh or pickled jalapenos will give your Mexican brisket just the right amount of kick.
  • Mexican cheese: Tangy and mild, a blend of Mexican cheeses is guaranteed to add a creamy taste to your brisket tacos. For extra freshness, you can even crumble cotija cheese on top of your tacos.
  • Pickled red onions: Anyone who likes bold flavors will adore the tangy punch of this easy red onion topping. For the most authentic flavors, try my Mexican Red Onion recipe. Or, you can also use roasted red onion slices if you are not a fan.
  • Fresh cilantro: Cilantro is optional, but it is a nice addition if you are a fan.
  • Lime wedges: If you like a little zing to your tacos, serve them with fresh lime juice. Lime wedges are a visually stunning way to add a citrusy bite.
  • Sour cream: Cool and tangy, a dollop of sour cream is just what your Mexican brisket tacos need to balance out their robust, spicy taste.
  • Sauce: Nothing pairs better with this shredded brisket recipe than its leftover juices we reduce at the end. Simply follow the steps in the recipe to make the sauce that takes this recipe to the next level.

How to Make Shredded Brisket for Tacos

Anyone—beginner and master chefs alike—can easily whip up pulled brisket tacos. You can let your slow cooker do the work when following these easy instructions.

A collage of images showing person preparing meat to make pulled brisket in crock pot.
  1. Make the meat rub: In a small bowl, mix the paprika, chili powder, onion powder, garlic powder, and salt.
  2. Prick the meat: Use a sharp knife to puncture both sides of the meat in several places. I recommend pricking the beef about 20-30 times for maximum flavor. Then, use a paper towel to pat dry the meat.
  3. Rub the meat: Rub the spice mixture into both sides of the beef before wrapping it tightly with stretch film or plastic wrap. Let the meat marinate in the fridge for 4-8 hours.
  4. Let the beef rest: On the day of cooking, remove the spice-rubbed beef from the fridge. Let it rest for 30-45 minutes while prepping the remaining ingredients.
A collage of images showing how to make beef brisket in a crock pot for tacos.
  1. Dust the meat with flour: Remove the stretch film from the beef, and sprinkle both sides with flour. Shake off any excess flour.
  2. Whisk the broth: Whisk together the beef broth and tomato paste in a measuring cup and set the mixture aside.
  3. Layer the slow cooker: Place half of the sliced onions, pepper, and minced garlic at the base of the crock pot. Transfer the meat, fat-side-up, on top of the veggies. Then, add the remaining vegetables on top of the beef. Pour the broth mixture atop the brisket, adding the thyme and bay leaves to the liquid.
  4. Cook the brisket: Cover the slow cooker and cook the beef on low for 8-10 hours. By the end, the meat should be fully cooked and easily shreddable.
Person showing how to shred beef brisket.
  1. Shred the beef: Transfer the cooked meat to a cutting board or cookie sheet. Before adding it to your tacos, shred the brisket with two forks. Cover it with aluminum foil until ready to serve.
A collage of photos showing how to reduce the leftover juices.
  1. Prepare the sauce: Place a colander over a saucepan and strain the leftover liquid. Discard the veggies. Then, bring the sauce to a boil over medium-high heat, then reduce it to medium heat. Let the mixture simmer for 15 minutes or until it reduces by half. Taste the sauce and add any extra seasoning, if desired. Just before serving, add the red wine vinegar.

How to Assemble Brisket Tacos

The most fun part about making brisket street tacos is assembling them. Design your tacos using whatever toppings you like, and you’ll have a photo-ready main the entire family will love.

A group of images showing how to make brisket tacos with the toppings.
  1. Prepare the taco station: Place the taco toppings in individual serving bowls, including the shredded brisket and the reduced sauce.
  2. Warm the tortillas: If desired, warm the tortillas in a small pan or microwave.
  3. Assemble shredded beef tacos: Lay out a tortilla, and add a helping of shredded brisket. Drizzle the meat with a tablespoon of the sauce, and then add your favorite toppings on top of the tacos. Repeat this process with the remaining tortillas.
  4. Serve: Garnish the beef brisket tacos with fresh lime and serve.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, Thaw, and Reheat?

Storing brisket for tacos is one of the easiest meal preps you’ll ever do. Make your brisket ahead or store the meat and juices for simple lunches throughout the month.

  • Make ahead: You can prepare this brisket taco recipe up to 2 days in advance. Not only does this process make meal prep a cinch, but it also lets the flavors develop before serving the brisket for leftover tacos.
  • Storage: To store your slow cooker brisket tacos, shred the leftover meat and let it reach room temperature. Then, portion the brisket leftovers into airtight containers, add a little juice and store them in the refrigerator for up to 2 days.
  • Freezing and thawing: Before you freeze your brisket, shred it and let it cool to room temperature. Portion the meat and leftover sauce into several airtight containers, labeling them with dates so you can keep track of their freshness. Then, place each airtight container in the freezer for up to 2 months. When ready to eat, thaw the brisket in the fridge overnight.
  • Reheat: I recommend reheating the leftovers in a pan with the juices for maximum juiciness. However, you could also place the leftover beef brisket in the oven at 350 degrees F. for 15-20 minutes. Be sure to drizzle them with some of the juices so they won’t dry out in the oven.

What to Serve with Brisket Tacos

You’ll unlock dozens of mouthwatering Mexican sides to serve when you make slow-cooked beef brisket tacos. From creamy street corn to seasoned quinoa, this list has it all!

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a master chef to learn how to make brisket tacos. These pro tips will ensure your beef is as tender and flavorful as possible.

  • Don’t skip the resting: To get delicious flavor into every bite of brisket, I recommend letting your meat rest for at least 4 hours, preferably overnight. This step ensures that your beef absorbs its savory seasonings before adding it to the slow cooker.
  • Low and slow: A great way to ensure soft, tender meat is to take time with the recipe. Cook the brisket for at least 8-10 hours on low heat, letting the meat relax and absorb its juices. If you want to serve the tacos at night, begin cooking early in the morning. If you plan to serve these tacos during the day, start slow cooking the night before.
  • Skim the fat: Because this beef brisket recipe cooks off much of the meat’s fat in the crock pot, I recommend skimming off the extra fat from the meat mixture with a wooden spoon before serving.
  • Reduce the leftover liquid to use as a sauce: My favorite way to dress my own tacos is by transforming the brisket’s cooking liquid into a mouthwatering sauce. Let the liquid simmer for 15 minutes until it reduces by half. Then, add extra seasonings and serve!
  • Taste for seasoning: There are two times I recommend tasting your tender brisket recipe for seasoning: just after shredding your meat and when you first taste the reduced sauce (i.e., while it’s simmering). Since we are “cooking off” most of the liquid, adding seasonings to the sauce too soon may produce an overly salty sauce.
  • Customize it to your liking: Brisket tacos are one of my favorite foods because of how much fun you can have customizing them! Play with whatever toppings you want, experimenting with new combinations until you find your favorite.
Beef brisket tacos on a plate topped off with guacamole, red onion, and Mexican cheese.

FAQs

Want to know more about how to make brisket in a crock pot for tacos? I’ve answered all your questions here so you can enjoy melt-in-your-mouth eats any day of the week.

Why is my brisket tough?

The meat used for brisket tends to be tougher than other cuts, with lots of connective tissue. Therefore, you must cook your beef at a low temperature for at least 8-10 hours to ensure the meat is as soft and tender as possible.

What are some other ways I can use leftover brisket?

Do you have some leftover brisket from making tacos? There are countless delicious ways to use your meat leftovers, like using it as an enchilada filling, making brisket tacos, or even whipping up a plate of nachos.

Can I use suadero beef instead of brisket in this recipe?

Yes, you can. If you are trying to recreate the suadero tacos you had in Mexico, you can easily use suadero beef (also sold as suadero brisket or suadero meat) instead of brisket in this recipe.

Other Beef Recipes You Might Like:

Can’t get enough of this beef brisket taco recipe? These other beef dishes will satisfy your cravings with hearty, fresh flavors even a pro chef wouldn’t be able to resist.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this recipe, please take a moment to give it a star rating and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Brisket tacos served over corn tortillas and topped off with toppings on a plate.
Print

Slow Cooked Brisket Tacos Recipe

This Slow Cooker Beef Brisket Tacos Recipe requires little hands on time, but every minute is worth the effort. Corn tortillas filled with slow cooked brisket, guacamole, and pickled red onion are out-of-this-world delicious.
Course Meat
Cuisine Mexican Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 10 hours
Marinading time 8 hours
Total Time 18 hours 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 642kcal

Ingredients

For The Seasoning (Meat Rub)

  • 1 tablespoon paprika
  • 1 tablespoon chili powder
  • 2 teaspoons onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 ½ teaspoons salt
  • 3 lbs. beef brisket flat cut; trimmed of excess fat and “silver skin”
  • 2 tablespoons of all-purpose flour
  • 1 onion halved and sliced ½ inch thick
  • 1 jalapeno or poblano pepper; seeds removed and roughly chopped
  • 4 garlic cloves minced
  • 3 cups beef broth
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
  • 3 sprigs fresh thyme or 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 2 bay leaves
  • 1 tablespoon red wine vinegar

For The Tacos:

  • 12 6-inch corn tortillas
  • 1 ½ cups guacamole
  • 1 tomato cut into small pieces
  • 1 jalapeno pepper seeded and sliced
  • 1 cup Mexican cheese such as queso fresco or cotija cheese
  • 1 cup pickled red onions
  • ½ cup fresh cilantro leaves chopped
  • Lime wedges for serving

Instructions

For Slow Cooker Brisket:

  • Prepare the meat rub: Mix the paprika, chili powder, onion powder, garlic powder, and salt in a bowl.
  • Prick both sides of the meat in several places ( about 20-30 “hits”) using the tip of a sharp knife. Then pat dry the meat on both sides using a sheet of paper towel.
  • Rub the spice mixture over both sides of the meat. Wrap it tightly with stretch film or plastic wrap and let it marinate in the fridge for at least 4 hours or preferably overnight (up to 8 hours.)
  • On the day of cooking, remove the meat from the refrigerator and let it rest for 30 minutes while you prepare the rest of the ingredients.
  • Remove the stretch film. Sprinkle it with the flour on both sides, shaking off the excess.
  • Whisk together beef broth and tomato paste in a measuring cup until combined. Set it aside.
  • Place half of the sliced onions, pepper, and minced garlic at the bottom of the slow cooker. Place the meat with the fat side up on top of the mixture.
  • Add the remaining sliced onions, pepper, and minced garlic on top of the meat. Pour the mixture over the meat. Add the thyme and bay leaves to the liquid.
  • Cover and cook on low heat setting for 8-10 hours or until meat is fully cooked and shreds easily.
  • Transfer the now-cooked brisket onto a cutting board (or cookie sheet) and cover it with aluminum foil to keep it warm. Right before serving, shred the meat using two forks. When done, cover it with aluminum foil to keep it warm.

To Make The Sauce:

  • Using a large spoon, skim off the liquid fat layer in the crock pot as much as you can*. Place a colander over a saucepan, strain the leftover liquid, and discard the veggies.
  • Bring the liquid to a boil over medium-high heat. Turn the heat down to medium and let it simmer for 15 minutes or until it is reduced by half and slightly thickened. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Add the red wine vinegar at the last minute to brighten the flavor.

To Assemble the tacos:

  • Set up your taco station by placing the toppings in individual serving bowls, the now-shredded meat, and the reduced sauce.
  • If preferred, warm tortillas.
  • To assemble the brisket tacos, place shredded brisket over a corn tortilla. Drizzle it with a tablespoon (or more) of the reduced sauce, and then add the toppings. Repeat the same process with the rest of the tortillas.
  • Garnish with fresh lime and serve!

Notes

  • Taste for seasoning: There are two times I recommend tasting this recipe for seasoning: First, just after shredding your meat, and then second, when the sauce is fully reduced after the simmering time is fully completed. Since we are “cooking off” most of the liquid, adding seasonings to the sauce too soon may produce an overly salty sauce.
  • Make it your own: I included some topping suggestions, but as with any other taco recipe, the sky is the limit when dressing your tacos. Use this recipe as a place to start and customize it to your liking.
  • Skim the fat: Do not skip removing the liquid fat at the top layer of the liquid. The amount of liquid fat you’ll end up with depends on how fatty your meat is. You can reserve (I usually freeze it) and use it in place of oil or butter in recipes or discard it. Alternatively, if you have it, you can use a fat separator to remove it.
  • Make ahead: You can prepare the slow-cooked brisket recipe up to 2 days in advance. Doing so helps develop flavors and make them rich and even more delicious. When ready to serve, warm up the meat (and the sauce), prep taco toppings, and assemble at the table.
  • Storage: To store your slow cooker brisket tacos, shred the leftover meat and bring it to room temperature. Then, portion the leftovers into airtight containers, add a little juice and store them in the refrigerator for up to 2 days.
  • Freezing and thawing: Before you freeze your brisket, shred it and let it cool to room temperature. Portion the meat and leftover sauce into several airtight containers, labeling them with dates so you can keep track of their freshness. Then, place each airtight container in the freezer for up to 2 months. When ready to eat, thaw the brisket in the fridge overnight.
  • Reheat: I recommend reheating the brisket in a pan with the juices for maximum juiciness. However, you could also place the leftovers in the oven at 350 degrees F. for 15-20 minutes. Be sure to drizzle them with some of the juices so they won’t dry out in the oven.

Nutrition

Calories: 642kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 58g | Fat: 30g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Cholesterol: 158mg | Sodium: 1394mg | Potassium: 1315mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1502IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 215mg | Iron: 7mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooked-beef-brisket-tacos-2/feed/ 46
Eggplant Beef Stew https://foolproofliving.com/beef-stew/ https://foolproofliving.com/beef-stew/#comments Mon, 03 Apr 2023 23:15:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1169 Inspired by my Vegetable Beef Soup and Crock Pot Vegetable Beef Soup, along with my Turkish Stuffed Eggplant, this Turkish-style…]]>

Inspired by my Vegetable Beef Soup and Crock Pot Vegetable Beef Soup, along with my Turkish Stuffed Eggplant, this Turkish-style eggplant beef stew recipe takes home cooking to another level.

Trust the process with this one, as the low and slow cooking technique I learned from my mom is worth the wait. Love eggplant? Be sure to check out our collection of tasty eggplant recipes.

Beef and eggplant stew in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients

Many of the ingredients for this beef stew with eggplant are pantry staples, along with a few that are easy to grab on a quick trip to the grocery store. Here’s what you’ll need:

Ingredients for the recipe portioned out and photographed from the top view.
  • Stew meat: You can use Sirloin steak tips, or a whole boneless beef chuck roast cut into 1 – 1 ½ inch cubes.
  • Aromatics: Onions and garlic give it a deep, savory flavor.
  • Olive oil
  • Spices and seasonings: These include ground cumin, paprika, bay leaf, salt, and black pepper.
  • Peppers: I like jalapenos for a kick of spice or red bell peppers for mild.
  • Tomatoes: We are using tomato paste and canned tomatoes (diced or crushed).
  • Eggplant: Globe eggplant is the easiest to find in grocery stores and commercial varieties mean you no longer have to deal with Sweating Eggplant. But feel free to use any Type of Eggplant you love.
  • Chicken stock: Homemade Chicken Stock will provide the best flavor, but a store-bought chicken broth would also work.
  • Green peas: Blanched Frozen Peas or store-bought frozen peas will both work.
  • Herbs: Fresh parsley or fresh oregano leaves would also work.

How to Make Eggplant Beef Stew?

This beef with aubergine recipe takes some time and patience, but your efforts will be worth it in the end. Here’s how I like to make it:

Person drying the meat and meat is in the dutch oven.
  1. Dry meat: Dry the stew meat with a paper towel on all sides.
  2. Prep meat: Set the Dutch oven over low heat and add the meat and quartered onion. Cover with the lid and let it cook for 1 hour (no peeking).
  3. Keep it low and slow: At the end of 1 hour, open the lid and give the meat and onions a stir. Cover again and continue to cook for another 2 hours. After 2 hours, you will see that the meat will release most of its juices. Do not be tempted to increase the heat – the beauty of this recipe is to cook it low and slow.
A collage of images showing how to make the recipe.
  1. Finish beef: Continue cooking the meat for another 2 hours, stirring at the end of each hour. The meat should now be super soft. There may be some liquid in the pot, depending on the stew meat, which is totally fine. Give it a taste and make sure that it is soft and not too chewy. If it is, then continue cooking for another 30 minutes to an hour.
  2. Remove meat: Remove the meat, onion, and all the juices from the Dutch oven into a bowl. Cover with foil to keep warm. Do not wash the Dutch oven.
  3. Saute aromatics and spices: In the same Dutch oven, heat olive oil over medium heat and add chopped pepper, tomato paste, ground cumin, and paprika. Cook, stirring frequently, for 4 – 5 minutes. Stir in the garlic and cook for 1 minute, or until fragrant.
  4. Add veggies & let it simmer: Add the prepared eggplant, tomatoes, chicken stock, bay leaf, salt, and pepper. Place the beef, onion, and all of the juices back into the pot. Give it a stir and cover it with the lid. Bring it to a boil, then reduce it to a simmer for 15-20 minutes. 
  5. Add peas: After the 15-minute mark, add the frozen peas. Bring it to a final boil and let it simmer until ready to serve.
  6. Serve: When ready to serve, remove the bay leaf. Garnish with parsley and serve.
Turkish Style eggplant beef stew after it is cooked in a big pot with a wooden spoon on the side.

How to Make Ahead, Store Leftovers, Reheat and Freeze?

Beef stew and eggplant can be made ahead of time and stored in the fridge or freezer for longer storage. Here’s how to do it:

  • Make Ahead: The stew meat and onions can be prepped and slow-cooked (steps 1-5) up to 3 days in advance. This gives you a good head start if looking to prepare the stew any night of the week.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat leftovers in 30-second increments in the microwave or over medium heat on the stove until warmed through.
  • Freeze: Bring to room temperature, then store in a freezer-safe container for 1-2 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw overnight in the fridge, then reheat as instructed above.

What to Serve It With?

Any of my side dish recipes would pair wonderfully with this recipe. But if you are looking for some inspiration, some of my favorites include:

Beef eggplant stew in a plate with bread on the side.

Expert Tips

  • So delicious, you don’t even need salt. Don’t fret about not salting the meat in the beginning. The low and slow cooking method creates meat so delicious you’ll find you will not need salt until braising.
  • Keep it low and slow. Trust the process, and the meat will cook through until melt-in-your-mouth tender. Patience is a virtue with this one.
  • A quick tip for preparing eggplant for cooking: As I cut eggplant, I place it in a large bowl of water with some Kosher salt to prevent the eggplant from oxidizing and turning brown.
  • Use one kind of stew meat to ensure the best flavor and even cooking. As I learned from The Kitchn’s article, Best Choice of Meat for Stew, using one type of meat cut in equal sizes will ensure that you will end up with an eggplant beef stew that is evenly cooked.
  • Incorporate other vegetables. Mushrooms, green beans, or potatoes can be used instead of (or in addition to) eggplant. Keep in mind, potatoes or other root vegetables might take longer to cook.
  • Keep it on the smallest heat source. Use the smallest burner on the stovetop over the lowest heat setting when first cooking the meat and onions.

FAQs

Can I make this recipe in the slow cooker?

I would not recommend making this in a slow cooker (or Instant Pot) as the slow cooker is too hot, even on the low setting. The magic of this recipe is to keep it on the smallest and lowest heat source on the stove.

Can you put eggplant in beef stew?

Yes, it is one that I use in many of my stew recipes. It cooks very fast and absorbs the many delicious flavors of beef and vegetables.

How long does eggplant need to be cooked in stew?

Eggplant only takes about 15-20 minutes to cook through in stew.

Do you need to peel eggplant for stew?

No, this is a personal choice. The skin is edible, so unpeeled eggplant is just fine.

Other Beef Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Eggplant and beef stew in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Eggplant Beef Stew Recipe

Eggplant Beef Stew served with bulgur pilaf makes a satisfying dish with tender pull-apart meat. Cooked low and slow, this Turkish style beef stew is a must try!
Course Beef
Cuisine American, Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 6 hours
Total Time 6 hours 15 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 295kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 lbs stew meat Sirloin steak tips or boneless beef chuck roast, cut into 1 ½ inch cubes
  • 1 large yellow onions peeled and cut into quarters
  • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil olive oil or avocado oil
  • 3 jalapeno peppers seeded and chopped – or bell pepper would also work
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 eggplant cut into cubes ~ 1 lb.
  • 1 can diced tomatoes 14.5 oz.
  • 1 cup chicken stock
  • 1 bay leaf
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
  • 1 cup frozen peas no need to thaw
  • 2 tablespoons Italian parsley freshly chopped
  • Pinch red pepper flakes or Aleppo pepper if you can get your hands on it

Instructions

  • Dry meat: Using paper towels, pat-dry the stew meat as much as you can.
  • Cook meat: Place meat in a Dutch oven with the quartered onion over low heat. Put the lid on and let it cook for an hour without opening it. I recommend using the smallest burner on your stovetop.
  • Keep it low and slow: At the end of an hour, give it a stir, put the lid back on and let it continue to cook for another two hours. At the end of two hours, you will see that the meat will release most of its juices. Do not be tempted to increase the heat or move to a larger burner; the beauty of this recipe is to cook low and slow.
  • Finish beef: Continue to cook for another 2 hours, giving it a stir at the end of each hour mark. In the end, the meat should be super soft. Depending on the stew meat you are using, there may be some liquid in the pot, which is okay.
  • Remove meat: Remove the meat and onion (and all the juices) from the pot into a bowl, cover with foil, and set it aside. Do not wash the dutch oven.
  • Saute aromatics and spices: In the same dutch oven over medium heat, heat olive oil and add chopped pepper, tomato paste, ground cumin, and paprika. Cook, stirring frequently, for 4 to 5 minutes. Stir in the garlic and cook for a minute.
  • Add veggies: Add the cubed eggplant, tomatoes, stock, bay leaf, salt, and pepper.
  • Simmer: Put the now-cooked beef, onion, and all of the juices back into the pot. Give it a quick stir, cover it with the lid, bring it to a boil and let it simmer for 15-20 minutes. Add the frozen peas and let them come to one last boil.
  • Serve: When ready to serve, make sure to take out the bay leaf. Garnish with parsley and serve.

Notes

  • Make Ahead: The stew meat and onions can be prepped and slow-cooked (steps 1-5) up to 3 days in advance. This gives you a good head start if looking to prepare the stew on a weeknight.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat leftovers in 30-second increments in the microwave or over medium heat on the stove until warmed through.
  • Freeze: Bring to room temperature, then store in a freezer-safe container for 1-2 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw overnight in the fridge, then reheat as instructed above.

Nutrition

Calories: 295kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 38g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 95mg | Sodium: 563mg | Potassium: 1025mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 601IU | Vitamin C: 31mg | Calcium: 80mg | Iron: 5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/beef-stew/feed/ 17
What To Serve With Pot Roast https://foolproofliving.com/what-to-serve-with-pot-roast/ https://foolproofliving.com/what-to-serve-with-pot-roast/#respond Sun, 26 Feb 2023 03:46:19 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=65116 My ideal pot roast dinner party menu includes some of my favorite side dish recipes. Colorful Butternut Squash Salad and…]]>

My ideal pot roast dinner party menu includes some of my favorite side dish recipes. Colorful Butternut Squash Salad and tender Green Beans in Air Fryer perfectly complement each other as tasty veggie sides. Then, Fingerling Smashed Potatoes
Garlic Rosemary Mashed Potatoes and Buttermilk Sweet Potato Biscuits balance the spread with rich, filling flavor—perfect for a classy Sunday get-together or holiday dinner!

Want to try out a different mix? Any of the following pot roast sides will delight your tastebuds and your dinner guests.

A plate of pot roast with potatoes and carrots on the side with text on the image.

Best Potato, Pasta, and Whole Grain Side Dishes

What appetizer goes with a pot roast better than a hearty grain? Customize the flavor profile of your beef roast dinner with herby, spicy, or cheesy dishes guaranteed to please. From fluffy whipped potatoes to creamy mac and cheese to egg noodles, these filling recipes will ensure no one leaves your dinner table unsatisfied.

A bowl of mashed potatoes as one of the pot roast side dishes.
  • Garlic Rosemary Mashed Potatoes: If you’re in the market for melt-in-your-mouth potato sides for chuck roast, this rosemary-infused garlicky mashed potato recipe makes for a savory side that excellently accompanies a rich beef roast. If you have the time, also try our beef gravy recipe as a drizzle on top for a next-level side dish.
  • Muffin Tin Potatoes: This simple recipe is just what you need for potato side dishes that don’t require an extra trip to the grocery store. Four ingredients come together for an exquisite, filling side that will have the whole table reaching for seconds.
  • Creamy Potato Salad with Capers: Potato side dishes are some of the best recipes to pair with a robust, meaty roast. Even beginner cooks can whip up this creamy potato side—up to three days in advance!
  • Simple Mashed Sweet Potatoes: It’s no wonder why sweet potatoes make good sides for pot roast. Delicately sweet and bursting with color, this velvety, seven-ingredient recipe perfectly accentuates the rustic, beefy taste of a pot roast and gravy dinner.
  • Baked Sweet Potato Fries: With a subtly crisp exterior and sweet, fluffy insides, these healthy sweet potato French fries are the perfect solution to meal-prep stress. This easy side dish is also gluten-, soy-, and peanut-free to accommodate every mouth at your dinner table.
Cooked Gigi Hadid pasta garnished with basil leaves.
  • Gigi Hadid Pasta: You don’t have to be famous to eat like a star. Spicy vodka sauce, fresh basil, and tender pasta shells make for one of the most internet-popular sides that go with a roast.
  • Green Pasta: Say goodbye to store-bought pesto and hello to effortless, home-cooked eats with this to-die-for dish. Nutty parmesan, zesty lemon juice, and nutrient-dense spinach will transform your bland pasta side into a garden-fresh flavor experience.
  • Vegan Mac and Cheese: After you whip up this flavor-loaded mac and cheese, you’ll never search for another cheesy pasta side again. And it is one that happens to be made with good-for-you ingredients. Velvety cashew cheese sauce, earthy turmeric, and hearty garlic will delight anyone following a non-dairy, soy-free diet.
  • Wild Rice Pilaf: Rice pilaf is a must when considering sides for a pot roast. This vegan, gluten-free dish contains tasteful and healthy ingredients, like fresh chopped parsley, mushroom, and garlic, and it takes less than an hour to prepare.
  • Mexican Corn Pasta Salad: Who says Mexican dishes can’t be sides for a beef roast? This fabulously flavorful appetizer combines soft pasta, chili lime dressing, and tangy sour cream to please everyone at your dinner party.

Vegetables to Serve With Pot Roast

If you’ve ever wondered what the best vegetables for pot roast are, these nutritious ideas are just what you need. It doesn’t matter if you’re craving crisp roasted eggplant or smoky seared mushrooms. You’ll find all the savory, sweet, and earthy dishes you need to balance out your meaty main.

Asparagus and mushroom saute in a plate with a spoon on the side.
  • Asparagus and Mushroom Saute: Out of all the side dishes for pot roast, mild asparagus and sauteed mushrooms make an unbeatable pair. Bursting with buttery taste, this beginner-friendly recipe is one of the best side dishes to serve alongside a hearty protein.
  • Crispy Roasted Eggplant: Eggplant is one of the best vegetables to go with a roast. Smoky, savory, and tender, this rich eggplant recipe is coated with an addictive Parmesan-and-panko crumb coating.
  • Oven Roasted Asparagus: You only need five ingredients to make this simple side dish (plus an irresistible Parmesan cheese topping!). If you’re short on time or prefer a different cooking method, Air Fried Asparagus and Pan-Seared Asparagus also make a great option.
  • Baked Shiitake Mushrooms: This richly umami-packed dish is one of my favorite veggie sides to serve alongside a pot roast dinner. Tender and hearty, shiitake mushrooms will bring out the rich flavor of your savory pot roast.
Garlic butter green beans as a good side dish to eat with pot roast.
  • Green Beans with Garlic and Butter: Buttery, robust green beans are an ideal appetizer to make with pot roast. Not only can you whip up this easy side in just 15 minutes, but it also only uses five simple ingredients.
  • Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant: Finding tasty, low-calorie vegetables to go with roast doesn’t have to be complicated. This vegetarian recipe tops Whole Roasted Eggplant with herby Bulgur Wheat Pilaf and tangy Tahini Yogurt Sauce for photo-ready results.
  • Roasted Maple Carrots: If you’re making the cult-favorite slow cooker Mississippi Pot Roast this sweet veggie side makes an ideal match. Caramelized in a sweet maple glaze and mixed with a dash of salt, these colorful carrots are the perfect side dish for a holiday dinner.
  • Sauteed Cabbage: Looking for pot roast dinner sides that are off the beaten track? This seven-ingredient cabbage recipe is an excellent side dish to emphasize the rich undertones of your beef dish.
  • Creamed Corn: You don’t need to sacrifice flavor when serving vegetables with pot roast and potatoes. This classic dish bathes tender golden corn kernels in a sweet cream sauce to make a complete meal even picky eaters will adore.

Bread Recipes That Go With Pot Roast

Nothing tastes better than sopping up rich roast beef juices with hearty bread. Everything from flaky loaves to buttery rolls makes an incomparable pair with a savory Sunday roast. With these beginner-friendly options, you’ll never wonder what bread goes with pot roast again.

Dinner rolls garnished with sesame seeds from the top view.
  • Brioche Buns: If you love the taste of fluffy, buttery homemade dinner rolls, this easy no knead brioche recipe will satisfy your cravings. Even those new to baking can prepare these spongy bread rolls with ease.
  • No-Knead Dutch Oven Bread: Beginner bakers, foodies, and experienced chefs will love this ultra-simple four-ingredient bread recipe. If you prefer a brinier, more rustic option, you can also serve my Olive Loaf Bread for an equally simple dish.
  • Almond Bread: This easy low-carb recipe is the ultimate gluten-free alternative to traditional bread recipes. Prepared with only ten ingredients, this filling dish is one of the best pot roast sides for those with dietary restrictions.
Sliced jalapeno cornbread on a plate from the top view.
  • Jiffy Jalapeño Cheddar Cornbread: Give your grain a kick with this Southern take on traditional cornbread. Cheddar cheese gives this dish a savory dairy flavor, while diced jalapenos lend each slice an incomparable spice.
  • Yorkshire Pudding: Sometimes, the simplest recipes make the tastiest pot roast side dishes. With just five ingredients and a muffin tin, this British classic appetizer has a golden-brown exterior and pillow-soft insides.
  • Savory Cornbread Muffins: There are dozens of tasty appetizers to serve with pot roast besides potatoes. These sweet-and-savory muffins are a great side dish to bring a pop of pepper and spice to your chuck roast meal.

Salads to Serve With Chuck Roast

Want to balance your robust chuck roast with garden-fresh flavors? This green list has everything from picnic-ready spring mixes to Middle Eastern Tabbouleh. These crisp, nutritious salads are the perfect dishes to serve with roast beef in the summer—or any time of the year!

  • Coleslaw with Greek Yogurt: Coleslaw is one of my go-to summer salads side dishes for roast beef in the warmer months. Tangy Greek yogurt dressing has a light, creamy taste, while crisp garden vegetables give every bite an irresistible crunch.
  • 5 Bean Salad: Want Southern sides for pot roast that will delight your taste buds? Like my Texas Caviar, this easy recipe comes together in only 20 minutes and is a good option for an effortless make-ahead side.
Black eyed pea salad in a bowl from the top view.
  • Black Eyed Peas Salad: Gluten-free, vegan, and wholesome, this easy bean salad will give your pot roast meal breathtaking color. This recipe’s secret ingredient (lemon juice!) perfectly balances its fresh, natural flavors.
  • Butter Leaf Lettuce Salad: This tender-crisp salad is a great way to complement your roast beef dinner with a bright leafy taste. You only need 20 minutes to toss the sweet green peas, bright red radish, and mild bibb lettuce of this green salad.
  • Spring Salad: Made with a leafy spring mix, juicy tomatoes, and robust red onion, this classic recipe perfectly pairs with nearly any main dish. With this nutritious crowd-pleaser, you’ll never be at a loss for appetizing spring salads again.
  • Goat Cheese Salad: Who can say no to the warm, gooey taste of Baked Goat Cheese Balls? Served atop a bed of fresh mixed greens and Dijon mustard dressing, your goat cheese recipe will impress all your dinner guests.
  • Kardashian Salad: If you want to eat like a celebrity, this social media sensation is a must when it comes to Sunday roast sides. You’ll love every bite of this recipe’s savory salami, creamy mozzarella, and crisp iceberg lettuce.
Roasted Brussels sprouts salad with kale in a bowl.
  • Kale and Brussel Sprout Salad: Superfoods make excellent side dishes for chuck roast. Hearty, healthy, and delicious, this recipe is one of my most iconic fall salads. You’ll savor every forkful of this dish’s Parmesan cheese, nutty almonds, and grassy Brussels sprouts.
  • Avocado Quinoa Salad: This simple salad has everything from zesty Lemon Dressing to creamy avocado, crisp cucumbers, and flavorful quinoa—a combination so heavenly you’ll want to double the recipe! It’s no wonder why this is one of my favorite quinoa salads.
  • Goat Cheese and Beet Salad: No one can resist the gourmet taste of earthy goat cheese, sweet beets, and tart balsamic vinegar. Topped with Balsamic Lemon Vinaigrette, this divine dish looks straight from a culinary magazine.
  • Turkish Tabbouleh: This classic Mediterranean recipe bursts with herbaceous, zesty flavors. Packed with fresh herbs, green onions, and lemon dressing, this easy side comes together in 30 minutes—as quickly as my Quinoa Tabbouleh!

FAQs

What is the best way to serve a pot roast?

There are countless options when considering what goes well with pot roast. I recommend including one salad, one or two roasted/sautéed vegetables, one type of bread, and one potato dish for a meal planning shortcut. And whatever recipe you choose, do not forget to pick up a bottle of your favorite red wine to make it the perfect pot roast dinner!

Potatoes mashed with rosemary and butter in a bowl from the top view.
Print

35 Sides To Serve with Pot Roast – Rosemary Mashed Potatoes Recipe

These Rosemary Mashed Potatoes are a buttery, decadent side dish that makes the perfect side for pot roast dinner. One of our most popular sides to serve with pot roast, this creamy rosemary potato dish is the best accompaniment for a delicious meal that is guaranteed to impress.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 4
Calories 348kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds Yukon gold potatoes cut into chunks
  • 1 tablespoon salt
  • ½ cup whole milk or almond milk
  • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter plus more as garnish if preferred
  • 2 sprigs fresh rosemary plus more as garnish
  • 3 cloves garlic* peeled and minced
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground white pepper or black pepper

Instructions

  • Boil the potatoes: Fill a medium saucepan with cold water and add the cubed potatoes. Stir in the salt and bring it to a boil on medium-high heat. Cook the potatoes until tender, 15-20 minutes. You can check doneness by inserting a sharp knife into a potato. If it comes in and out easily, it is ready to go. Drain potatoes, return to pot, and set them aside.
  • Infuse the rosemary: Meanwhile, place milk and butter in a small saucepan over medium heat. Cook until butter is fully melted. You do not need to bring it to a boil. Turn the heat off, add in sprigs of rosemary and minced garlic and let it steep while you are mashing the potatoes. I recommend letting it sit for 10-15 minutes. However, you can let it steep longer. Be aware that the longer it steeps, the stronger the flavors of rosemary will be.
  • Mash the potatoes: Using a potato masher or a food mill (if you have one), mash the potatoes until they reach your desired consistency.
  • Add the milk mixture: Remove the sprigs of rosemary from the milk mixture and pour the mixture over the mashed potatoes and mix until completely combined. At first, it will look like it has too much liquid, but it will thicken as it sits.
  • Season: Season with salt and pepper. Taste for seasoning and add in if needed.
  • Serve: Transfer onto a serving bowl, garnish with chopped rosemary and more butter if preferred. Serve.

Notes

  • Garlic: If you love a kick of garlic flavor and want to take these mashed potatoes to the next level, you can use roasted garlic in this recipe. Simply follow my recipe for Roasted Garlic (using heads of garlic), or make Air Fryer Roasted Garlic if you’re in a rush. In a pinch, you can also use garlic powder instead. 
  • Make ahead & reheat: I recommend making these potatoes no more than a day in advance. To store, let the mashed potatoes cool to room temperature, place them in an oven-safe baking dish (to make for easy reheating), cover it with stretch film, and place it in the fridge. Reheat in a low-heat oven for about 15 minutes, making sure to stir a few times for even reheating. If you’re making this recipe for a holiday dinner, pop them in the oven after your turkey or ham comes out to take advantage of an already-warm oven. 
  • Store: The best way to store this dish is in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2-3 days. You can reheat it in a low-heat (300 degrees F) oven for 10-15 minutes or until warmed thoroughly.
  • Freeze: To freeze leftovers, let them cool completely and store them in an airtight freezer bag or a freezer-safe container for up to one month. Thaw it in the fridge overnight.
  • Consistency/texture: My favorite tool to use for mashed potatoes is a potato masher, but a food mill, potato ricer, or hand mixer would also work well to achieve a creamy, smooth texture. I recommend sticking to handheld tools and avoiding tools like food processors or blenders, as they result in a gummy texture.
  • Double the recipe: If you’re serving this recipe for a holiday dinner or a large crowd, feel free to double the recipe as many times as you need. 
  • Taste for seasoning: Mashed potatoes aren’t nearly as good when they’re bland, so make sure to taste for seasoning before serving. Feel free to add in some extra salt or ground pepper to enhance the flavors of the dish.

Nutrition

Calories: 348kcal | Carbohydrates: 42g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 49mg | Sodium: 2063mg | Potassium: 1020mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 594IU | Vitamin C: 45mg | Calcium: 77mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/what-to-serve-with-pot-roast/feed/ 0
Ina Garten Pot Roast https://foolproofliving.com/company-pot-roast/ https://foolproofliving.com/company-pot-roast/#comments Sat, 25 Feb 2023 03:47:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3240 Ingredients You’ll Need Ina Garten’s pot roast recipe uses simple ingredients you can easily find at most grocery stores. From…]]>

Why This Recipe Works

Aysegul

Like many people of my generation, I’ve been a fan of Ina Garten for years. Her cookbooks are the ones I reach for most, especially when I want a dish that feels generous and dependable.

This pot roast is a recipe I first made in 2008, when Back to Basics came out. In the recipe intro, she explains that she calls it “Company Pot Roast” because it is a great dish to serve a crowd. And I cannot agree more with that statement.

Since then, this recipe has been my go-to whenever I need a main dish that can feed a group, especially for special occasion dinners like Christmas, New Year’s, or Easter. It’s the kind of centerpiece you can bring to the table and know it will carry the whole meal.

Over the years, after making it more times than I can count, I started noticing a few things that aren’t fully explained in the book but made a big difference, especially if you’re new to cooking a large piece of meat like a chuck roast.

That’s why I wanted to share it on the blog so that I can walk through the process step by step (with photos and a short video) and share a few lessons I’ve learned along the way. Because I know from experience that a big chuck roast can feel intimidating if you don’t cook roasts often.

Here’s why I keep coming back to this recipe:

  • The steps are simple and easy to follow, even if you’ve never cooked a roast before.
  • The meat turns very tender as it cooks slowly in the oven.
  • The vegetables soften and naturally help thicken the sauce.
  • It tastes even better the next day, which makes it ideal for making ahead.

Ingredients You’ll Need

Ina Garten’s pot roast recipe uses simple ingredients you can easily find at most grocery stores. From a well-marbled beef chuck roast to everyday vegetables and fresh herbs, everything comes together to create a classic pot roast you can rely on.

You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my recipe testing:

Ingredients for a roast with beef on a cutting board from the top view.

Boneless beef chuck roast: Ina Garten uses a boneless beef chuck roast in her original recipe, and it’s the cut I recommend for the closest results. Chuck has enough marbling to stay tender during the long, slow cooking time. 

That said, I’ve also tested this recipe with other cuts, such as eye round (sometimes labeled London broil), bottom round (rump roast), and brisket, and they work as well, but you may have to adjust the cooking time based on the cut you use.

No matter which cut you use, tying the meat with kitchen twine helps it keep its shape as it cooks.

All-purpose flour: I used regular unbleached all-purpose flour, but if you’d like to make this recipe gluten-free, you can use a 1:1 gluten-free all-purpose flour.

Olive oil: I recommend using extra-virgin olive oil for its rich flavor, but other neutral oils with a higher smoke point, such as avocado oil or ghee (clarified butter), would also work.

Ingredients for a roast with vegetables shown from the top view.

Vegetables: This recipe uses a variety of aromatic veggies, including carrots, yellow onions, celery, leeks, and garlic cloves. If you can’t get your hands on leeks, you can simply use one extra yellow onion instead.

Wine and (optional) cognac: Ina suggests we use a good-quality red wine, one good enough to drink. She uses Burgundy in her original pot roast recipe, but other reds, like Chianti or Cabernet Sauvignon, would also work.

You may also add two tablespoons of cognac or brandy to this recipe, though this is optional.

No alcohol option: If you prefer to cook without alcohol, you can substitute the red wine with an equal amount of chicken stock and a tablespoon of balsamic vinegar to mimic the wine’s acidity.

Chicken stock: You will also need one cup of chicken stock, which you can buy from the store (buy low-sodium so you can adjust the salt in the recipe). However, as a lifelong Ina fan, I always make a batch of her Chicken Stock Recipe and stash it in my freezer. If you have the time, I highly recommend using homemade stock. 

Alternatively, beef broth can also be used.

Canned tomatoes: The original recipe calls for whole plum tomatoes, but I use diced tomatoes in my version because it is quicker (no need to have to break or cut them).

Chicken bouillon (optional): Ina uses chicken bouillon for an extra boost of richness and salt, but I ended up not using it because I’d like to have full control over the salt in my recipes. 

Fresh herbs: Fresh thyme and rosemary perfectly balance the meaty overtones of this beef roast with light, earthy flavors. I like to tie them together with kitchen twine so I can remove them easily once everything is cooked.

Unsalted butter (optional): Ina thickens her pot roast with a mix of unsalted butter and flour. I chose to skip this step because my chuck roast already had enough fat. I did not want to make it excessively fatty. Plus, the sauce was perfectly thickened after I pureed most of the vegetables and added the mixture back into the pot.

Equipment You’ll Need and What You Can Use If You Don’t Have Them

Whenever I share a recipe on the blog, I do my best to feature recipes that anyone can make with basic everyday tools in their kitchens. And this beef pot roast recipe is no different. 

However, since I am sharing an original Ina recipe, I wanted to take a moment to list the tools she uses along with some alternatives:

Dutch oven: Ina uses a 7.25 qt. Le Creuset Enameled Cast Iron Signature Round Dutch Oven. You could also use a more cost-effective version, such as this Enameled Cast Iron Dutch Oven

If you don’t have a Dutch oven with a lid, you can sear the meat and saute the vegetables in a large skillet, then roast them in the oven in a large casserole dish. One with a lid is ideal, but otherwise you can use aluminum foil the cover it tightly.

Immersion blender: You will need an immersion blender to make a smooth and creamy sauce, which is key to this roast recipe. 

If you don’t have an immersion blender, you can use a food processor or blender.

Kitchen twine: Twine is necessary to tie the beef and herb bouquet. Tying the meat will help maintain its shape while cooking and ensure it’s evenly roasted.

Kitchen Tongs: A pair of sturdy kitchen tongs is highly recommended for searing and transferring meat.

If you don’t have tongs, you can use two large forks with a spatula, but it would be more difficult.

How to Make Ina Garten’s Pot Roast Recipe (The Foolproof Oven Method)

If you watched Barefoot Contessa make this pot roast recipe on her TV show, you know there are quite a few steps and a bit of waiting while the dish cooks. However, none of the steps is hard. Simply follow my simple instructions and step-by-step photos to make the most tender pot roast of your life:

Step 1 – Preheat the oven to 325°F (165°C).

A person showing how to season and tie a beef chuck roast.

Step 2 – Prepare the meat: Next, pat your beef chuck roast dry on all sides with a sheet of paper towels. Do not skip this step; otherwise, it won’t sear well.

How To Tie a Chuck Roast? If this is your first time working with such a large piece of meat, you might think it’s hard, but it is actually very simple. 

Depending on the size of your roast, you’ll probably need 5-6 pieces of twine just long enough to tie around the meat (Mine were about 20 inches). 

Tie a piece of kitchen string around the center of the meat with a double knot. Move down about one inch and tie another one. Keep doing this until the whole roast is tied up on both sides.

A person making the Barefoot Contessa company pot roast.

Step 3 – Sear the meat: Heat the oil over medium heat in a large Dutch oven. Once it’s hot, cook the beef for 4-5 minutes on each side.

Patience is key here: This process will take about 20 minutes, and you are going to have to turn and hold the meat using kitchen tongs so it browns evenly on all sides. Arguably, this is the most time-consuming part of the recipe, but it is equally important because it builds much of the final flavor.

Carefully, transfer the now-browned meat to a large plate, cover it with aluminum foil, and set it aside. Don’t wash the Dutch oven.

Step 4 – Cook the vegetables: Heat some olive oil in the same Dutch oven and add the chopped carrots, onions, celery, leeks, garlic, salt, and pepper.

Cook until the veggies soften for about 12-15 minutes, stirring often. No need to brown them as they will continue to cook in the oven.

Step 5 – Add liquids: Stir in the wine, brandy (if using), canned tomatoes, and chicken stock. 

Step 6 – Add the beef roast: Carefully transfer the seared meat back to the Dutch oven. Next, make a herb bouquet by tying together fresh thyme and fresh rosemary, and add it to the pan. 

Bring the mixture to a boil, then let it simmer for 12-15 minutes.

Two images showing a beef chuck roast baking in a dutch oven.

Step 7 – Cook the pot roast: Cover the Dutch oven, and place it in the preheated oven. Roast it for 2½ hours or until the meat registers 160°F (71°C).

Caution: During the first 2 ½ hours, do not open the lid, even to take a quick peek. You need to wait for the alcohol to cook (and evaporate) before removing the lid.

Turn the oven temperature down to 250°F (121°C) and let it continue to simmer at that low temperature for an hour.

Checking if your pot roast is done: Throughout the years of making this recipe, I learned that when it comes to checking doneness, it is best to rely on visual cues rather than just the thermometer. 

Perfectly cooked pot roast should be “fork tender”, which means the meat should fall apart easily. To check it safely:

  • Pull out the rack: Carefully slide the oven rack out just a little bit so you can reach the pot easily.
  • Do the fork test: Take two forks and gently poke the meat. Try to pull a small piece away.
    • If it is done, it should slide in like butter, and the meat will fall apart easily. 
    • If it feels firm or tough, it means it needs more time in the oven (no more than 30 minutes to an hour).

Using a thermometer: If you feel more comfortable using a thermometer as a guideline, look for 195-205°F (90-96°C). At this point, the tough parts of the meat should have melted and softened.

Step 8 – Let it rest: Carefully remove the Dutch oven from the oven, open the lid, transfer the pot roast to a cutting board, and loosely cover it with aluminum foil.

Four images showing how to puree a roast made with beef and vegetables.

Step 9 – Purée the sauce: Carefully fish out the herb bundle from the pot. 

Depending on the fattiness of your meat, you may be left with some fat on the surface. Using a large spoon, skim off as much fat as possible (and discard it).

Transfer 3 cups of the sauce and vegetables into a bowl and puree until smooth.

Pro tip: I use an immersion blender to do this, but a food processor fitted with a steel blade or a blender would also work. However, I recommend blending the liquid in smaller batches to avoid spills or worse, burning yourself.

Step 10 – Simmer the sauce: Add the pureed sauce back to the Dutch oven. Place the pot on the stovetop, turn the heat to medium-low, and return to a simmer.

Step 11 – Slice & serve: Remove the twine from the roast and slice the meat. When ready to serve, place two or more slices of roast beef on each dinner plate and spoon the sauce on top.

A company pot roast with herbs and veggies on a plate from the top view.

How to Make this Recipe in a Slow Cooker?

If you prefer not to use the oven, you can also make Barefoot Contessa’s pot roast in a slow cooker. The ingredients and much of the process is the same, with just a few small adjustments to the cooking method:

Step 1 – Prepare the meat: Tie your beef with a kitchen string, season it with salt and pepper, and dredge the whole roast in flour. Then, heat olive oil in a pan over medium heat. 

Sear your meat on all sides for about 4-5 minutes per side, then set it aside under a piece of tin foil. Do not skip this step, as it is a crucial one for building complex flavors.

Step 2 – Cook the veggies: When the olive oil is hot, add your chopped celery stalks, carrots, onions, leeks, garlic, salt, and black pepper. Cook, frequently stirring, for 12-15 minutes until the veggies soften. 

Step 3 – Transfer: Transfer the now-semi-cooked veggies into the slow cooker insert. Stir in the wine, brandy, canned tomatoes, stock, and the herb bouquet. Add the seared roast and cook on low heat for 7-8 hours or on high heat for 6-7 hours.

It should be done when the meat is fork-tender and falls apart when poked with a fork.

Step 4 – Purée the sauce: During the last 30 minutes of cooking, purée 3 cups of the veggies and liquid until smooth. Pour the puréed sauce back into the slow cooker and let it simmer until ready to serve.

Step 5 – Serve: Carefully remove the roast from the slow cooker, slice it, and drizzle each portion with a generous portion of the sauce.

My Best Tips for A Perfect Roast Every Time

Yes, there are quite a few steps and some tending to the stove, but once you get the hang of it and serve it to your friends and family, I know you’ll agree this is truly the best pot roast recipe. 

Below, I am sharing some of the things I learned throughout the years of making this recipe so you can cook safely and succeed on your first try:

Be very careful: This recipe involves searing a large roast, transferring a heavy Dutch oven to the oven, and puréeing hot liquid, so it’s best to move slowly and carefully at each step. 

If you have young children around the kitchen, take extra care during the searing and blending stages. I recommend using oven mitts when handling the pot and being mindful of the hot steam when removing the lid.

While the pot roast is cooking in the oven, keep the lid on for the first couple of hours so the wine (and cognac, if using) can evaporate. 

This recipe makes a lot of sauce: When I first made it, I was a bit surprised by how much liquid I was left with. But that’s totally normal.  The meat needs all that liquid to stay juicy while it cooks.

You use most of it as a sauce, but I usually use the leftovers to make a delicious gravy. Here is how I do it:

  • Strain it: Pour the liquid through a fine mesh strainer to remove the bits of vegetables.
  • Boil it: Pour the liquid into a small saucepan and bring it to a boil.
  • Simmer: Turn the heat down to medium-low and cook for about 20-25 minutes or until it is reduced by half.

This gravy is truly wonderful when served over mashed potatoes, added to beef tacos, or even used as a rich pasta sauce.

I made a few changes to the original recipe: If you are following Ina Garten’s Company Pot Roast recipe from her book and comparing it to mine, you’ll see that I made a few minor adjustments to suit my taste. 

I love her recipe, but after I made it so many times, I found a few ways to make it even better for my taste. Below is what I changed and why:

  • The Salt: I skip the bouillon cube. I think the beef provides enough flavor, and the cube makes it a little too salty for me.
  • The Sauce: I don’t use extra butter or flour to thicken it, as I think it’s already thick enough.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Barefoot Contessa's Company pot roast recipe on a plate from the top view.
Print

Ina Garten’s Pot Roast Recipe (Company Pot Roast)

This Ina Garten Pot Roast recipe is a rich, savory, and elegant dish that's perfect to serve for your next dinner party. In this foolproof guide, I'll teach you how to make it in the oven and in your slow cooker. However you choose to make it, it's sure to impress!
Course Main Dishes
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 5 hours
Total Time 5 hours 30 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 699kcal

Ingredients

For The Roast:

  • 5 pounds boneless beef chuck roast prime or choice (both works)
  • 1 tablespoon kosher salt
  • 1 ½ teaspoons black pepper
  • 5 tablespoons all-purpose flour
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil

For The Vegetables:

  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 2 cups carrots peeled and chopped
  • 2 cups yellow onions chopped
  • 2 cups celery chopped
  • 2 cups chopped leeks chopped (both white and light green parts) or use 1 small chopped onion
  • 1 tablespoon kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • 5 garlic cloves minced
  • 2 cups red wine Burgundy or Chianti
  • 2 tablespoons Cognac or brandy optional
  • 1 large can diced tomatoes (28-ounce)
  • 1 cup chicken stock
  • 3 branches fresh thyme
  • 2 branches fresh rosemary

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 325 degrees F. (163 degrees C.).
  • Place the meat on a cutting board and pat dry with a sheet of paper towel on all sides. Tie meat using kitchen twine. Season it with salt and pepper. Dredge the whole meat in flour, ensuring that all parts are covered with flour. Shake the excess flour.
  • Heat the oil over medium heat in a large Dutch oven. Cook the meat for 4-5 minutes on each side for about 20 minutes in total. Transfer it to a large plate, cover it with aluminum foil, and set it aside. Do not wash the Dutch oven.
  • Heat oil in the now-empty Dutch oven. Place chopped carrots, onions, celery, leeks, garlic, 1 tablespoon salt, and 1 teaspoon black pepper in the Dutch oven. Cook until all vegetables soften, 12-15 minutes, stirring often. You do not want the vegetables to turn brown.
  • Stir in the wine and cognac (if using), followed by tomatoes and chicken stock. Make an herb bouquet by tying thyme and rosemary. Place in the pan.
  • Transfer the roast back to the Dutch oven, bring it to a boil, and let it come to a simmer for 12-15 minutes.
  • Put the lid on and place it in the oven. Roast for 2 ½ hours, or the internal temperature registers 160 degrees F (72 degrees C.) when inserted with a digital thermometer. Next, turn the heat down to 250 F Degrees (or 122 degrees C) and let it simmer at that low temperature for an hour.
  • Carefully remove the pot roast onto a cutting board and cover it loosely with aluminum foil. Discard the bundle of herbs. Using a large spoon, skim off the fat on top of the juices as much as possible.
  • Transfer 3-4 cups of the sauce (about half of the sauce) and vegetables into a bowl and puree until smooth. I used an immersion blender but a food processor fitted with the steel blade or a standing blender would also work.
  • Pour the pureed sauce back into the pot. Put the Dutch oven on the stovetop, turn the heat on to medium-low, and return to a simmer for about 15 minutes.
  • Remove the strings from the roast and slice the meat.
  • When ready to serve, place 2 (or more) slices of meat on a dinner plate and spoon the vegetable sauce over it.

Video

Notes

  • A few changes I made to the original recipe: When I first made this Barefoot Contessa roast, I followed the original recipe to a T. After several times making the dish, I made a few changes to enhance its flavor and texture. For instance, I didn’t add a chicken bouillon cube, which made the sauce too salty for my taste. I also chose not to add flour and butter to thicken the pot roast sauce at the end. I thought that there was enough fat in the liquid even after skimming most of it.
  • Store: To store the leftovers, first bring them to room temperature. Then, portion the roast into your desired number of airtight containers (perfect for meal prep!) and store them in the fridge for up to five days.
  • Reheat: You can reheat the leftovers by placing them in an oven-proof casserole dish and baking them for 20-25 minutes at 350 degrees F. Or, you can reheat your leftovers on the stovetop if desired.
  • Freeze: To freeze, place the meat with some juices in one airtight container and place the sauce in another. Separately freezing these components will ensure easy serving in the future. You can then store your two containers in the freezer for up to 2 months.
  • Thaw: The easiest, safest way to thaw it is to place it in the fridge overnight and reheat it just before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 699kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 57g | Fat: 40g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 22g | Trans Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 197mg | Sodium: 2068mg | Potassium: 1329mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 5874IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 102mg | Iron: 7mg

How to Store and Freeze?

Not only is this pot roast recipe delicious on the day you make it, but its leftovers are just as tasty, if not more. The tips below will help with storing, reheating, and freezing leftovers.

  • Storing: To store the leftovers, first bring them to room temperature. Then transfer to an airtight container and store in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.
  • Reheating: You can reheat the leftovers by placing them in an oven-proof casserole dish and baking them for 20-25 minutes at 350°F (177°C). You can also reheat smaller portions gently on the stovetop.
  • Freezing: To freeze, place the meat with some of the cooking juices in one airtight container and the sauce in another. Freezing them separately makes reheating and serving easier. Store in the freezer for up to 2 months.
  • Thawing: The easiest, safest way to thaw your company pot roast is to place it in the fridge overnight and reheat it just before serving.
A Barefoot Contessa roast on top of mashed potatoes shown from the top view.

What to Serve it With

I’ve shared a full post on my favorite Pot Roast Sides, where you’ll find great side dish ideas to pair with your pot roast. Still, below are a few of my go-to pairings that work especially well with this recipe.

  • Potatoes: Mashed potatoes are a natural pairing with pot roast. Rosemary Mashed Potatoes are a simple option that works well for both weeknights and special occasions, while Mashed Potato Casserole is a good choice if you’re cooking for a crowd. If you’re serving this pot roast for a holiday meal, you can also refer to my Holiday Potato Sides for more ideas.
  • Grains: Egg noodles are a traditional option, but I also like serving this pot roast with Bulgur Pilaf or Wild Rice Pilaf. Both hold up well under the sauce and can be made ahead. Lemon Herb Quinoa is another good option if you prefer a gluten-free side dish.
  • Vegetable sides: Simple vegetable sides balance the richness of the pot roast nicely. Green Beans in the Air Fryer and Pan-Sauteed Asparagus are both easy choices that come together quickly while the roast rests.

FAQs

What cut of beef is best for a pot roast?

Pot roast is best made with cuts of beef that benefit from long, slow cooking. Chuck roast is the most common choice, but London broil or brisket can also be used.

What can I use instead of wine in a pot roast?

You can use an equal amount of chicken or beef stock in place of wine. I also recommend adding a splash of balsamic vinegar or red wine vinegar to mimic the depth and acidity that the wine provides.

Can you overcook pot roast?

Yes, you can overcook it. If the liquid in the pot runs out, the meat will become very dry and hard. Even if there is still liquid, cooking it for too long can make the meat turn to mush.

What cooking method is best for pot roast?

It depends on how hands-on you want the cooking process to be and how much time you have. I prefer making pot roast in the oven because you have more control, especially towards the end during the last hour of simmering. Cooking it in a slow cooker is a more hands-off option and keeps a steady temperature throughout, which works well if you don’t want to monitor the pot as closely.

Other Dinner Recipes To Serve A Crowd

If you enjoyed this Ina Garten pot roast, here are a few more dinner recipes that work well when you’re cooking for a crowd.

  • If you want a quicker pot roast recipe, try my Pressure Cooker Pot Roast recipe. It is ready in under 2 hours and just as delicious.
  • If you’re looking for a comforting pasta dish, my Baked Ziti with Meat is a great option for feeding a crowd and can be made ahead of time.
  • And if you’re planning a more special occasion meal, my Reverse Sear Beef Tenderloin is a reliable choice that cooks evenly and makes a great centerpiece for holidays or dinner parties.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/company-pot-roast/feed/ 43
Reverse Sear Beef Tenderloin https://foolproofliving.com/reverse-sear-beef-tenderloin/ https://foolproofliving.com/reverse-sear-beef-tenderloin/#comments Tue, 20 Dec 2022 21:50:06 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=63310 Ingredients for Reverse Sear Beef Tenderloin Recipe Yes, beef tenderloin is a special cut of beef and will require a…]]>

Why This Reverse Sear Beef Tenderloin Works

Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

For a long time, I was intimidated by cooking beef tenderloin. It is such an expensive cut that I was always worried that I would overcook or undercook it. It is embarrassing to admit that I have had many instances where it was perfectly browned on the outside while the center stayed raw.

Most traditional methods start with high heat and then lower the temperature, which can work, but there is still a good chance of overcooking or not cooking the middle enough.

That is exactly why reverse searing changed everything for me. If you are not familiar, Reverse searing is a two-part method in which you begin cooking using one tool, such as an oven, and finish with another, such as a stovetop. 

In this reverse-sear beef tenderloin recipe, the tenderloin first cooks in a low-temperature oven (225 °F to 300 °F), so it reaches the exact doneness you want without guessing. Then, a quick sear on the stove gives it a deep brown crust without changing the inside. It is more forgiving; you do not have to hover over it, and the results are evenly cooked from edge to center.

Here is why it works:

  • Edge-to-edge pink: Initial slow roasting in a low-temperature oven brings the inside to your exact doneness without overcooking it.
  • Full control: Since we cook the meat in a low-heat oven, you have a wider window to reach your preferred level of doneness. 
  • Better crust: The oven air dries the meat’s surface, and then a quick sear in a hot skillet gives you a perfectly browned crust.

This method is simple, reliable, and grounded in science, first popularized by cooks like J. Kenji López-Alt. Once I learned this method, making beef tenderloin stopped feeling risky and started feeling doable.

If you are ready to try this method, consider this your guide. I will walk you through everything you need to know, from tying the beef properly to choosing the right temperature and how long to cook it, to searing it, and serving suggestions for a showstopping dinner.

Ingredients for Reverse Sear Beef Tenderloin Recipe

Yes, beef tenderloin is a special cut of beef and will require a visit to your local butcher, but the rest of the ingredients are most basic pantry staples.

I listed the full list of ingredients with exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my recipe testing:

Ingredients including chateaubriand, butter and seasoning from the top view.

Beef tenderloin: When shopping for it, you may see this cut labeled “Chateaubriand”. It is the same thing.

A trimmed, center-cut beef tenderloin is ideal because it cooks evenly. If it is not trimmed, you can do it yourself using a sharp knife, but I usually ask the butcher to remove the silver skin and excess fat for me.

How much beef tenderloin should I buy? For a main course, a good rule of thumb is to plan for ½-pound (8 ounces) of meat per person. The 2-pound center-cut roast I have here yielded 8 1 ½-inch slices, with 2 slices of beef tenderloin per person, comfortably feeding 4 adults.

Salt & Pepper: I keep the seasoning simple with salt and pepper, because this luxurious cut does not need much to shine.

A note on salt: I used Diamond kosher salt, which tends to be less salty. If you are using Morton’s kosher salt (another nationwide brand) or table salt, use half as much salt.

Still, if you prefer a more herb-forward seasoning, you can use my prime rib seasoning, made by mixing thyme, rosemary, garlic powder, and salt. It is a great all-purpose beef seasoning that would work well in this recipe.

Unsalted Butter: I use unsalted butter so I can control the amount of salt, but salted butter can be used as well. It is imperative that it is at room temperature so that you can easily spread it over the meat.

Garlic (optional):
I use a couple of cloves of Roasted Garlic to flavor the butter for my Roasted Garlic Butter, which I spread over the meat after it is cooked (right before serving). However, you can use garlic powder if you prefer a milder flavor. If you are short on time, you can skip the garlic and use plain butter instead.

Oil: A neutral, high-smoke-point oil like avocado oil, clarified butter (AKA ghee), or canola oil gives you an even sear without burning. I would recommend avoiding olive oil here because it can smoke too quickly during the hot sear.

Equipment You Will Need

Sheet Pan fitted with a wire rack: Do you need one? No, but would it be nice? Absolutely, yes, because a wire rack elevates the meat, allowing heat to circulate as it cooks. 

Thermometer: The foolproof way to check doneness is using a thermometer. I prefer a probe thermometer for this recipe, as you can leave it inserted in the meat and it will alert you when the meat reaches your desired temperature. Alternatively, you can use an instant-read thermometer.

Kitchen Twine: This is non-negotiable for keeping the roast in a uniform shape from start to finish. Tying the beef ensures it doesn’t spread out, which is the key to getting that consistent, even cook.

How to Reverse Sear Beef Tenderloin (Step-by-Step)

At first, reverse searing might sound like some complicated method, but in reality, it is just a fancy term for cooking the meat in two stages (first in the oven and then on the stovetop). 

Follow the steps below to get the best reverse-seared whole beef tenderloin of your life that is evenly cooked from top to bottom with a rich, brown crust:

A person showing how to prepare beef tenderloin for baking from the top view.

Step 1 – Tie and season the tenderloin: Using kitchen twine, tie the beef tenderloin crosswise at 1½-inch intervals. This is an important step because it helps the tenderloin preserve its shape during cooking, allowing it to cook evenly.

Using a sheet of paper towel, pat the meat dry. Then season it with kosher salt on all sides. 

Step 2 – Let it rest: Place it on a plate, cover lightly with stretch film, and allow it to rest at room temperature for 1 hour. This resting period is important because it allows the salt to penetrate into the meat and ensure a perfectly seasoned meat. It also helps bring the meat close to room temperature before putting it in the oven.

It is optional, but an overnight rest is ideal for the ultimate crust. The extra time spent in the fridge helps draw out the moisture, ensuring a much better sear. 

If you can plan ahead, you can do this overnight or for up to 2 days. After tying and salting the tenderloin, place it, uncovered, on a wire rack in a sheet pan, then refrigerate it.

A person rubbing seasonings and butter on a cut of beef from the top view.

Step 3 – Prep for roasting: Preheat your oven to 300°F (150°C) and set a wire rack over a sheet pan. 

Once the tenderloin has rested, pat it dry again to remove any excess moisture. Season with black pepper, then spread the butter over all its sides. 

Pro Tip: If you have one, I highly recommend inserting a probe thermometer into the meat, as it will eliminate the need to rely on time and will alert you when the meat reaches your desired temperature. 

I like to insert the tip into one end of the meat as far as it goes so the whole probe is in the meat.

If you do not have one, you can use an instant-read thermometer following the timing below.

A person showing how to sear beef tenderloin from the top view.

Step 4 – Roast: Place the tenderloin on the wire rack and cook according to your preferred doneness.

How long does it take to cook a 2-pound beef tenderloin?

  • Rare: Roast for 45 to 55 minutes, or until the internal temperature reaches 125°F (52°C).
  • Medium-rare: Roast for 55 to 65 minutes, or until the internal temperature reaches 135°F (57°C).
  • Medium: Roast for 65 to 75 minutes, or until it reaches 145°F (63°C).

Be sure to flip the roast halfway through to keep the center-cut beef tenderloin evenly cooked.

Once ready, remove the roast from the oven and let it rest for 5-10 minutes. Since it was in such a low-heat oven, it does not need to rest for a long time.

Beef Tenderloin Temperature Guide (Reverse Sear Chart): Reverse searing gives you the most control over doneness, but temperature still matters. Use the chart below to choose the internal temperature that matches your preferred texture. 

These temperatures reflect the final internal temperature after resting, when the meat has finished carryover cooking.

Doneness
Pull Temperature (Remove from Oven)Final Internal Temp (After Rest)Notes
Rare115°F (46°C)125°F (52°C)Soft, bright red center
Medium rare (recommended)120−125°F (49−52°C)135°F (57°C)Best texture with a dark pink center
Medium135°F (57°C)145°F (63°C)Firmer but still tender
Medium-Well145°F (63°C)155°F (68°C)Mostly browned with a hint of pink

Pro Tip: If you are using a probe thermometer, set your alert to 5–10°F (3–6°C) below the final temperature since the tenderloin will continue to warm up as it rests.

Otherwise, if you are using a digital thermometer, you can check doneness by inserting it in the thickest part of the roast.

Step 5 – Sear on all sides: Heat oil in a cast-iron skillet over medium-high heat until the oil is shimmering or almost smoking.

This is important because our goal is to get a quick sear on the outside, and if the skillet is not hot enough, we might risk cooking it for too long and, as a result, increase the internal temperature.

Once the oil is smoking hot, add the tenderloin and sear for 1 to 2 minutes per side (about 5 to 8 minutes total) until you get a deep brown crust. 

Be patient here, let the hot skillet do the work. Do not move the meat too often and rely on visual cues. I like to check it after a full minute to see if it has a nice crust before turning.

A person showing how to slice tenderloin after cooking beef tenderloin in oven.

Step 6 – Rest and serve: Transfer the reverse-seared tenderloin to a cutting board, remove the kitchen twine, and spread it with butter (or roasted garlic butter, if using). Let it rest, uncovered, for 10 to 15 minutes so the juices stay inside.

When ready to serve, slice the meat into ½-inch thick slices. Serve while still warm.

A beef dish with green beans on a serving plate from the top view.

Expert Tips for the Best Reverse Sear Beef Tenderloin

Trim the silver skin: If your tenderloin still has silver skin or thick connective tissue attached, take a moment to remove it, or ask your butcher to do it for you. It’s a small step that makes a big difference in how evenly the meat cooks and how tender each slice turns out.

Tie the roast: A quick tie with butcher’s twine every 1½ inches helps the tenderloin keep its shape. This will keep the thinner ends from overcooking and ensure the whole roast cooks evenly from edge to center.

Don’t skip “the room temperature” rest: Let the meat sit on the counter for a full hour before roasting. This ensures the center isn’t ice-cold when it hits the oven, leading to much more even doneness.

Pat the meat dry: Before you season or sear, make sure the surface is nice and dry. This helps the butter stick and gives you that beautiful, golden crust we all love.

Handling larger roasts: If your beef tenderloin is larger than 2 lbs., I recommend cutting it into 2 lb. pieces and roasting them side-by-side on a wire rack. Any loin 4 lbs. or greater won’t sear properly, so this slicing step will help your meat cook on the stovetop.

Don’t cover the tenderloin beef with tin foil while resting: Once you remove the roast tenderloin from the stovetop, there’s no need to cover it with aluminum foil. Covering the meat will trap heat, raise the beef tenderloin’s temperature, and potentially overcook its pink center.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
A reverse sear roast beef tenderloin on a plate from the top view.
Print

Reverse Sear Beef Tenderloin Recipe

This Reverse Sear Roast Beef Tenderloin recipe is a go-to elegant dish for any special occasion. The reverse sear method, which involves cooking in the oven and then searing on the stove, yields tender, perfectly edge-to-edge pink slices of beef tenderloin every time.
Course Main Course
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour
Resting Time 8 hours
Total Time 9 hours 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 673kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds beef tenderloin preferably center-cut aka Chateaubriand
  • 2 teaspoons kosher salt *1 or 1 teaspoon table salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter at room temperature (divided)
  • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil such as avocado oil

Instructions

  • Using kitchen twine, tie beef tenderloin crosswise at 1 ½ inch intervals.
  • Pat dry with paper towels on all sides. Sprinkle it evenly with kosher salt. *2
  • Transfer onto a plate, cover it with stretch film and let it sit on the counter at room temperature for one hour.
  • Preheat oven to 300°F (150°C). Place a wire rack in a sheet pan and set it aside.
  • Pat dry the now-rested beef tenderloin. Sprinkle it with black pepper and spread it with butter on all sides, ensuring it's evenly distributed. Transfer it onto the wire rack.
  • Roast for 45-55 minutes or until the thickest part of the meat registers 125°F (52°C) (for rare) on a digital thermometer, or 55-65 minutes or until the internal temperature is 135°F (57°C) (for medium-rare). Be sure to flip the roast halfway through the roasting process.
  • Remove from the oven and let it rest 5-10 minutes, uncovered, on the counter.
  • Heat oil in a large skillet (or a cast iron skillet) over medium-high heat until smoking hot. Sear tenderloin on all four sides for 1 to 2 minutes on each side (for a total of 5 to 8 minutes) until browned.
  • Transfer the seared onto a cutting board and spread with the remaining 2 tablespoons of butter. Let it rest, uncovered, for 10-15 minutes.
  • Remove kitchen twine and slice it in ½-inch thick slices. Serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This reverse sear tenderloin recipe yields between eight to nine 1½-inch pieces. If you serve two slices per person, you should be able to feed four people using this recipe.
  • *1 Salt: This recipe uses Diamond Kosher Salt (affiliate link.) If you are using Morton’s kosher salt, table salt, or sea salt, please use half the amount listed in the recipe card below.
  • *2 Overnight rest: If you have the time, at this stage, you can transfer the meat to a sheet pan fitted with a wire rack and store it in the fridge, uncovered, overnight or for up to 2 days.
  • Store: Bring the sliced meat to room temperature. Then, place it in the fridge in an airtight container for up to four days.
  • To reheat
    • Remove the sliced tenderloin from the fridge and let it reach room temperature (10-15 minutes). 
    • Meanwhile, preheat the oven to 275°F (135°C).
    • While the oven heats, place the tenderloin slices on a sheet of aluminum foil and drizzle them with a few tablespoons of cooking juices or beef stock. Wrap the beef loosely, fully covering each slice. 
    • Roast the wrapped tenderloin in the preheated oven for 10-15 minutes or until the meat’s internal temperature registers 135°F (57°C) with a meat thermometer. 
    • Let it rest for 5 minutes, unwrap, and serve.
  • Roasted Garlic Butter: In an earlier version of this recipe, I used my roasted garlic butter to coat the meat after searing. I removed it because it is an extra step. Still, if you prefer that way, you can make a batch of my Roasted Garlic Butter to use as the final butter coating.

Nutrition

Calories: 673kcal | Carbohydrates: 0.3g | Protein: 41g | Fat: 55g | Saturated Fat: 24g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 22g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 174mg | Sodium: 1275mg | Potassium: 698mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 0.01g | Vitamin A: 178IU | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 5mg

How to Store and Reheat Leftovers

This reverse-sear beef tenderloin is so tender and flavorful that you will want to enjoy every slice, and proper storage will keep it tasting just as good the next day. 

  • Store: Bring the sliced meat to room temperature. Then, place it in the fridge in an airtight container for up to four days.
  • To reheat: When reheating, the goal is to warm the meat gently without overcooking it and to maintain the crusty exterior and a soft pink interior. So, to reheat:
    • Remove the sliced chateaubriand from the fridge and let it reach room temperature (10-15 minutes). 
    • Meanwhile, preheat the oven to 275°F (135°C).
    • While the oven heats, place the meat on a sheet of aluminum foil and drizzle it with a few tablespoons of cooking juices or beef stock. Wrap the beef loosely, fully covering each slice. 
    • Roast the wrapped tenderloin in the preheated oven for 10-15 minutes or until the internal temperature of the meat registers 135°F (57°C)  with a meat thermometer. 
    • Let it rest for 5 minutes, unwrap, and serve.

Pro tip: If you prefer not to use aluminum foil, wrap your beef with parchment paper before adding a layer of foil.

FAQs

Should I dry-brine beef tenderloin?

Yes! Dry brining beef tenderloin is an easy way to remove excess moisture and add flavor to the meat. I recommend salting right after pat-drying the raw beef tenderloin thoroughly.

Can I make this recipe a day in advance?

You can prep the roast (trim and tie) and salt it 48 hours before. If you have to cook it a day in advance, you can cook it to your desired temperature, bring to room temperature, and then store it in the fridge in an airtight container. You can reheat it using my low-oven method.

What if I am using a larger beef tenderloin?

Yes. If yours is bigger than 2 pounds, I recommend cutting it into 2-pound sections and roasting them side by side on the wire rack. Smaller pieces cook more evenly and fit better in a skillet for searing. And when it comes to searing, I would recommend doing it one at a time.

How much beef tenderloin should I buy to serve four people?

Two pounds of meat should be enough for four adults, with each person getting ½ pound of beef tenderloin.

What to Serve with Beef Tenderloin

You can pair your reverse-sear tenderloin roast with a variety of simple sides, sauces, and vegetables to build the perfect dinner menu. Whether you are cooking for a special occasion or planning what to serve with beef tenderloin for your Christmas dinner, these recipes round out the meal beautifully:

Sauces: You can use store-bought horseradish cream sauce, but why not make it at home? My Homemade Horseradish Sauce takes 5 minutes to make, and if you prefer a lighter version, my Horseradish Yogurt Sauce tastes just as good.

Potatoes: No celebratory dinner feels complete without potatoes. My Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes or my Rosemary Mashed Potatoes are both perfect sides. If you are serving this for a holiday meal, you can also browse my full collection of Holiday Potato Recipes for roasted, crispy, buttery, or cheesy options to match any menu.

Salads: A fresh salad helps balance the richness of the tenderloin. My Warm Goat Cheese Salad adds creaminess and crunch, while this Beet and Goat Cheese Salad brings color and earthy sweetness to the table.

Vegetables: Simple vegetable sides always complement beef tenderloin. Try my Garlic Butter Green Beans for something quick,  Roasted Asparagus for a classic pairing, or these Maple Balsamic Brussels Sprouts for a slightly sweet, caramelized contrast.

Soups: If you want to start the meal with something cozy, serve a bowl of Chestnut Soup or my Shiitake Mushroom Soup, both of which work beautifully before a tenderloin dinner.

Stuffing: If you are serving this for your Christmas dinner, then I highly recommend my Chestnut Stuffing.

A close-up of cooked sliced beef on a plate from the side view.

Other Special Occasion Beef Recipes

If you enjoyed this beef tenderloin, I think you might like these other restaurant-quality dishes that are just as reliable and impressive.

  • If you want another showstopping centerpiece, my Reverse Sear Prime Rib is always my go-to. I used the same two-step cooking method to get perfectly cooked, juicy prime rib every time.
  • If you prefer individual steaks, my Reverse Sear Filet Mignon is another foolproof recipe that applies the same technique but takes less than half the time.
  • If you want something cozy but still elevated, my Pressure Cooker Pot Roast is a great option that delivers deep, slow-cooked flavor in a fraction of the time. 
  • If you’re in the mood for something rich and savory, try my Braised Short Ribs in Beer. The meat slowly cooks in a mixture of spices, aromatics, and beer until it becomes fall-apart tender with very little hands-on time.

This post includes Amazon links, and as an Amazon Associate, I may earn commissions if you make a purchase using my links at no cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/reverse-sear-beef-tenderloin/feed/ 8
How To Make Beef Gravy https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-beef-gravy/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-beef-gravy/#comments Tue, 15 Nov 2022 19:04:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=61843 Mixed with bold garlic and hearty beef broth, this homemade beef gravy makes a decadent addition to mashed potatoes, steak,…]]>

Mixed with bold garlic and hearty beef broth, this homemade beef gravy makes a decadent addition to mashed potatoes, steak, meatloaf, and dozens of other beef dishes.

Making brown gravy with beef broth is a surefire way to add a creamy, seasoned taste to dozens of tasty dishes. My easy beef gravy pairs with everything from roast beef to Rosemary Mashed Potatoes to beef tenderloin, and it only takes minutes to make. Say goodbye to stressful holiday dinner prep and start making gravy using my easy recipe.

A person ladling gravy over mashed potatoes from the side view.

Before we start, please note that people refer to beef gravy using various terms, such as brown gravy, dark gravy, and beef stock gravy. Essentially, all these terms refer to the same thing, which is gravy made with beef stock, broth, or pan drippings leftover from cooking beef. 

Ingredients

To make this homemade brown gravy recipe, you only need a handful of simple ingredients that you probably already have in your pantry. I prefer to prepare this dish with Low-Sodium Beef Broth (affiliate link), though you can also use my recipe for homemade Chicken Stock in a pinch and skip the grocery store altogether. 

Ingredients for a gravy made of beef broth from the top view.

You can also use beef stock instead of beef broth if you prefer making gravy from beef stock. Beef stock tends to have a thicker, milder flavor than beef broth, but you can use the two interchangeably in this recipe.

  • To make beef gravy with cornstarch: To make this quick gravy, you’ll need cornstarch, butter, beef broth, garlic powder, onion powder, kosher salt, and black pepper. And if you need to make this recipe gluten-free, you can use arrowroot starch instead of cornstarch.
  • To make brown broth gravy with flour, simply use the same ingredients except for all-purpose flour instead of cornstarch. You may also use gluten-free flour for a gluten-free gravy recipe.
  • Homemade beef gravy with drippings: If you prefer making gravy from drippings, save the drippings from a pot roast, steak, beef roast, prime rib, beef tenderloin, or another beef dish for future use. Then, for every 2 cups of broth, use 2-3 tablespoons of pan juices instead of butter. In some cases, you might not have as much at the bottom of the pan. If that is the case, you can use a combination of butter and pan drippings.
  • Beef gravy with bouillon: No beef broth? No problem! You can easily make beef gravy with bouillon cubes instead of broth. I recommend using one beef bouillon cube or one teaspoon of Better Than Boullion (affiliate link) for every cup of hot water. To give your make-ahead beef gravy recipe extra rich flavor, you can also use an equal mix of beef and chicken bouillon.

Optional Seasoning Ideas:

When it comes to seasoning beef gravy, you have several options. Here are some of my favorites:

  • Fresh herbs: Add an exquisite, garden-fresh flavor by infusing your gravy with a bouquet of fresh herbs, like thyme, sage, parsley, and rosemary. 
  • Switch up the fat: You can also use bacon fat instead of unsalted butter for extra savoriness. Or, give bold depth by adding smoky Roasted Garlic or creamy Garlic Butter.
  • Worcestershire sauce: I use Worcestershire sauce as my secret ingredient for its sweet, vinegary undertones and umami flavors. However, you can omit it and add a splash of soy sauce, wine, or sherry as a substitute to provide a similar depth of flavor. Another option is to add ½ teaspoon of Dijon mustard for a hint of tangy, sharp notes.

How to Make Brown Gravy Without Drippings?

Most people make brown gravy from pot roast, steak, beef tenderloin, and even bacon drippings. However, there are dozens of other tasty solutions if you don’t have drippings. For me, this is usually the case when I want to make it ahead of time and have it ready for serving. 

Below, you’ll find two methods to make a homemade beef gravy recipe without drippings. The first is made with flour and the second is made with cornstarch:

Using Flour

If you’re a fan of bold flavor, making gravy with beef broth and flour is the way to go. Slightly browned butter gives the mixture a rich, caramelized flavor, while its flour base helps the classic brown gravy store and reheat better.

The most important thing when it comes to making DIY beef gravy with flour is to thoroughly cook the butter and flour before adding the remaining ingredients. If you skip this step, you will end up with beef gravy with raw flour taste, and let’s face it, no one wants that. 

A person showing how to make beef gravy with flour from the top view.
  1. Prepare the flour roux: Melt the butter over medium heat in a medium saucepan or skillet. Then, add the all-purpose flour to the pan and cook, constantly whisking, until the flour mixture turns light golden brown (~3 minutes). The secret here is to be patient as you constantly whisk the mixture with a wire whisk (affiliate link). Initially the mixture will clump up and collect on the whisk, but it should loosen and turn brown as you continue whisking.
  2. Thicken the beef broth: Pour the beef broth into the pan, ¼ cup at a time. Whisk it thoroughly after each pour. Once you add the beef broth, continue to whisk the liquid until it thickens (3-4 minutes).
  3. Add seasoning: Stir in the seasonings. Taste your beef broth flour gravy and add in more as necessary.
  4. Simmer the beef stock gravy: Turn the heat to medium-low and let it simmer for 5-7 minutes, stirring occasionally.

Using Cornstarch

Making beef gravy with cornstarch from scratch is quicker and easier. You use the same set of ingredients, except that you substitute plain flour with cornstarch.

A person whisking gravy on the stove from the top view.
  1. Boil the mixture: Melt butter in a medium-sized saucepan over medium-high heat. Once melted, stir in the beef broth, Worcestershire sauce, and seasonings. Bring the beef mixture to a boil, then let it simmer for 2-3 minutes, stirring occasionally.
A person showing how to make brown gravy from scratch on the stove.
  1. Prepare a cornstarch slurry: While it simmers, place the cornstarch in a medium-sized ramekin or measuring bowl. Then, transfer 4 tablespoons of the hot liquid to the ramekin and whisk it until it forms a paste. If it doesn’t form a paste right away, you can add more liquid until it does.
  2. Thicken the beef base gravy: While whisking constantly, slowly pour the cornstarch paste into the beef mixture. Continue stirring until the gravy reaches your desired consistency (2-3 minutes). Keep a close eye on it, as this happens quickly. Please note that heating beef gravy with cornstarch for too long will thin it out. So, it is best to remove it from the heat as soon as it reaches your desired level of thickness. If it thins out, you can thicken it by making a small amount of cornstarch slurry and stirring it into the gravy.
  3. Serve: Transfer the quick beef gravy into a cup or gravy boat and use it in your recipe.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Thaw

Make-ahead beef gravy is a boon for easy meal prep and hassle-free storage. After just one go, you’ll be making gravy from beef broth all year round, from holiday gatherings to weeknight dinners. 

  1. Make ahead: You can make this brown beef gravy up to three days ahead of time. Be sure to let it reach room temperature before transferring it to an airtight container and storing it in the fridge until ready to use.
  2. Reheat: To reheat, microwave it in 30-second increments (making sure to stir after each time) until it reaches your desired temperature. You could also heat it over the stovetop, mixing regularly. Another crowd-friendly option is to heat it in the oven alongside other dishes like turkey or beef roast. Remember that you might need to add more beef stock or water if your gravy is too thick.
  3. Store: To store leftovers, let them reach room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3-4 days.
  4. Freeze: You can freeze it in an airtight container in the freezer for up to 2 months. When ready to use, thaw it overnight in the fridge.

Expert Tips

Making brown gravy from scratch is the easiest way to transform simple ingredients into an irresistible condiment to serve along with your favorite dishes. With a few tips and a few minutes, you can make this easy brown gravy recipe like a pro.

  • Your gravy will thicken: Keep in mind that this basic beef gravy recipe will thicken as it sits. If your mixture becomes too thick, you can add a splash of beef stock or cold water while reheating it. 
  • Taste for seasoning: The key to making homemade brown gravy super flavorful is to ensure that it is properly seasoned. So, be sure to give it a taste and add extra seasoning as necessary. You may also enhance its flavor by adding other seasonings like fresh herbs or a splash of wine.
  • Lumpy gravy: You should not end up with lumpy gravy if you are whisking it constantly. However, if your brown gravy sauce ends up having chunks of flour or cornstarch, don’t worry. You can remove them by processing the gravy with an immersion blender or running it through a strainer. 
  • The best equipment to use: When making beef gravy from scratch, it’s important to have the right equipment. If you choose to make brown gravy with cornstarch, I recommend using a medium saucepan (affiliate link). However, I suggest using a stainless steel skillet (affiliate link) to make beef gravy with flour, as you’ll need a wide area for browning your butter and making the roux. You’ll also need a roasting pan to prepare brown gravy with drippings.
Mashed potatoes topped with beef gravy in a bowl from the top view.

Where to Use Dark Gravy?

Using beef gravy for mashed potatoes and steak is a classic, but why stop there? Here are a few other dishes that you can pair with this tasty homemade gravy:

  • Potato dishes: The rich flavor of creamy beef gravy makes it the perfect topping for potato-based dishes like Rosemary Mashed Potatoes and Mashed Potato Casserole. You can also serve easy homemade beef gravy with French fries for an effortless take on classic poutine.
  • Beef recipes: It should come as no surprise that gravy made from beef stock makes an excellent pair with—what else?—beef! Satisfy your comfort food cravings by serving this easy recipe with meatloaf, Pot Roast, or Instant Pot Pot Roast. Or, transform your kitchen into a five-star restaurant by serving this traditional beef gravy alongside steak, beef tenderloin, Salisbury steak, or even prime rib.
  • Poultry: With a gorgeous brown color and well-seasoned taste, this simple recipe is great alternative to turkey gravy and makes a great gravy for dozens of poultry dishes. Serve this easy homemade brown gravy with Turkey Meatloaf, Bone-in Chicken Breast, or Baked Turkey Tenderloin for a hearty weeknight meal.

FAQs

What is beef gravy made of?

Beef gravy ingredients generally include cornstarch or flour, butter, and beef stock as a base. If you need to make beef gravy without beef broth, you can also make it using bouillon cubes instead. After preparing the gravy base, seasonings often include onion and garlic powder, salt, and black pepper.

How to thicken beef broth for gravy?

To make thick gravy, add more cornstarch (in the form of a water-cornstarch slurry) to the pan and whisk the mixture until thoroughly blended. You could also reduce it by cooking it a little longer at a constant heat.

What to add to gravy to make it taste better?

In addition to seasoning it with garlic powder, onion powder, and salt, you can add robust, rich flavor with other ingredients like Roasted Garlic, Garlic Butter, fresh herbs, and ground spices such as ground cumin and coriander. You can also use bacon fat instead of butter or add a splash of wine for a more complex palate.

What’s the difference between brown gravy and beef gravy?

Brown gravy is a term that is more of a general term for gravy made using meat drippings such as beef, pork, or chicken. On the other hand, beef gravy is gravy made using beef drippings or beef broth as the base of the recipe.

Can I Use Beef Stock Instead of Beef Broth?

Yes, beef stock and broth can be used interchangeably in this recipe.

Other Beef Recipes You Might Like

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Beef Gravy recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Gravy in a ladle over a pot from the side view.
Print

Beef Gravy Recipe

Learn How to Make Beef Gravy with this simple recipe for rich, bold gravy you can pour over a variety of recipes. You can make gravy with either cornstarch or flour, and we'll teach you how to do both! Pick your favorite method and whip it up it only 10 minutes.
Course Condiment/Sauce
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4
Calories 97kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • ¼ cup cornstarch* or all-purpose flour
  • 2 cups beef broth

Seasonings:

  • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce optional
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt plus more to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

To Make Brown Gravy Using Flour:

  • Make the roux: Melt butter in a medium saucepan or skillet over medium heat. Add the all-purpose flour and cook, whisking constantly, for about three minutes or until it turns light golden brown.*
  • Add the broth: Slowly pour in the beef broth ¼ cup at a time while whisking well after each addition. Once you incorporate all of the beef broth, continue to whisk until it starts to thicken, which happens within the next 3-4 minutes.
  • Add additional ingredients: Stir in the Worcestershire sauce, if using. Season it with garlic powder, onion powder, and salt and pepper. Taste for seasoning and add in more if necessary.
  • Simmer: Turn the heat down to medium-low and let it simmer for about 5-7 minutes, stirring occasionally.

To Make Beef Gravy Using Cornstarch:

  • Combine ingredients: In a medium-sized saucepan over medium-high heat, heat butter until melted. Stir in the beef broth, Worcestershire sauce (if using), garlic powder, onion powder, salt, and pepper. Bring to a boil and let it simmer for 2-3 minutes while stirring occasionally.
  • Make the slurry: Meanwhile, place cornstarch in a medium size ramekin (or a measuring bowl). Carefully add 4 tablespoons of the hot liquid and whisk until it forms a paste.
  • Thicken the gravy: Slowly pour the cornstarch slurry into the beef mixture while constantly whisking it. Continue to whisk until it reaches your desired consistency, about 2-3 minutes. This happens so fast, so do not leave it unattended.
  • Serve: Pour into a cup and use it in your recipe.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 1/2 cups of gravy, which is ideal for four servings. However, the recipe can be multiplied if needed. The nutritional values are per serving. 
  • Cooking butter and flour: Be patient when whisking together the butter and flour. Initially the mixture will clump up and collect on the whisk, but it should loosen and melt as you continue whisking. 
  • Color: If you are after the rich dark brown color of beef gravy, you can also add in a small cube of bouillon or a teaspoon of Better Than Boullion.
  • Make ahead: You can make this beef gravy up to three days ahead of time. Be sure to bring it to room temperature, transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge until ready to use.
  • Reheat: When it comes to reheating, you have three options:
    • Microwave: Reheat in the microwave in 30-second increments (making sure to stir after each time) until it reaches your desired temperature. 
    • Stovetop: Reheat in a saucepan over medium-low heat, stirring regularly.
    • Oven: Reheat it in the oven alongside other dishes like turkey or beef roast. Remember that you might need to add more beef stock or water if your gravy is too thick.
  • Store: To store leftovers, let them reach room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3-4 days.
  • Freeze: You can freeze it in an airtight container for up to 2 months. When ready to use, thaw it overnight in the fridge.

Nutrition

Calories: 97kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 649mg | Potassium: 116mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 0.5g | Vitamin A: 179IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 17mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-beef-gravy/feed/ 4
Thai Steak and Noodle Salad https://foolproofliving.com/thai-grilled-beef-and-herb-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/thai-grilled-beef-and-herb-salad/#comments Mon, 15 Aug 2022 16:29:11 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=10156 I absolutely adore all of my Asian recipes. Some of the most noteworthy include Thai Butternut Squash Soup, Asian Quinoa…]]>

I absolutely adore all of my Asian recipes. Some of the most noteworthy include Thai Butternut Squash Soup, Asian Quinoa Salad, and Thai Beef Curry in Slow Cooker. But I must admit, this easy Thai beef noodle salad tops all of my summer salads.

a close-up of Thai beef noodle salad from the top view

Why Should You Try This Recipe?

I can assure you that you are going to fall in love with this Thai beef salad with noodles upon the first bite. I know you’ll love it because:

  • Crunch, crunch and more crunch. The more texture there is in my salad, the more crave-able they become. This has all the crunch, along with some creamy, too.
  • Balanced and flavorful. It has a little bit of everything – sweet, savory, salty, spicy, sour, and that special umami essence you just can’t put your finger on. And the beef is phenomenal here. It is first soaked in a flavor-packed marinade, then quickly cooked on the grill or stovetop. You will be making this beef noodle salad all summer long!
  • Easy to make ahead. The steak, dressing, and noodles can all be made ahead. This means all that’s left to do is some chopping and tossing come serving time.

Ingredients

The ingredients for this Asian steak noodle salad are broken down into a few parts – steak marinade, salad dressing, noodles, and salad.

ingredients for Asian steak noodle salad from the top view

For the steak marinade, you will need fresh ginger, garlic clove, soy sauce, coconut sugar, fresh lime juice, fish sauce, black pepper, olive oil, toasted sesame oil, NY strip steak, and Kosher salt.

ingredients for the dressing for beef Thai salad from the top view

For the Thai dressing, gather together fresh lime juice, hot chili paste, avocado oil, fish sauce, raw sugar, and honey.

ingredients for steak Thai salad in bowls from the top view

For the noodles and salad, you will need ramen noodles, toasted sesame oil, large mango, arugula, carrots, scallions, savoy cabbage, tomatoes, avocado, cilantro, basil leaves, mint leaves, salted peanuts, and lime wedges.

Substitutions and Helpful Ingredient Notes

  • Soy Free: Replace the soy sauce with an equal amount of coconut aminos or tamari.
  • Sugar: Replace the coconut sugar with light brown sugar for the marinade and use regular granulated sugar in place of the cane sugar for the dressing.
  • Steak: Use your favorite cut of steak, such as NY strip steak, sirloin steaks, Filet Mignon, flank steak, or skirt steak. Note cooking times will vary.
  • Hot Chili Paste: My favorite chile paste is Sambal Oelek, easily found in the global/international food section.
  • Noodles: Replace the ramen with thin rice noodles, like vermicelli or lo mein noodles.
  • Fruit: If mango is unavailable, swap it out for pineapple or mandarin oranges.
  • Greens: Go the Houston’s route and swap out the arugula for watercress instead.
  • Cabbage: If you can’t find savoy cabbage (a bit milder and sweeter), regular green cabbage can be substituted.
  • Tomatoes: Replace the tomato with 1 cup cherry tomatoes.
  • Peanut Free: If you or your friends have a slight aversion to peanuts, crunchy and salted almonds are the next best thing. Sesame seeds are a great sub, as well.

How to Make

Houston’s Thai steak noodle salad recipe takes some prep work and an overnight marinade, but your patience will be rewarded. Here’s how I like to do it:

person showing how to marinate steak for Thai beef salad noodles
  1. Prepare marinade: In a small bowl, whisk together the ginger, garlic, soy sauce, sugar, lime juice, fish sauce, black pepper, olive oil, and toasted sesame oil. Pour into an airtight container with a lid or a large resealable plastic bag. Place the steak in the marinade (or a small resealable plastic bag) and give it a gentle toss to ensure all parts of the steak are coated. Seal and let it marinate for 6-12 hours.
  2. Prepare steak: Remove the steak from the marinade and place it onto a large plate lined with paper towels. Pat dry with another paper towel to remove the excess liquid. Discard marinade. Season with salt on both sides.
  3. Grill steak: Preheat a gas grill to 450 degrees Fahrenheit. Grill, flipping the steak a few times during cooking until lightly charred on both sides. Check for doneness by inserting a thermometer (affiliate link) into the thickest part of the steak. Pull it off when it registers 120 degrees Fahrenheit for medium-rare or 130 degrees Fahrenheit for medium, depending on your desired degree. This takes about 9-11 minutes in total. Once off the grill, tent with aluminum foil. Allow it to rest on a cutting board for 10 minutes. Then, slice into 1-inch thick slices or cubes right before serving.
person showing how to make dressing and noodles for Thai steak salad recipe
  1. Make the salad dressing: In a small bowl or mason jar, whisk together lime juice, hot chili paste, avocado oil, fish sauce, sugar, and honey. Give it a taste and add more salt if needed.
  2. Cook noodles: Bring a small pot of water to a boil. Cook noodles for 3 minutes, or according to package directions. Drain and transfer to a large salad bowl. Drizzle with the sesame oil and give it a gentle toss to coat.
person showing how to make salad for steak noodle salad
  1. Assemble salad: Place the mango, arugula, shredded carrots, scallions, finely shredded savoy cabbage, and tomatoes in the bowl with the noodles. Drizzle with the dressing and toss to combine. Finish with the sliced steak, avocado, fresh cilantro, basil, mint, and peanuts. Gently toss and divide amongst four plates. Serve with lime wedges on the side.

What to Serve it With?

This Thai steak salad recipe needs nothing more than some company to share it with. Serve it as:

How to Store

This beef Thai salad will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. After the 2-day mark, the vegetables break down and become mushy.

Thai beef salad with noodles on a plate from the top view

Expert Tips

  • Marinate the steak the night before. The steak can sit in the marinade for up to 12 hours without it affecting the texture.
  • Prepare steak, dressing, and noodles up to 2 days in advance. Grill the steak, mix the dressing, and boil the noodles. Store each in their own airtight container in the fridge. This salad (including the meat) can be served at room temperature. However, if you prefer, you can lightly warm up the grilled meat before assembling the salad.
  • Use a stovetop grill pan. Grill the steak on an indoor grill pan or cast-iron skillet instead.

Other Thai Cuisine Recipes You’ll Enjoy:

If you try this Thai Steak and Noodle Salad recipe or any other beef recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

This recipe is adapted from Bon Appetit’s Thai Steak Noodle Recipe.

Houston's Thai Steak Salad in an oval plate from the top view
Print

Thai Steak and Noodle Salad Recipe

This Thai Steak and Noodle Salad is colorful, refreshing, and bursting with all the Asian flavors you love. This Houston's copycat summer salad combines a fresh herb and veggie base with sweet-spicy Thai dressing and perfectly marinated steak. Serve it as a complete meal next time you're craving Thai cuisine!
Course Salad
Cuisine Thai Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Marinading time 6 hours
Total Time 6 hours 50 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 981kcal

Ingredients

For The Steak Marinade:

  • 1 tablespoon grated fresh ginger from a 1 inch piece ginger
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • ¼ cup soy sauce
  • 3 tablespoons coconut sugar or light brown sugar
  • 2 tablespoons fresh lime juice
  • 1 tablespoon fish sauce
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon toasted sesame oil
  • 1 pound New York Strip Steak or Filet Mignon Steak – 1 inch thick
  • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt

Salad Dressing:

  • ¼ cup fresh lime juice
  • ¼ cup hot chili paste such as sambal oelek
  • ¼ cup avocado oil or any other tasteless vegetable oil
  • 1 clove of garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons fish sauce
  • 2 tablespoons cane sugar or granulated sugar
  • 1 tablespoon honey

For The Noodles:

  • 2 oz. dried ramen noodles seasoning package discarded
  • ½ teaspoon toasted sesame oil

For The Salad:

  • 1 ripe mango peeled, cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 1 cup arugula washed and rinsed
  • 2 carrots peeled and shredded
  • 2 green onions sliced thinly
  • 2 cups savoy cabbage sliced thinly – or green cabbage
  • 1 cup chopped tomatoes from 1 large tomato
  • 1 ripe avocado cut into cubes
  • ½ cup fresh cilantro roughly chopped
  • ½ cup fresh basil leaves torn
  • ¼ cup fresh mint leaves torn
  • ½ cup salted peanuts roughly chopped
  • Lime wedges for serving on the side

Instructions

  • To make the marinade: Whisk together ginger, garlic, soy sauce, sugar, lime juice, fish sauce, black pepper, olive oil, and toasted sesame oil in a bowl. Transfer it to an airtight container with a lid or pour it into a resealable plastic bag. Place the steak in the marinade, seal, and let it marinate for at least 6 hours or up to 12 hours.
  • When you are ready to cook the meat, remove it from the marinade onto a large plate lined with paper towels and pat dry to remove the excess liquid. Season lightly with ¼ teaspoon kosher salt.
  • To cook the steak: Preheat a gas grill* to 450 degrees. Grill, turning a few times until lightly charred on both sides and a thermometer inserted in the thickest part of the steak registers 120 degrees F for medium-rare or 130 degrees F for medium. This takes about 9-11 minutes in total. Cover it with aluminum foil, and let it rest on a cutting board for 10 minutes. Cut it into 1-inch pieces right before serving the salad.
  • To make the salad dressing: Whisk together lime juice, hot chili paste, avocado oil, garlic, fish sauce, sugar, and honey in a bowl. Give it a taste and add more salt if needed. Set it aside.
  • To cook the noodles: Cook noodles in a small pot of boiling water for 3 minutes. Drain and transfer to a large bowl. Drizzle with sesame oil and give it a toss.
  • To assemble the salad: Place the mango, arugula, shredded carrots, scallions, cabbage, and tomatoes in the bowl with the noodles. Drizzle it with the prepared dressing. Give it a gentle toss to combine.
  • Add sliced steak, avocado, fresh cilantro, basil, mint, and peanuts. Gently toss to combine.
  • Divide amongst four plates and serve with wedges of lime on the side.

Notes

  • *You can cook the steak on the stovetop in a grill pan or cast-iron skillet.
  • Storing leftovers: This salad will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. After the 2-day mark, the vegetables break down and become mushy.

Nutrition

Calories: 981kcal | Carbohydrates: 66g | Protein: 37g | Fat: 68g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 39g | Cholesterol: 91mg | Sodium: 2535mg | Potassium: 1558mg | Fiber: 12g | Sugar: 33g | Vitamin A: 7623IU | Vitamin C: 82mg | Calcium: 168mg | Iron: 5mg

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/thai-grilled-beef-and-herb-salad/feed/ 19
Avocado Bacon Burger https://foolproofliving.com/guacamole-burgers/ https://foolproofliving.com/guacamole-burgers/#comments Wed, 13 Jul 2022 16:13:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=12004 If you think that nothing beats a homemade burger be sure to also try our Ground Lamb Burgers with Tzatziki…]]>

If you think that nothing beats a homemade burger be sure to also try our Ground Lamb Burgers with Tzatziki and Bulgur Wheat Burgers.

Avocado bacon burger from the front view.

Ingredients

To make this bacon avocado cheeseburger recipe, you will need three sets of ingredients:

ingredients for guac and turkey bacon from the top view
  1. To make the 4 Ingredient Guacamole Recipe, you will need garlic, lime juice, kosher salt, and ripe avocados.
  2. For the turkey bacon, you will need one 8-oz. package of turkey bacon. You can choose to make your turkey bacon in an air fryer or the oven.
ingredients for guac bacon burger from the top view
  1. For the burger patties, gather organic ground beef, Worcestershire sauce, garlic powder, paprika, kosher salt, black pepper, vegetable oil, burger buns, and lettuce leaves. You can also choose to add sliced cheddar cheese.

Substitutions

  • Bacon: I top my guacamole burger with turkey bacon, but you can also use traditional pork bacon. For an expert guide to cooking strips of bacon, check out this recipe for perfectly crisp Oven-Baked Bacon.
  • Avocados: Don’t want to spend extra time preparing burger toppings? Skip the guac and top your burgers with avocado slices or mashed avocados. Placing avocado on a burger will give it a rich, creamy flavor without the extra hassle.
  • Hamburger buns: I use my Homemade Brioche Buns in this beef avocado burger recipe, but you can also use store-bought buns to cut down on prep time. If you are following a gluten-free diet, be sure to get gluten-free buns. You can also make the famous Whataburger Avocado Bacon Burger recipe using Texas Toast.
  • Cheese: Though I top my guacamole bacon burger with cheddar cheese, you can use any cheese you like. American cheese, pepper jack cheese, Swiss cheese—the sky’s the limit! Or, if you don’t want to overdo your avocado burger topping, you can omit the cheese altogether.

How to Make This Recipe?

Follow the simple steps below for bbq avocado burgers that are just as delicious as any famous restaurant burger you can buy:

Make the Patties

  1. Prepare the pan: Line a small sheet pan with parchment paper and set it aside.
person showing how to prepare beef patties
  1. Mix the ground beef: Add ground beef, Worcestershire sauce, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and black pepper to a large bowl. Mix the ingredients until thoroughly combined. Divide the meat mixture into four equal portions.
  2. Shape burger patties: Flatten each piece into a burger patty roughly ¾-inch thick and three inches in diameter. 
person showing how to make an indentation in the middle of a beef pattie
  1. Make an indentation in the middle: Use a small, flat-bottomed ramekin to make an indentation* in the center of each patty. (*See expert tips below for more information as to why we are doing this)
  2. Transfer the patties: Move the patties to the prepared baking sheet. Cover them with plastic wrap and freeze for 30 minutes before grilling.

Cook the Turkey Bacon

steps for baking turkey bacon on a wire rack
  1. Preheat the oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Then, line the turkey bacon slices on the wire rack or a parchment paper-lined baking sheet with none of the strips overlapping. 
  2. Cook the bacon: Bake the turkey bacon slices in the oven for ten minutes before removing them, flipping them, and baking them for another five minutes. Once cooked, set the bacon aside.

Make the Guacamole

person showing how to make guacamole in a collage of images
  1. Prep the ingredients: In a large bowl, mix the garlic, lime juice, and salt. Halve the ripe avocados, scoop them out, and place them into the same bowl.
  2. Mix everything together: Use a fork or potato masher to mash the avocados until they reach your desired level of creaminess. Taste the mixture and add seasoning if necessary.

Get the Grill On

a collage of images showing how to grill burgers
  1. Prepare the grill: Preheat a gas grill to 400 degrees F (medium-high heat). Once heated, dip a wad of paper towels into vegetable oils and wipe the grates.
  2. Grill the patties: Place the ground beef on the grill for 4-5 minutes. Then, flip the patties and cook for another four minutes, or until the center of each registers your desired temperature. The internal temperature should read 125 degrees F. for medium-rare,  130 degrees F. for medium, and 155-160 for well done (source)*.
  3. Add the cheese: When done, move the beef patties off the direct heat, top each with a slice of cheese, and let the residual heat melt the cheese (45-60 seconds). Transfer the finished patties to a plate and cover them with aluminum foil. Let the beef rest for five minutes. You may also lightly toast your burger buns on the grill for 1-2 minutes while the burgers rest.

PRO TIP: If you choose not to grill your bacon avocado burger as described above, you can cook your patties on a grill pan or in a skillet.

Assemble the Bacon Avocado Cheeseburgers

showing how to make an avocado bacon burger in a collage of images with all the layers

Assemble the bacon guacamole burger: Place the bottom bun on a plate. Layer the hamburger with avocado, a tomato slice, a cooked patty, two slices of bacon, and a lettuce leaf.

Finish the burger stack with the top bun. Then, repeat this assembly process with the remaining burgers and serve.

How to Make Ahead & Store Leftovers

One bite of this bacon avocado burger recipe, and you won’t dare let another go to waste. Now you can whip up juicy burgers in a snap and store them like a pro—all with one simple guide.

  • Make ahead: To make this burger recipe ahead of time, prepare your guacamole, turkey bacon, and ground beef mixture, and store each in a separate airtight container. Keep these ingredients in the fridge for up to one day, and only move your hamburger patties to the freezer 30 minutes before grilling.
  • Storage: When storing your guacamole bacon burgers, place each ingredient in its own airtight container. When ready to eat, reheat and assemble them one by one.
  • Reheat: To reheat your guacamole bacon burgers, reheat the meat in a low heat oven (300 degrees F for 7-10 minutes) or a skillet. Once warm, assemble the rest of your burger using the remaining ingredients.

What to Serve it With

Dozens of side dishes make a delicious pairing with this delicious avocado bacon burger recipe. Whether you want a crisp veggie or a zesty bean dip, this collection has you covered.

Expert Tips

If you want to make this guacamole bacon burger recipe as delicious as it is from the drive-thru, these foolproof tips are just what you need.

  • Put a thumbprint in the burger: This tip is one of Bobby Flay’s tricks to make the best burgers – When placed on the grill, beef patties tend to bulge in the center, leading to unevenly cooked meat. Though you may want to fix misshapen burgers by pressing down on them with a spatula, this solution can lead to dry, flavorless meat. For best results, then, I recommend creating an indentation in the center of your uncooked beef patties using your thumb or a small, flat-bottomed ramekin. As the beef expands, the dent will disappear, and you’ll have perfectly shaped guacamole burgers.
  • Use good bread: I think a lot of people overlook the importance of the bun when making a burger. To me, the bun you use is just as important as the meat. If you have the time, I highly recommend making a batch of my homemade brioche buns recipe. If not, head on over to your local bakery to pick up burger buns that actually taste good. 
  • Double the recipe: Need more burgers on the grill? You can easily double this guacamole burger recipe to feed a crowd.
  • Change it up: I know there is already quite a bit happening with this burger, but if you have the time I highly recommend making a batch of caramelized onions as a topping to take it to a whole other level.
  • Degree of doneness: I know a lot of people prefer a burger that is cooked either medium-rare or medium. However, I think it is important to mention that both CDC and USDA recommend consumers cook ground beef to 160 degrees F to kill E.coli germs rapidly.

FAQs

How many calories are in a bacon avocado cheeseburger?

The recipe for avocado burgers below is about 759 calories per serving.

Is an Avocado Bacon Burger good?

Yes! Juicy, flavorful, and hassle-free, avocado bacon burgers are the perfect dish to serve on the Fourth of July, Labor Day, game days, and even busy weeknights. You won’t believe how much savory, zesty flavor there is in every bite of this simple dish.

Other Ground Beef Recipes You Might Also Like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Avocado Bacon Barbecue Burger recipe or any other one of our beef dinner recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Avocado Bacon Burger from the front view
Print

Avocado Bacon Burger Recipe

If you love avocados and bacon, you must try this delicious Avocado Bacon Burger recipe. Simply put, it is made by layering beef burger patties with guacamole and turkey bacon in a buttery brioche burger bun. To me, this is a next-level burger with minimal effort.
Course Main Course
Cuisine American
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Resting time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 759kcal

Ingredients

For The Burger:

  • 1 lb ground beef I used 85/15
  • ½ teaspoon Worcestershire sauce
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • Vegetable oil olive or avocado oil would work to oil the grates
  • 4 slices of sliced cheddar cheese optional – American Cheese, Swiss Cheese or Pepper Jack Cheese would also work
  • 1 large tomato sliced
  • 4 burger buns I used my Brioche Buns
  • 4 lettuce leaves

For The Bacon

  • 8 slices turkey bacon (8oz) or regular bacon would also work

For The Guacamole

  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon lime juice
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 2 ripe avocados

Instructions

  • Line a small sheet pan with parchment paper. Set it aside.
  • To make the burger patties: Place ground beef, Worcestershire sauce, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and black pepper in a large bowl. Mix until well combined. Divide it into 4 equal portions and flatten them into ¾-inch thick burger patties that are about 3 inches in diameter. Make a dent in the middle of each patty using a small flat-bottomed ramekin (please refer to how-to images for a visual).
  • Transfer patties onto the prepared baking sheet. Cover them with plastic wrap and freeze for 30 minutes.
  • To cook the bacon in the oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit. Line turkey bacon slices on the wire rack (or on a parchment-lined baking sheet) making sure not to overlap. Bake in the preheated oven for 10 minutes. Remove from the oven, flip them and bake for another 5 minutes. Set them aside.
  • To make the guacamole: Mix together garlic, lime juice, and salt in a large bowl. Cut the avocados in half and scoop out the avocados and place them into the bowl. Using the back of a fork (or a potato masher) mash the avocados until it reaches to your desired level of chunkiness. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
  • To cook the burgers: Preheat a gas grill* to 400 degrees F. Dip a wad of paper towel into vegetable oil and then generously wipe the grates. Place beef patties on the grill and cook for 4-5 minutes. Flip the burgers and cook for another 4 minutes or until a thermometer inserted in the middle registers 125 degrees F for medium-rare, 130 degrees F for medium, and 155-160 degrees F for well done.
  • When they are done, move them from the direct heat and top each burger with a slice of cheese, if using. Let the residual heat melt the cheese for 45 seconds to a minute.
  • Transfer the burgers onto a plate, cover them with foil and let them rest for 5 minutes.
  • If preferred, while the burgers rest, lightly toast buns (off direct heat) on the grill, for a minute or two.
  • To assemble the burgers: Place the bottom bun on a plate. Line it with avocado, tomato slice, burger meat, bacon, and a lettuce leaf. Put the top bun on. Repeat with the rest of the burgers. Serve!

Notes

  • No grill, no problem: Alternatively, you can use a grill pan or a skillet to cook your burger patties on the stove top.
  • This recipe is written for four people, but you can multiply it as many times as you want.
  • Prefer pork bacon instead? Simply use regular bacon and if you need help, here is a great baked bacon recipe.
  • Put a thumbprint in the burger: This tip is one of Bobby Flay’s tricks to make the best burgers – When placed on the grill, beef patties tend to bulge in the center, leading to unevenly cooked meat. Though you may want to fix misshapen burgers by pressing down on them with a spatula, this solution can lead to dry, flavorless meat. For best results, then, I recommend creating an indentation in the center of your uncooked beef patties using your thumb or a small, flat-bottomed ramekin. As the beef expands, the dent will disappear, and you’ll have perfectly shaped guacamole burgers.
  • Storage: To store leftovers place each ingredient in its own airtight container. When ready to eat, reheat and assemble them one by one.
  • Reheat: To reheat your guacamole bacon burgers, reheat the meat in a low heat oven (300 degrees F for 7-10 minutes) or a skillet. Once warm, assemble the rest of your burger using the remaining ingredients.

Nutrition

Calories: 759kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 39g | Fat: 53g | Saturated Fat: 17g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 24g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 125mg | Sodium: 1937mg | Potassium: 1112mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 2374IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 233mg | Iron: 5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/guacamole-burgers/feed/ 9
Karniyarik – Turkish Stuffed Eggplant Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-eggplant-karniyarik/ https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-eggplant-karniyarik/#comments Mon, 02 Aug 2021 03:43:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=942 If you have a hankering for authentic Middle Eastern food, this classic Turkish eggplant dish, known as karniyarik, is just…]]>

If you have a hankering for authentic Middle Eastern food, this classic Turkish eggplant dish, known as karniyarik, is just what you need. Referred to as aubergines in the UK and brinjal in Asia, eggplants make for a breathtaking table presentation. You’ll need a fork and a camera after seeing the deep purple, vibrant reds, and verdant greens of this Turkish Stuffed Eggplant dish.

Whether you serve this freezer-friendly dinner on a bed of bulgur wheat pilaf or with a side of creamy tzatziki or a serving of ayran, it’s bound to make mouths water. If you’re still craving Turkish cuisine after this picture-perfect meal, there are so many other recipes to try! You’ll rave about my garlicky Eggplant Yogurt Dip, hearty Simit Recipe, and spicy Turkish Kofta Recipe.

Karniyarik recipe garnished with tomatoes and parsley

What is Karniyarik?

Karniyarik is a popular Turkish eggplant dish usually made during the summer months when eggplants are in season.

The original recipe is made by first frying whole eggplants and then filling them with a ground beef mixture. They are then finished in the oven after being drizzled with a quick tomato sauce.

Our version of this popular eggplant dish is made healthier (and easier) by roasting whole eggplants in the oven rather than frying them in oil.

Why Should You Try This Recipe

This Turkish ground beef stuffed eggplant dish is equal parts stunning and scrumptious. With so much to love, it’s impossible not to fall head over heels for this Middle Eastern main course.

  • Visually impressive and easy to serve, this recipe makes for a gorgeous table presentation. Wow your dinner party guests the next time you treat them to this one-portion meal.
  • Out of all the Turkish aubergine recipes, this one has stood the test of time. In fact, it was one of the most popular eggplant dish among Ottoman Empire royalty!
  • Turkish eggplant recipes are a great way to eat from your garden this eggplant season without boring your taste buds.
  • Say yes to healthy eating with this nutritious take on a classic. Though the original recipe uses fried eggplant, my version uses whole roasted eggplants (or even fire-roasted eggplants) instead.

Ingredients

Because this Turkish brinjal dish uses so many home-grown ingredients, you can eat fresh without a last-minute trip to the grocery store.

Eggplants:

For this recipe, you’ll need 5 medium-sized eggplants. To make your Turkish aubergine recipes as authentic as possible, try to find eggplants that are long and lean. However, amongst all the different kinds of eggplants, globe eggplants (the ones I used in the pictures) are the easiest to find so I use them in my recipe.

If they are too large to fit in one baking dish, you may have to roast them in separate sheet pans.

Globe eggplants on a sheet pan lined with aluminum foil

Pro Tip: When you’re on the hunt for the perfect eggplants, try to select ones that are heavy for their size, firm to the touch, and not bruised. Also, try to choose eggplants that are of similar size to one another to ensure even cooking.

The Stuffing – Meat Filling Mixture:

Stuffed eggplant filling ingredients

For the ground beef filling, gather olive oil, chopped onion, ground cumin, bell peppers, ground beef, garlic, diced tomatoes, salt, black pepper, Italian parsley, hot water, and tomato paste.

How To Make Karniyarik

Whether you’re new to Turkish cuisine or someone who is interested in the flavors of the Middle East, you won’t believe how simple it is to make this Turkish baked eggplant filled with ground beef. 

  1. Preheat the oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. and line a baking sheet with aluminum foil.
person poking eggplants before roasting in the oven
  1. Prepare the eggplant: Wash the eggplants in the sink and dry them off with paper towels. Position them on a lined baking sheet and poke 7-10 holes in each with a fork.
  2. Roast the eggplant in the oven: Place the eggplants in the preheated oven and bake for 50-60 minutes, turning them over once or twice to ensure even roasting. Then, remove the eggplants and let them cool for a couple minutes on the counter. Reduce the oven temperature to 350 degrees F.
Person showing how to make ground beef mixture for Turkish eggplant
  1. Prepare the meat mixture: While the eggplant is roasting, make the ground beef stuffing. Heat the olive oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Then, add onion, ground cumin, pepper, and ground beef. Stir frequently for 10-12 minutes before adding garlic. Then, cook for 30 more seconds. 
  2. Cook the stuffing: Add in the tomatoes, a little salt, and pepper. Bring the ground beef mixture to boil over medium heat before turning it down to medium-low. Let the stuffing simmer for 10-15 minutes (until the meat is fully cooked), and add more seasoning as necessary. Remove mixture from heat and add chopped parsley.
Step by step photos of how to make karniyarik recipe
  1. Assemble: Mix the water and tomato sauce in a measuring cup, and place eggplants in a large casserole dish. Use a knife to create a slit belly in the center of each eggplant. Fill the sliced eggplants with a heaping portion of the meat stuffing and spoon 2-3 tablespoons of the tomato sauce mixture over each eggplant’s top. Pour the remaining mixture into the bottom of the baking dish. Garnish each eggplant with a few tomato slices.
stuffed eggplants garnished with tomatoes in a casserole dish before going into the oven
  1. Bake: Cover the casserole dish with aluminum foil and bake for 15 minutes. Then, remove the foil and bake for 10 minutes more. 
  2. Serve: Garnish with fresh parsley and serve.

Note: When making this karniyarik recipe, there are many different ways to cook the eggplant. For more detailed instructions, visit my guide on Whole Roasted Eggplant in Oven. Or, you can visit my recipe for Fire Roasted Eggplants to add a gentle smoky flavor to your meal.

How to Serve This Turkish Eggplant Recipe

Eggplant dishes taste spectacular on their own, but they’re utterly irresistible when served alongside my other classic Turkish sides.

  • Turkish Bulgur Pilaf: Every flavor in my hearty Turkish eggplants comes to life when served on a bed of herby, vegan bulgur.
  • Tzatziki Sauce: There’s no better pair than creamy, tangy tzatziki sauce and meaty Turkish baked eggplant filled with ground beef.
  • Piyaz Salad: Soft beans, juicy tomatoes, and zesty citrus make the ultimate side dish for this summer-ready meal.
  • Shepherd Salad: The classic Turkish pairing for karniyarik is this cucumber and tomato salad that takes no more than 15 minutes to prepare.
Turkish baked eggplant filled with ground beef served on a plate

How to Store & Freeze

Just because you meal prep doesn’t mean you can’t eat five-star cuisine on a weeknight. Enliven dinner any day of the week with this storage-friendly meal.

  • Storage: When stored in an airtight container, leftovers can stay fresh in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. To reheat, preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. and bake in a casserole dish for 15-20 minutes.
  • Freezing: Bring the stuffed eggplants to room temperature and place them in an airtight container. Because karniyarik freezes so well, you can store it in the freezer for up to 2 months. 
  • Thawing: Remove the karniyarik from the freezer and let it thaw in the fridge overnight. When ready to serve, preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Place the stuffed eggplant on a baking sheet and bake for 15-20 minutes or until fully warmed.

Other Ways to Prepare Eggplant

One of the best things about eggplant is how many ways there are to prepare them! Cook your garden goods to perfection using each different version listed below.

  • Frying: Want to add richness to your Turkish stuffed eggplant? Try frying your eggplant the authentic Turkish way, and every plate will be licked clean. Instead of roasting the eggplants, cut a slit in the eggplants and soak them in salted water for 30 minutes. Then, squeeze the eggplants dry with a clean kitchen towel. Heat some vegetable oil in a deep frying pan and fry the eggplants evenly on each side, until they’re soft and browned. Finally, remove the fried eggplant from the pan and rest it on a paper towel to absorb excess oil.
  • Roasted Halved Eggplants: You can also roast eggplant halves in the oven and stuff each half one by one with the meat sauce.
  • Fire roasting: A great way to add smokiness to this Turkish summer classic is to roast the eggplant before adding the filling. Just place the eggplants on a gas stove, turn them with a set of tongs, and roast them until fully softened. Once cooked, set the eggplants on a casserole dish. Slice open the belly section of the eggplant and fill it with the stuffing. Follow the rest of the recipe as written.
    For full instructions, advice, and tips on how to make this fiery substitute, follow my Fire Roasted Eggplant recipe.

Expert Tips

Even new chefs can make stuffed aubergines like a pro. With these simple substitutions, you can have a tasty dish that’s delicious and new every time you make it!

  • Use ground lamb instead of ground beef for a lamb aubergine recipe bursting with a robust, tender flavor.
  • Don’t have fresh tomatoes on hand? Try canned tomatoes instead. Only one cup is necessary to make this mouthwatering Turkish meal.
  • Size of the eggplant: You may have to adjust the amount of the meat sauce depending on the size of your eggplant. If yours are larger, use more ground meat to ensure that you have enough filling.
  • If you prefer a meat free version of stuffed eggplants, be sure to try my Mediterranean Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant recipe.

FAQs

What does karniyarik mean in Turkish?

“Karin” means belly and “yarik” means opening. So, karniyarik can roughly be translated as “With the belly open”

How is karniyarik different than imam bayildi (Imam Fainted) recipe?

Turkish Imam fainted is the vegetarian version of karniyarik. While it is made in a very similar way, instead of stuffing the eggplants with a ground beef mixture you stuff it with an onion and tomato mixture.

What is eggplant in Turkish?

In Turkish, eggplant is called patlican.

More Turkish Eggplant Recipes You Might Also Like:

Turkish Stuffed Eggplant Recipe close up
Print

Karniyarik Turkish Stuffed Eggplant Recipe

This Turkish Stuffed Eggplant recipe, also known as Karniyarik, is made by stuffing roasted eggplants with tasty ground beef, pepper and tomatoes filling. Originated from the Ottoman cuisine, this is a delicious way to use eggplants that are in abundance during the summer months.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Turkish
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 25 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
Servings 5 portions
Calories 394kcal

Ingredients

  • 5 medium sized eggplants preferably similar in size
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 medium-size bell pepper seeded and chopped
  • 1/2 lb ground beef 80/20
  • 4 cloves garlic thinly chopped
  • 1 cup diced tomatoes plus more as garnish on top
  • 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt plus more for seasoning the belly of eggplants
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1/2 cup Italian Parsley chopped more as a garnish
  • 1 cup hot water
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste

Instructions

To Roast The Eggplants:

  • Preheat oven to 400 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with aluminum foil.
  • Using a fork, poke 7-10 holes in each eggplant.
  • Place them on the prepared baking sheet. Bake for 50 minutes to an hour making sure to turn once or twice for even roasting.
  • Take it out of the oven and let it cool on the counter.
  • Turn the heat down to 350 degrees F.

To Make The Meat Sauce:

  • Meanwhile, make the meat sauce. Heat oil in a large skillet over medium heat.
  • Add onion, ground cumin, pepper, and ground beef and cook, stirring frequently, for 10-12 minutes.
  • Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
  • Add in the tomatoes, salt, and pepper. Bring it to a boil over medium heat, turn down the heat to medium-low, and let it simmer for 10-15 minutes or until the meat is fully cooked. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • Off the heat, stir in a cup of chopped parsley.

To Assemble:

  • Mix together the water and tomato paste in a measuring cup.
  • Place roasted eggplant in a large casserole dish. It might be tight and that is okay.
  • Using a knife, gently cut a small opening in the "belly" of each eggplant. Lightly season the belly of each eggplant with salt (use 1/2 teaspoon salt in total.)
  • Fill the opening of each eggplant with the meat mixture letting it mound through the slit.
  • Spoon the tomato sauce & water mixture over the stuffed eggplant. You should use 2-3 tablespoons of the mixture for each eggplant. Pour the remaining mixture at the bottom of the casserole dish.
  • To garnish, slice a large tomato (or two small ones) into 6 thin slices and place a few slices on top of each eggplant, like you see in the photos.
  • Cover with aluminum foil. Bake for 15 minutes. Remove the foil and bake for another 10 minutes.
  • Garnish with chopped parsley and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Eggplant: You would have the adjust the amount of meat sauce based on the size of your eggplants. Mine were 1/2 to 2/3 pounds each. However, if yours are larger, I recommend using 2/3 pounds of ground beef.
  • Storage: When stored in an airtight container, leftovers can stay fresh in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. To reheat, preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. and bake in a casserole dish for 15-20 minutes.
  • Freezing: Bring the stuffed eggplants to room temperature and place them in an airtight container. Because karniyarik freezes so well, you can store it in the freezer for up to 2 months. 
  • Thawing: Remove the stuffed eggplants from the freezer and let it thaw in the fridge overnight. When ready to serve, preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Place the stuffed eggplant on a baking sheet and bake for 15-20 minutes or until fully warmed.
  • Use ground lamb instead of ground beef for a lamb aubergine recipe bursting with a robust, tender flavor.
  • Don’t have fresh tomatoes on hand? Try canned tomatoes instead. Only one cup is necessary to make this mouthwatering Turkish meal.

Nutrition

Calories: 394kcal | Carbohydrates: 51g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 41mg | Sodium: 396mg | Potassium: 2107mg | Fiber: 23g | Sugar: 29g | Vitamin A: 1287IU | Vitamin C: 63mg | Calcium: 128mg | Iron: 4mg

This recipe was originally published in July 2013 but updated with helpful notes in August 2021.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-eggplant-karniyarik/feed/ 40
Mexican Stuffed Peppers https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-stuffed-peppers/ https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-stuffed-peppers/#comments Tue, 13 Jul 2021 15:19:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=25177 In today’s post, I am adding a new recipe to my collection of Easy Mexican Dishes with this Mexican Inspired…]]>

In today’s post, I am adding a new recipe to my collection of Easy Mexican Dishes with this Mexican Inspired Stuffed Peppers recipe. If you are like me, cook stuffed peppers regularly but in need of a bit of a new twist to jazz it up, you will like my Mexican twist to this summer classic.

They are stuffed with two of my favorite ingredients – black beans and corn. The addition of ground beef gives these Mexican-inspired stuffed peppers that extra boost of protein, while the cumin and coriander provide those Mexican flavors I’ve been craving! This is a great recipe that you can add to your collection of dinner and beef recipes as you are planning your weekly dinner menu.

Mexican Stuffed Peppers in a white skillet from top view

Plus, this post includes all my tips on how to pick, prepare, stuff, and cook bell peppers for the most delicious (and foolproof) stuffed bell pepper recipe.

Mexican Stuffed Peppers recipe photographed right after it came out of the oven.

Ingredients:

The ingredients list for this Mexican peppers recipe might look long at a first glance but they are simple every day ingredients you probably already have on hand.

Ingredients for stuffed capsium recipe
  • Sweet, Summer Yellow, Orange or Red Bell Peppers: While shopping for peppers, I recommend picking ones that are in similar size so that they will cook at the same time.
  • Yellow Onion
  • Ground Cumin and Coriander – I used two of my favorite Mexican spices but you can also use your favorite taco seasoning
  • Ground Beef, I used the 85% lean variety
  • Garlic
  • Canned, Diced Tomatoes
  • Canned Black Beans, rinsed and drained
  • Fresh Corn Kernels, but frozen can be substituted
  • Cooked White Rice or Quinoa
  • Fresh Cilantro, or Parsley if you don’t like the flavor of cilantro
  • Shredded Cheddar Cheese, I prefer White Cheddar, but any version will do

How To Make This Recipe?

This Mexican Stuffed Bell Pepper recipe can be made in 3 folds.

First, prepare the bell peppers.

How to Prepare The Bell Peppers?

To prepare bell peppers: 

  • Cut the tops of the peppers with a small paring knife and set aside. Remove the seeds and ribs (aka white membranes) with a large spoon and discard, as you will no longer need the insides. 
  • Lightly salt each pepper with a pinch of salt. Alternatively, you can brush the insights lightly with olive oil as well.
  • Chop the remaining tops to use in the filling. 
  • Place peppers cut side up in a baking dish or cast-iron skillet, fitting in as many as you can (my skillet only fit 9, but if you can get 10, go for it!).
person showing how to cut bell peppers for stuffing

Second, preheat the oven to 375 degrees and prepare the filling. In a large skillet, heat the oil over medium heat. Place the chopped onions, peppers, cumin, coriander, salt, and pepper in the pot, and cook, stirring occasionally, until the vegetables have softened, about 5-7 minutes. 

Stir in the ground meat, using a wooden spoon to break up any large pieces, and cook until everything is combined and meat is cooked, 6-8 minutes. Add the garlic and cook for 30 seconds. Stir in the diced tomatoes, black beans, and corn, put the lid on, bring to a boil, reduce to a simmer, and let it cook for 3-4 minutes. 

Taste the beef mixture for seasoning and adjust, if necessary. Off the heat, add the cooked rice and cilantro and give it a gentle toss.

The filling made with ground beef, corn, and black beans for Mexican Stuffed Peppers

Finally, assemble the peppers. Divide the filling amongst the peppers, filling each pepper as evenly as you can, and top each pepper with a generous amount of shredded cheese.

Fill the bottom of the pan with a cup of water (more on that later), cover with aluminum foil (or parchment paper), and bake until the peppers are softened, the filling is heated through, and the cheese is melted about 50-55 minutes. 

Garnish with cilantro and enjoy!

How To Cook Stuffed Bell Peppers

After doing much research, I found several recipes that partially cook the peppers first and then bake them in the oven as I did with my Middle Eastern Stuffed Peppers recipe.

A properly cooked stuffed bell pepper is when the bell pepper is cooked all the way through while the filling is thoroughly warmed through, but still moist. There are techniques to par-boil them, pre-bake them, or even stick them in the microwave!

Mexican Style Stuffed Bell Peppers are filled with water to create steam in the oven.

However, with the help of this Kitchn’s post, I found the best way to cook bell peppers is by adding 1 cup of water to the bottom of the baking dish or skillet, cover, and simply bake in the oven. The water at the bottom of the dish provides moisture so that the peppers will steam and cook evenly all the way through.

Can I Make This Recipe Ahead Of Time?

Yes! These Mexican stuffed bell peppers with black beans and corn can be prepped 1-2 days in advance. Follow the recipe up to assembling the peppers, but do not add the water or top with the cheese. Cover and refrigerate until ready to bake. 

Once ready, remove from the fridge at least 30 minutes before baking. At this point, you can preheat your oven, add the water to the bottom of the pan, and top with the cheese. Cover and bake for 50-55 minutes, or until completely warmed through.

How To Freeze:

Freezing your Mexican stuffed peppers is a huge time saver and a smart way to enjoy meals throughout the week. Frozen stuffed bell peppers will last in the freezer for up to 3 months.

To freeze properly:

  1. Cook the stuffed peppers all the way through according to the recipe and cool completely.
  2. Place all of the stuffed peppers in a freezer-safe airtight container (a large casserole dish works well), cover with aluminum foil, and then wrap the entire dish in plastic wrap to completely seal, leaving no part of the peppers exposed, or you risk freezer burn. Label, date, and place in your freezer.
  3. Alternatively, wrap each individual pepper in plastic wrap and place in multiple freezer-safe plastic storage bags, making sure the bag is tightly sealed. Label, date, and place in your freezer.

How To Reheat:

To reheat leftovers from the fridge, preheat your oven to 350 degrees, place the peppers in an oven-safe baking dish, cover, and bake for 20-25 minutes, or until completely warmed through.

To reheat from frozen, preheat your oven to 350 degrees and remove all the wrapping, leaving the aluminum foil or parchment paper intact. Bake for 30-35 minutes, or until thoroughly warmed through. Alternatively, place the frozen peppers in the fridge to thaw overnight and follow the reheating instructions from the fridge, above.

Best Peppers To Use For This Recipe

The sweet red, orange, and yellow bell peppers you can find at the market or grocery store this time of year are the best.

If I had to choose, Mexican stuffed yellow peppers are my favorite, but I like to use a combination of colors to give it that special eye appeal. By all means, use any color combination that suits you!

PRO TIP: If you are on a budget, green bell peppers are always a good choice since they are usually cheaper at the market or grocery store.

Rice and bean filled Peppers topped off with cheese photographed before they went into the oven

Mexican Stuffed Pepper Variations

In my opinion, the beauty of this recipe is that it is so versatile. By making a few ingredient changes, you can alter it to your personal dietary needs.

While I think the version I shared below is more of an authentic Mexican Stuffed Pepper recipe, I also wanted to share a few ideas in case you have family members who may need a different variation of this recipe:

No Rice/Without Rice

Even though a recipe for stuffed bell peppers with rice is always fun, if you are trying to reduce your carb intake, stuffed peppers without rice is another way to go.

To still get the texture profile of rice and account for the volume, simply replace it with 1 cup of cooked quinoa (my preferred recipe) for an added boost of plant-based protein.

Low Carb

Low carb Mexican stuffed peppers can be made easy by swapping out the cooked rice or quinoa for 1 cup cauliflower rice or riced broccoli. Their textures are just about the same, so no one will ever know!

With Ground Turkey

Mexican stuffed peppers with ground turkey is a leaner variation as compared to stuffed peppers with ground beef. If you want a super lean stuffed pepper, use ground white turkey breast.

For a bit of a fattier version, go with the richer ground dark turkey thigh. You could also try a mix of each for the best of both worlds!

When I make it with ground turkey I also add a teaspoon of Italian seasoning to make it even more flavorful.

Tex Mex

Tex Mex stuffed peppers have a bit of a different flavor profile than the Mexican version. To change it up, substitute the diced tomatoes with a 12 oz jar of your favorite salsa, adding 2-3 Tablespoons water to the mixture to account for the smaller volume, and replace the shredded cheddar with shredded Pepper Jack cheeseyum! And if you want, top it off with a dollop of sour cream as well.

Slow Cooker Method

To make them in a crockpot:

  1. prep the peppers and place them in the bowl of your slow cooker.
  2. Assemble the filling and fill just as directed.
  3. Add the water to the bottom of the pan, and then cover with the lid of your slow cooker. Cook the peppers on LOW for 3-4 hours or HIGH for 2-3 hours. Top with shredded cheese, cover, and cook on LOW an additional 10-15 minutes, or until the cheese melts.
  4. Serve and enjoy!

PRO TIP: To ensure the peppers fit into the bowl of your slow cooker, you will need an 8-10qt size for this recipe. Just think of it like this – each pepper takes up 1 qt (9 peppers = 9 quarts). If your slow cooker is on the smaller size (5-6qt), simply halve the recipe.

Fresh out of the oven stuffed bell peppers recipe is being served on a table

A Few Helpful Expert Tips For Success:

  • Want to up the nutrition? Replace the cooked white rice with cooked brown rice instead.
  • Got bigger or smaller bell peppers? Keep in mind that the baking time might be slight shorter or longer depending on the size of your bell peppers.
  • Want spicy stuffed peppers? Add ¼ – ½ tsp Cayenne Pepper when you add the cumin and coriander.
  • Looking for an extra crispy topping? When the peppers are fully cooked, remove from the oven, uncover, and set your broiler to HIGH. Place under the broiler for 2-3 minutes, or until the cheese is golden brown. – just make sure to keep a close eye on it!

FAQs:

Do you have to boil peppers before stuffing them?

I found the best way to cook bell peppers is by adding 1 cup of water to the bottom of the baking dish, covering it with a lid (or foil), and then baking in the oven. The water at the bottom of the baking dish provides enough steam to cook the peppers and the meat evenly all the way through.

Why are my stuffed peppers watery?

As you are filling the peppers be sure to drain the juices of the ground beef mixture to prevent you peppers from turning soggy after they are baked.

What goes good as a side dish with stuffed peppers?

I really enjoy my taco stuffed peppers recipe with a simple vegetable salad for a well-balanced meal. A few options include 5 Bean Salad, Texas Caviar Salad, Mexican Street Corn Salad with Avocado. Alternatively, you can also serve it with a grain side dish like quinoa and wild rice.

Is it better to freeze stuffed peppers cooked or uncooked?

It is better to cook them all the way and bring to room temperature before freezing them.

Do you eat the pepper when you make stuffed peppers?

Yes, you do. The spicy ground meat mixture mixed with colorful and meaty bell peppers make a filling and visually appealing meal.

How long do I need to cook stuffed peppers?

Bake them in the oven at a 375 degrees F oven for 50-55 minutes in order for them to cook throughly.

Other Mexican Inspired Recipes You Might Like

MEXICAN STUFFED PEPPERS RECIPE IMAGE
Print

Mexican Stuffed Peppers Recipe

Make these Mexican Stuffed Peppers for an easy weeknight meal. Stuffed with a filling made with ground beef, beans, corn, and rice, they are healthy and delicious. Perfect for meal prep!
Course Dinner
Cuisine Mexican
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 304kcal

Ingredients

To Prepare the Bell Peppers

  • 8-10 medium size bell peppers choose between red, yellow and orange
  • 2 teaspoons kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

To make the filling:

  • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil I used olive oil
  • 1 medium-sized onion chopped
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 pound ground beef I used 85% lean
  • 3 cloves of garlic minced
  • 1 15 oz diced tomatoes, juices drained
  • 1 15 oz can black beans
  • 1 cup fresh corn
  • 1 cup cooked white rice or quinoa
  • ½ cup fresh cilantro or parsley chopped
  • 1 cup water
  • 1 cup shredded cheddar

Instructions

  • Prepare the peppers. Use a small knife to cut off the top of each bell pepper. Season the inside of each pepper with salt and pepper. Place peppers into a large baking dish (or a cast iron pan like I did), wedging them together as needed to fit in one layer. Set aside. 
  • Gently, cut the stems from the tops and discard them. Chop the tops to use in the filling.
  • Pre-heat the oven 375 F degrees. 
  • To make the filling: Heat oil in a large pot over medium heat. Add in the onion, chopped peppers, ground cumin, ground coriander, salt and pepper. Cook, stirring frequently, until onions and peppers are softened, 5-7 minutes.
  • Add in the meat. Using a wooden spoon break large pieces and cook until everything is combined and meat is cooked, 6-8 minutes.
  • Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
  • Stir in the tomatoes, black beans, and corn. Put the lid on, bring it to a boil, and then let it simmer for 3-4 minutes. Taste for seasoning and add in if needed. 
  • Off the heat add in the cooked rice and chopped cilantro. Give it a gentle stir.
  • To assemble the peppers: Divide the filling amongst the peppers. Top each pepper with a generous amount of shredded cheese.
  • Fill the bottom of the pan with a cup of water and cover the peppers with aluminum foil (or parchement paper).
  • Bake in the oven until the peppers are softened and the filling is heated through for about 50-55 minutes. 
  • If preferred, garnish with cilantro and serve.

Video

Notes

Notes:
  • I find that a large shallow cast iron pan with a lid works very well for a recipe like this. The one I am using in the pictures and in the video is this Le Creuset Braiser 5qt. (affiliate link)
  • While I listed 8-10 peppers in the ingredients list, the number of peppers you need will depend on their size. Obviously, the smaller the bell peppers the more you will need them. After cooked, the filling in this recipe is about 6 – 7 cups. During my recipe testings I found out that if you have 8-10 medium sized peppers you will have enough.
  • How To Freeze:  To freeze properly:
    1. Cook the stuffed peppers all the way through according to the recipe and cool completely.
    2. Place all of the stuffed peppers in a freezer-safe dish (a large casserole dish works well), cover with aluminum foil, and then wrap the entire dish in plastic wrap to completely seal, leaving no part of the peppers exposed, or you risk freezer burn. Label, date, and place in your freezer.
    3. Alternatively, wrap each individual pepper in plastic wrap and place in multiple freezer-safe plastic storage bags, making sure the bag is tightly sealed. Label, date, and place in your freezer.
  • How to Reheat: To reheat leftovers from the fridge, preheat your oven to 350 degrees, place the peppers in an oven-safe baking dish, cover, and bake for 20-25 minutes, or until completely warmed through.
    To reheat from frozen, preheat your oven to 350 degrees and remove all the wrapping, leaving the aluminum foil or parchment paper intact. Bake for 30-35 minutes, or until thoroughly warmed through. Alternatively, place the frozen peppers in the fridge to thaw overnight and follow the reheating instructions from the fridge, above.

Nutrition

Calories: 304kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 55mg | Sodium: 1008mg | Potassium: 503mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 3901IU | Vitamin C: 155mg | Calcium: 132mg | Iron: 2mg

This recipe was originally published in July 2019. It is updated with additional helpful information with no changes to the original recipe in July 2021.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-stuffed-peppers/feed/ 34
Pressure Cooker Pot Roast https://foolproofliving.com/pressure-cooker-pot-roast-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/pressure-cooker-pot-roast-recipe/#comments Fri, 08 Jan 2021 08:14:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=25689 Sunday Pot Roast was never a recipe my mom ventured to make when I was growing up. It wasn’t until…]]>

Sunday Pot Roast was never a recipe my mom ventured to make when I was growing up. It wasn’t until I met my husband and moved to the States when I was introduced to the traditional Pot Roast dinner (thanks to Ina Garten’s Pot Roast recipe). And since my husband loves it so much, it has become a staple recipe in my house. It’s also a hearty and comforting recipe to share with family and friends during those cold winter months.

Pressure Cooker Pot Roast recipe served with potatoes and carrots over a bed of bulgur pilaf and garnished with fresh parsley photographed from the top view.

But the thing is… it just takes So. Much. Time. Until now!

If you feel the same way and want to figure out how to cook a chuck roast fast, you are in the right place, my friend.

This Instant Pot Pot Roast Recipe can be made in half the time as compared to the traditional Dutch oven method! And it tastes just as hearty and delicious, if not better! So long are the days slaving over the stove to get Sunday dinner on the table.

Easy Instant Pot Pot roast and potatoes recipe is photographed from the front view as a woman drizzles it with gravy.

How To Cook A Roast In A Pressure Cooker

The method for electric pressure cooker pot roast comes together in 3 folds.

First, preheat the pressure cooker by selecting Saute on HIGH and add the vegetable oil. While the oil is heating, season the beef chuck roast with salt and pepper. Add to the Instant Pot and brown the meat for 3-4 minutes on each side. Transfer the meat to a plate and cover with foil (or parchment paper) to keep warm.

3 lb chuck roast is being seasoned with salt and pepper by a woman

PRO TIP: If your meat is large and/or uneven in size make sure to follow the directions I used in Ina’s Pot Roast recipe and tie the beef chuck roast before seasoning and placing it in your Instant Pot. This will prevent it from spreading too much and losing those valuable juices.

If you watch the how-to video in the recipe card below you will see that I failed to do that. The end product was still good, but it would have been easier to manage in the end if I had tied it at the beginning. Here is a helpful video to show you how to tie beef.

Ingredients: Onion, chicken stock, oil, carrots, potatoes, parsnips, and beef chuck, are photographed from the top view.

Second, add the onion, garlic, broth, and thyme, and give it a stir making sure to scrape the brown bits at the bottom. Put the meat back into the pot and secure the lid. Select Manual, making sure the steam release handle is set to Sealing position, and cook at HIGH pressure for 60 minutes.

When cooking is complete, use natural release for 10 minutes and then quick release the remaining steam. Add in potatoes, carrots, and parsnips, making sure to submerge them in the cooking liquid. Select Manual and cook at HIGH for 10 minutes. When cooking is complete, use a natural release for 10 minutes and then release the remaining steam.

Finally, remove the roast and shred it with 2 forks. Place the vegetables on a serving plate and top them off (or place on the side) with shredded beef. If preferred, use a spoon and scrape the excess fat in the leftover juices and use an immersion blender to mix the juices to use as gravy to drizzle on top. Garnish with chopped fresh parsley and serve!

Need ideas to put your Instant Pot to good use? Check out all my Instant Pot recipes that are perfect for beginners like me.

Cooking Times

I found the ideal beef roast pressure cooker time per pound is 20 minutes. I cooked my 3 lb chuck roast recipe for 60 minutes, and it was the most perfect, fall apart chuck roast I’ve ever had!

Pot Roast in Pressure cooker- Cooked meat dish is in the instant pot

Pot Roast Variations

Cooking pot roast in a pressure cooker for a traditional Sunday roast is always a hit, but there are a few variations to make it more interesting:

Change up the seasoning: Along with the salt and pepper, add some dried herbs and spices to the surface of the beef roast. Add 1 teaspoon each of dried oregano, rosemary, and thyme for a more savory kick. A few bay leaves added to the cooking liquid add a lovely, slightly aromatic flavor, too!

Blend or strain gravy: I found there are two methods to make the gravy.

How To Make Roast Gravy

  • To blend (preferred method): Remove the beef roast and vegetables from the pressure cooker and scrape off the excess fat from the remaining liquid in the Instant Pot. Then, simply use your immersion blender to blend the sauce together, creating an emulsified gravy.
  • To strain: Remove the beef roast and vegetables from the pressure cooker and scrape off the excess fat from the remaining liquid in the Instant Pot. Then, strain through a fine-mesh sieve into a saucepan over medium heat and simmer until reduced and slightly thickened, about 10-15 minutes.

PRO TIP: For a thicker gravy, make a roux in the saucepan by cooking 2 Tablespoons each butter and flour over medium heat for about 1 minute. Then, scrape off the excess fat from the remaining liquid in the Instant Pot and strain into the saucepan with the roux. Cook until slightly thickened, 4-5 minutes.

What Can I Serve it With

As you can see in the pictures, I served my pressure cooker pot roast recipe with bulgur pilaf. However, you can also serve it with various whole-grain side dishes and/or one of my creative and easy vegetable side dishes (such as Whole Roasted Carrots, Sauteed Asparagus and Mushroom or Garlic Green Beans) or salads (like Asparagus Salad or Butter Lettuce Salad).

Need more inspiration for pot roast sides? Be sure to check out our post on What To Serve with Pot Roast for even more recipe ideas.

Shredded Instant Pot Chuck Roast (aka London Broil) placed on a plate along with potatoes and carrots photographed from the top view.

Expert Tips & Tricks:

  • Want to ensure this quick chuck roast recipe is cooked evenly? Allow the meat to rest on the kitchen counter for 30 minutes before cooking. This helps take the chill off.
  • For the best sear, pat the beef chuck roast dry with paper towels prior to seasoning. The dry surface and hot oil give you that extra crispy brown crust, which packs in so much flavor.
  • Looking for pot roast with potatoes and carrots? Simply omit the parsnips and replace them with an equal amount of carrots.
  • Beef Broth vs. Chicken Broth: As you’ll see in the recipe below, I used chicken broth as the liquid in the recipe. I personally find that my homemade chicken stock produces a lighter pot roast recipe. However, if you prefer beef broth feel free to swap an equal amount of it in place of chicken broth.
A cow showing the best cuts of meat for pot roast
  • Best Cuts of Beef for Pot Roast: For this easy Instant Pot chuck roast I’ve got some help from this post on TheKitchn. Feel free to refer to the image below for a visual to help you guide through the best cuts to use to make this instant pot roast recipe.
    • Chuck – The top pick for pot roast! It is cut from the shoulder, making it the toughest and most affordable piece of meat. The marbling (aka fat) is outstanding, which makes a fall apart chuck roast. Also called Chuck Roast, Arm Roast, Shoulder Roast, or Cross Rib.
    • Round – Cut from the back leg of the steer, this is actually a tough, but lean cut of meat. Even though lean meat is a good thing on occasion, that’s not what we want for a pot roast. Fat helps the meat breakdown into a more tender dish, giving you that silky, delicious texture. Also called Eye Round Roast, London Broil, or Round Tip Roast.
    • Sirloin – Cut from the back, near the hip bone all the way down to the belly (or flank), it is a bit tougher. Top sirloin is good for steaks and grilling, but it’s the bottom sirloin we are looking for, which is better for roasting. Also called Beef Rump Roast, Bottom Round Roast, Tri-Tip Roast, Ball Tip Roast, or Flap Roast.
    • Brisket – Cut from the breastbone, this is another very tough piece of meat, yet one of the most flavorful. When cooked the right way, it breaks down into a delicious dish. Although popular for BBQ or smoking, it makes a beautiful Sunday roast, too.
  • What pressure cooker should I use? I prefer to use my Instant Pot (affiliate link), but any pressure cooker you own will work. Feel free to use your Electric Pressure Cooker, Power Cooker, Presto, Power Cooker XL, or Crock-Pot Express. Just make sure to follow the manufacturer’s cooking technique, as it varies between each brand.

FAQs

What is Pot Roast?

Pot roast is simply a braised beef dish made by browning a roast size piece of meat and slow-cooking it for hours on the stovetop in a flavorful liquid, with or without vegetables. Tough cuts are preferred, because of the long cooking time, meaning the meat has a chance to become mouth-watering tender. But this slow cooking time gets cut in half with my Instant Pot.

What If My Beef Chuck Roast Is Too Big To Sear in One Piece?

If your chuck roast is too big to fit into your pressure cooker and to sear in one piece, you can cut it into 2 or 3 pieces and sear them individually.

How To Cook A Frozen Roast In An Instant Pot?

Cooking a frozen roast in an Instant Pot is actually quite easy. Place the frozen roast in the pressure cooker with the trivet underneath, to allow the heat to penetrate the entire surface of the roast, and add an additional 20 minutes to the cooking time. Frozen to pull-apart tender in no time!

When To Add Potatoes To Pot Roast?

The best time to add the potatoes and additional vegetables is at the end of the pot roast cooking time, which will prevent the vegetables from overcooking and turning to mush. After the 1 hour cook time, add the vegetables and continue to cook on HIGH for an additional 10 minutes. Perfectly cooked Instant Pot pot roast and potatoes every time!

Other Beef Recipes You Might Also Like

If you try this Pressure Cooker Pot Roast recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

This recipe has been adapted (with changes) from The Instant Pot Electric Pressure Cooker Cookbook (affiliate link).

Pressure Cooker Pot Roast with Potatoes and Carrots served over a bed of bulgur pilaf
Print

Pressure Cooker Pot Roast Recipe

Learn how to cook a roast in an instant pot using my foolproof method! Ready in less than 2 hours, this easy Pressure Cooker Pot Roast Recipe is perfectly tender and juicy.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 50 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 623kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 3-pound beef chuck roast, pat dry with paper towels on both sides
  • 1 tablespoon kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons vegetable oil I use grapeseed oil
  • 1 large onion halved and sliced
  • 4 cloves of garlic peeled and minced
  • 1 ¾ cups chicken stock preferably homemade (or beef stock)
  • 4 fresh thyme sprigs more as a garnish
  • 1 pound baby potatoes halved
  • 5 large carrots cut into 3/4-inch pieces
  • 3 large parsnips cut into 3/4-inch pieces*
  • 2 tablespoons chopped fresh parsley

Instructions

  • Season the meat with salt and pepper on both sides.
  • Preheat the pressure cooker (I used my Instant Pot – affiliate link), select saute on high. Add in the oil.
  • Once the pot is hot, brown the chuck roast, 3-4 minutes on each side. Transfer the meat onto a plate and cover with foil (or parchment paper) to keep warm. 
  • Add in the onion, garlic, chicken stock, and thyme and give it a stir. 
  • Put the meat back into the pot and secure the lid.
  • Select manual, make sure that the steam release handle is turned to sealing position, and cook at high pressure for 60 minutes.
  • When cooking is complete, use natural release for 10 minutes and then release the remaining steam.
  • Add in the potatoes, carrots, and parsnips. Be sure to submerge them in the cooking liquid.
  • Select manual and cook at high for 10 minutes.
  • When cooking is complete, use a natural release for 10 minutes and then release the remaining steam.

Video

Notes

  • Don’t have parsnips on hand? Use 2 more large carrots instead.
  • Can I cook a frozen pot roast in my pressure cooker? You sure can. Cooking a frozen roast in an Instant Pot is actually quite easy. Place the frozen roast in the pressure cooker with the trivet underneath, to allow the heat to penetrate the entire surface of the roast, and add an additional 20 minutes to the cooking time. Frozen to pull-apart tender in no time!
  • Two options for making gravy:
    • TO BLEND (preferred method): Remove the beef roast and vegetables from the pressure cooker and scrape off the excess fat from the remaining liquid in the Instant Pot. Then, simply use your immersion blender to blend the sauce together, creating an emulsified gravy.
    • TO STRAIN: Remove the beef roast and vegetables from the pressure cooker and scrape off the excess fat from the remaining liquid in the Instant Pot. Then, strain through a fine-mesh sieve into a saucepan over medium heat and simmer until reduced and slightly thickened, about 10-15 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 623kcal | Carbohydrates: 37g | Protein: 49g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Cholesterol: 159mg | Sodium: 1496mg | Potassium: 1640mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 8666IU | Vitamin C: 36mg | Calcium: 107mg | Iron: 6mg

This recipe was originally published in September 2019. It has been updated with additional helpful information on Jan 2021 with no changes to the original recipe.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/pressure-cooker-pot-roast-recipe/feed/ 20
One-Skillet Easy Beef Stroganoff https://foolproofliving.com/skillet-beef-stroganoff/ https://foolproofliving.com/skillet-beef-stroganoff/#comments Tue, 08 Dec 2020 16:32:46 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3888 I first shared this beef stroganoff recipe back in 2014 after reading about it on America’s Test Kitchen. Since then…]]>

I first shared this beef stroganoff recipe back in 2014 after reading about it on America’s Test Kitchen. Since then I have made some adjustments to make it my own without sacrificing any of its deliciousness. Today, I am updating it with some new photos and a helpful recipe video.

The mix of the right cut of beef and the homemade stroganoff sauce make this easy beef stroganoff recipe absolutely divine. And with the busy holiday season, sometimes all I want is a classic made with easy-to-follow steps and a guaranteed delicious end result. I have made this for my husband and I time and time again and it simply never gets old.

A bowl of homemade easy beef stroganoff is garnished with fresh herbs and photographed from the top view. - Foolproof Living

Easy Beef Stroganoff

This stovetop beef stroganoff is quick, easy, cheap (it’s all about the meat!), made without cream of mushroom soup and comes together in one skillet. Oh, and the stroganoff gravy is accented with the tangy, sweet goodness of sour cream! If that isn’t enough to get you in the kitchen, I don’t know what will! Ready in about an hour, it’s an absolutely delicious and comforting weeknight meal that can be enjoyed at any time of year.

Skillet Beef Stroganoff is photographed from the top view from a close up distance with fresh herbs on top. It looks creamy and delicious. Foolproof Living

What is beef stroganoff?

Beef or Boeuf Stroganoff, however you like to spell it, comes from the nationality of Russia. This classic Russian dish is a mix of sauteed pieces of beef mixed in a sauce made with smetana, aka sour cream.

Ingredients

There are two components to this homemade beef stroganoff recipe – the meat and noodles, and the sauce.

Ingredients to make this recipe are photographed from the top view

Ingredients for beef stroganoff

  • Sirloin Steak Tips – I found this to be the most tender cut of beef, while also being economical, but we will talk more about the best cut of meat in a bit.
  • Wide Egg Noodles – Egg noodles cook quicker than the usual pasta and require less liquid, which works perfectly in this easy stroganoff recipe.

Ingredients for the sauce

  • Vegetable Oil – I like grapeseed oil, but any light-colored, neutral-flavored oil will do.
  • Onions – One medium yellow onion is all you need – white onions will work, too.
  • White Button Mushrooms – One 10-oz package of white button mushrooms, cleaned and sliced, is the perfect amount of mushroom goodness. If white button mushrooms are not available, cremini mushrooms are a good substitute.

PRO TIP: To clean mushrooms properly, wipe the dirt away with a damp paper towel rather than running under cold water. Mushrooms act like a sponge, so they will absorb too much water, affecting the taste of any homemade recipe.

  • All-Purpose Flour – The flour plays a part in a roux, which helps to create a thick beef stroganoff sauce.
  • Low-Sodium Chicken Broth – I really enjoy homemade chicken broth, but if you decide to purchase it from the store, make sure it is low-sodium. Regular chicken broth is packed with so much extra salt! Store the remainder sealed tight in the fridge and use within one week.
  • Low-Sodium Beef Broth – Either beef broth or bone broth will do just the trick. Again, make sure it is of the low-sodium variety, store the remainder in the fridge and use within one week.
  • Sour Cream – Here is the star of the beef stroganoff sauce recipe. Purchase a high-quality, full-fat sour cream for the best flavor.
  • Lemon Juice – Freshly squeezed lemon juice adds that special brightness at the very end.
  • Fresh Thyme or Italian Parsley – A final garnish of fresh thyme is both beautiful and delicious. Those small specks of green running throughout the sauce make this beef stroganoff all the more homemade. Fresh chopped parsley would be just as delicious, too!
  • Salt and Pepper – Make sure to season as your cooking, as well as at the very end. Once the beef dish is ready, taste and adjust seasonings as necessary. A few fresh cracks of black pepper at the very end can make all the difference!

PRO TIP: Since the sour cream and lemon juice are acidic ingredients, make sure to stir into the sauce off the heat. If you add these two finishing touches over heat, the sauce will break and curdle. Room temperature sour cream also creates a better emulsion.

Best meat for beef stroganoff

The best cut of beef for stroganoff, and incidentally the most economical, is sirloin steak tips. Although you can use the fattier ribeye or more expensive tenderloin, I found sirloin tips provide exceptional flavor while still being easy on the wallet. The secret is in how the meat is cut prior to cooking.

Best cut of meat, sirloin steak tips are photographed from the top view on a paper towel lined sheet pan to try them.

A sirloin steak tip will either come in one large piece or already cut into 2-inch wide strips (just as the case with my meat). If the beef is not cut into 2-inch wide strips, slice it into 2-inch strips with the grain. Then, turn each strip parallel to you and cut into ½-inch strips against the grain. This technique of cutting against the grain produces a tender beef stroganoff.

How to make this easy beef stroganoff and sauce from scratch?

This easy beef stroganoff recipe comes together in 3 folds.

  1. Prep the meat: prepare the meat as directed above and pat dry with paper towels. Do not skip this step as drying the meat thoroughly will help with perfect browning, which will result in tender, fall-off-the-bone kind of meat at the end.
  2. Season the meat: Season the meat with salt and pepper. In a 12-inch skillet, heat one tablespoon oil over medium-high heat. Cook half the meat for 4-5 minutes, then transfer to a bowl. Add another tablespoon of oil and repeat with the remaining half of beef. Transfer the cooked meat in a bowl and cover with aluminum foil to keep warm.
Homemade Beef Mushroom Stroganoff placed in a white bowl and photographed from the top view.
  1. Cook the aromatics: in the same skillet, add the remaining oil in medium-low heat. Add the onions, mushrooms, and salt and cook until the mushrooms have released all of their liquid, 8-10 minutes. Add flour and cook, stirring constantly, for one minute. Stir in chicken broth and beef broth, making sure to scrape the bottom of the skillet to get those bits of goodness. Return the beef back to the skillet. Put the lid on, bring it to a boil, reduce the heat to low, and let it cook until beef is tender about 30 minutes.
  2. Stir in the egg noodles: Lastly, stir in the egg noodles, cover and let cook 10-12 minutes, stirring occasionally. Remove from heat and stir in the sour cream and lemon juice off the heat. Garnish with fresh thyme and/or parsley and enjoy!

How to thicken the sauce

A thick and quick beef stroganoff is made with the help of a roux. In other words, the combination of fat and flour creates a smooth, thick, luxurious sauce that evenly coats the beef and egg noodles. Just make sure to cook the flour for at least one minute prior to adding the liquid – this helps to remove that raw flour flavor.

What side dishes go with this recipe

Since the beef and sauce are the main components of this Russian dish, the blank canvas of egg noodles works as a perfect accompaniment to soak up all that flavorful gravy. For a balanced meal, you can also serve this beef stroganoff with egg noodles along with a simple green salad (or browse through my collection of easy salad recipes to pick one for yourself) or braised red cabbage.

Can you freeze beef stroganoff with noodles?

Yes, this beef mushroom stroganoff can be frozen with a few adjustments to the recipe. Since egg noodles are softer than your usual pasta, I do not recommend freezing it with the noodles.

Therefore, if you are planning to freeze, I recommend cooking the recipe until step 7, before you add the noodles, bring it to room temperature, place in an airtight container, and freeze.

A day before you are ready to serve, thaw it in the fridge overnight. Transfer it into the pan and heat over medium heat. Add in the noodles and cook until they are softened. You should have enough liquid, but if you feel like it needs more add in some broth or water. Off the heat add in the sour cream, lemon juice, and herbs.

A Few recipe notes for the best beef stroganoff recipe

  • Get the beef sirloin really dry before adding to the skillet. A dry surface on the meat and a super hot skillet give you caramelized beef sirloin tips that provide exceptional flavor.
  • Feel like there is not enough liquid in the pan to cook the noodles? When I first tested this recipe, at first I felt like there was not enough liquid in the pan to cook the egg noodles, but it worked well in the end. Compared to pasta, egg noodles cook faster and require less liquid. After the rest of the ingredients are added in, this dish ends up having a silky and creamy texture. So don’t be tempted to add more liquid. 
  • Want it to have a deeper flavor? The original sirloin beef stroganoff recipe uses a little bit of alcohol to deepen the flavors. I wanted this to be a simple everyday-kind-of recipe so I did not include any. However, if you want to take this dish up a notch you can add in ⅓ cup of white wine or brandy into the sauce at the same time you are adding the chicken and beef broth.
  • Want a bit more indulgence? Take beef stroganoff with sour cream up a notch by replacing the sour cream with indulgent creme fraiche.
  • Want to make a healthier beef stroganoff? Replace the sour cream with an equal amount of Greek yogurt instead. It will have a little bit more of a sour taste but will have fewer calories.

Other beef dinner recipes you might also like

Make Stroganoff with Chicken

Did you know that you can make stroganoff with chicken as well? If you are looking for a leaner version of beef stroganoff, be sure to try my foolproof Chicken Stroganoff recipe. I like the version with chicken because:

  • It comes together in one pan in under an hour
  • Can be made with chicken thighs or breasts
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Recipe adapted with changes from America’s Test Kitchen.

One Skillet Easy Beef Stroganoff Recipe photographed from the top view in a skillet
Print

One Skillet Easy Beef Stroganoff Recipe

One Skillet Easy Beef Stroganoff recipe cooked in one hour. Made from scratch, this beef, mushroom, and noodle dish is a complete meal in itself. Deliciously silky and creamy.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Russing
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 6
Calories 381kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 1/2 lbs. sirloin steak tips
  • 4 tablespoons vegetable oil
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 10 ounces white button mushrooms cleaned and sliced thinly
  • 2 tablespoons all-purpose flour
  • 1 1/2 cups chicken broth low sodium or homemade
  • 1 1/2 cups beef broth low sodium
  • 3 cups wide egg noodles
  • 2/3 cup sour cream
  • 2 teaspoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 2 tablespoons fresh thyme or Italian parsley chopped
  • salt and pepper

Instructions

  • To prepare the meat: First, cut it into 2-inch strips towards the grain, and then cut each strip into 1/2-inch strips against the grain. Place it on a baking sheet lined with paper towels and pat-dry as much as possible. Season the meat with 1/2 teaspoon salt and 1/4 teaspoon pepper.
  • Heat 1-tablespoon oil in a 12-inch skillet over medium-high heat. Cook half of the meat, 4-5 minutes on each side. Transfer the cooked meat in a bowl. Repeat the same process for the other half. Cover it with aluminum foil and set aside.
  • Once the meat is cooked, in the same skillet, heat the remaining 2 tablespoons oil. Add onion, mushroom, and 1/2 teaspoon salt, and cook, stirring frequently, until the juices of the mushrooms evaporate, 8-10 minutes.
  • Add flour and cook, stirring constantly, for a minute.
  • Stir in the chicken and beef broths. Scrape the bottom of the pan; making sure that all the bits and pieces of the meat is mixed in the liquid.
  • Return the beef into the mixture. Put the lid on and let it cook over low heat until beef is tender for 25-30 minutes.
  • Stir in the noodles, cover, and cook, stirring occasionally until noodles are cooked, 10 -12 minutes.
  • Off the heat, add the sour cream and lemon juice. Give it a big stir.
  • When ready to serve, garnish it with chopped thyme and/or fresh parsley.
  • Serve.

Video

Notes

A FEW TIPS FOR THE BEST HOMEMADE BEEF STROGANOFF
  • Get the beef sirloin really dry before adding to the skillet. A dry surface on the meat and a super hot skillet give you caramelized beef sirloin tips that provide exceptional flavor.
  • Enough liquid in the pan? When I first tested this recipe, at first I felt like there was not enough liquid in the pan to cook the egg noodles, but it worked well in the end. Compared to pasta, egg noodles cooks faster and require less liquid. After the rest of the ingredients are added in, this dish ends up having a silky and creamy texture. So don’t be tempted to add more liquid. 
  • Want it to have a deeper flavor? The original sirloin beef stroganoff recipe uses a little bit of alcohol to deepen the flavors. I wanted this to be a simple everyday-kind-of recipe so I did not include any. However, if you want to take this dish up a notch you can add in ⅓ cup of white wine or brandy into the sauce at the same time you are adding the chicken and beef broth.
  • Want a bit more indulgence? Take beef stroganoff with sour cream up a notch by replacing the sour cream with indulgent creme fraiche.
  • Want to make a healthier beef stroganoff? Replace the sour cream with an equal amount of Greek yogurt instead. It will have a little bit more of a sour taste, but will have less calories.

Nutrition

Calories: 381kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 31g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Cholesterol: 96mg | Sodium: 529mg | Potassium: 744mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 171IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 71mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/skillet-beef-stroganoff/feed/ 24
Easy Spaghetti Bolognese https://foolproofliving.com/spaghetti-bolognese/ https://foolproofliving.com/spaghetti-bolognese/#comments Tue, 25 Feb 2020 21:10:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=5274 Spaghetti Bolognese and I go back quite a while. I remember my mom making this classic Italian meal at home…]]>

Spaghetti Bolognese and I go back quite a while. I remember my mom making this classic Italian meal at home when I was growing up. To me, the scent of meaty tomato sauce simmering away on the stovetop is the definition of comfort food.

But unlike my mom’s version that took hours on the stovetop, I’ve updated the recipe to make a quick bolognese sauce that can be prepared any night of the week. And the best part you ask? It is a crowd-pleaser.

homemade spaghetti bolognese placed in a bowl garnished with parmesan cheese and fresh basil and photographed from the top view.

Made with a creamy bolognese sauce this weeknight pasta dish will be one you’ll make time and time again in about one-third of the time it used to take my mom. The trick is all about good-quality ingredients – the best type of meat, the right tomatoes, and fresh herbs and spices.

What is spaghetti bolognese?

Spaghetti bolognese is just in the name – spaghetti tossed in a sauce made from tomatoes, minced beef, garlic, wine, herbs, and spices. It is a classic Italian dish that has some American roots.

A traditional bolognese sauce made in the northern city of Bologna, Italy is served with broad, flat noodles such as tagliatelle, pappardelle or fettuccine. Another popular way to prepare it is lasagna bolognese. The thinking is that the thick sauce blends better with wider-shaped pasta.

But tossing the bolognese sauce with spaghetti is an Americanized version of the classic. In other words, much quicker and easier, perfect for busy weeknights.

What is the difference between spaghetti bolognese and spaghetti sauce?

Bolognese sauce is a variation of ragu (but ragu is not bolognese – I know, confusing!). Typically, it is a mixture of beef, pork, white wine, milk, tomatoes, and a few additional herbs and seasonings.

Spaghetti sauce, on the other hand, is simply a tomato-based sauce seasoned with a few aromatics such as onions, garlic, herbs, and spices.

Pasta bolognese ingredients

The ingredients for pasta bolognese are broken down into four main groups – the sauce, the meat, the herbs and spices, and the pasta and garnish.

Ingredients for this recipe are placed on a marble and photographed from the top view

Sauce ingredients

  • Vegetable Oil – I like this start this traditional bolognese with a mild Olive Oil from Italy.
  • Onion + Garlic cloves – One large or two small onions and three cloves of garlic will produce a savory flavor that really allows the meat to shine. Many bolognese sauce recipes start with what is known as a soffritto (onions, carrots, celery), but I find that less is more here. If you would like to go the more traditional route, simply replace half the onions with an equal amount of chopped celery and carrots.
  • Diced Tomatoes – High-quality canned diced or crushed tomatoes will produce the most flavorful meat sauce. I prefer San Marzano tomatoes, which are sweeter and richer in flavor. However, you can also used cherry tomatoes (during the summer months) or even plu tomatoes.
  • Tomato Paste – An Italian tomato paste is best. Purchase a tomato paste that comes in a tube, rather than the can.
  • Red Wine – The flavors of the wine will concentrate as they cook down, so choose a medium-bodied, dry red wine such as Pinot Noir, Merlot or Chianti.
  • Chicken Stock – I prefer the lighter flavor of chicken stock, but for a richer, more complex bolognese sauce, use beef broth instead. Always make sure to purchase a low-sodium variety.

Best meat for this recipe

  • 85/15 Ground Beef – I prefer to use only ground beef (some also call it “minced beef”) for my bolognese sauce. A lot of recipes typically include some type of pork, such as pancetta (uncured Italian bacon) or ground pork, but since I am not a big pork eater to begin with, I stick with using all ground beef. As always, go with what works for you.

Alternatively, if you want you can use ground turkey or ground chicken as well.

PRO TIP: If you’d like a mix of meat rather than just one kind, many grocery stores sell a pre-mixed combination of ground beef, pork, and veal. It will be labeled as meatball mix or meatloaf mix. Simply ask your butcher if you can’t find it!

Herbs and spices

The list of spices and herbs to put in my bolognese meat sauce recipe could be as long or as short as you want. Below are the ones I used but feel free to switch it up with whatever herbs and spices you have on hand.

  • Oregano – Dried oregano is a wonderfully classic herb that sings all things Italian to me. Make sure you don’t skip it!
  • Thyme + Bay Leaves – I used the entire thyme spring and tie it in kitchen twine with the bay leaf. The delicate leaves from the thyme fall right off, so all I have to do is remove the wrapped stems and leaf when the bolognese sauce is done cooking.
  • Kosher Salt + Black Pepper – Use the amount called for in the recipe. At the end of cooking, taste and adjust the seasoning as necessary.

Pasta and Garnish

  • Dried Spaghetti – It’s spaghetti bolognese after all! We will talk more about how to cook pasta in a little bit, but any long shaped pasta, such as linguine or fettuccine, will work too.
  • Fresh Basil – I included the basil in garnish since you want to add the basil just before serving. The residual heat from the pasta will lock in its fresh flavor and green color. If you were to add it to the sauce, the basil would wilt and turn black.
  • Parmesan Cheese – A final sprinkling of Parmesan cheese is all this traditional bolognese meal needs.
  • Optional: If you like heat, a pinch of red pepper flakes can also be sprinkled on top before serving.

Related: If you like this pasta dish, you might also like my Baked Ziti with Meat sauce. If you want more of a vegetarian pasta dish, then try this Eggplant Pomodoro Pasta or top your spaghetti off with this delicious Napoli Sauce.

How to make this recipe?

This homemade spaghetti bolognese comes together quick and easy by first cooking the minced meat, then the sauce and pasta, and mixing it all together – this is the trick to serving pasta!

Pasta should always cook with the meat tomato sauce for 1-2 minutes on the stovetop. This allows for the pasta and sauce to come together as one dish.

Quick Homemade Bolognese Sauce photographed from the top view while it is simmering in the pot.

To properly cook pasta bolognese at home, simply:

Cook ground/minced beef

  1. Sweat the onions. In a large Dutch oven (or a large skillet) over medium high heat, add 2 tablespoons of olive oil. Add the finely chopped onion, a pinch of salt and cook until softened, about 5-7 minutes.
  2. Brown the meat. Add the ground beef and break it up into smaller chunks with a wooden spoon. Allow to cook for a few minutes without stirring to get crispy and brown, then stir with a wooden spoon and cook through (until meat is no longer pink), about 7-8 minutes.

Make the sauce

  1. Add the tomatoes. Once the meat is nicely browned, add the diced tomatoes and tomato paste. Cook, stirring frequently scraping the bottom of the pan, for 5 minutes.
  2. Add the herbs and liquids, then simmer. Add the garlic, oregano, thyme and bay leaf bundle, salt, pepper, red wine and chicken stock. Give the sauce a stir (making sure to scrape all the browned bits at the bottom) and bring it to a simmer. Reduce the heat to medium-low, cover and let cook 20-25 minutes, stirring occasionally. Give it a taste, and if necessary, season with more salt and pepper.
  3. Cook the spaghetti noodles. Meanwhile, bring a large pot of water to a boil and season liberally with salt. Cook spaghetti one minute shy of al dente according to the package directions. Reserve 1 cup of the starchy cooking water and drain.
  4. Toss! Remove the herb bundle from the sauce and add the cooked spaghetti. Toss it all together, making sure all the pasta is coated with the sauce. At this point, you can adjust the pasta bolognese as needed by adding a few splashes of the reserved pasta cooking water to loosen it up to your desired consistency. Simmer for 1-2 minutes to finish cooking the spaghetti, then remove from the heat.
  5. Garnish and Serve. Finish with the fresh basil and Parmesan cheese. Transfer to serving bowls and enjoy!

How long does this recipe take to cook?

Typically, bolognese sauce takes a few hours to simmer on the stovetop to develop a deep, rich, savory flavor. But with just a few good-quality ingredients, this quick bolognese sauce recipe only takes 20-25 minutes to simmer.

A bowl of Spaghetti Bolognese Sauce is placed in a bowl and photographed from the front view.

Variations

Below are a few variations for this homemade bolognese sauce to help you create a richer sauce recipe as you make this in your own kitchen.

  • Pork and Beef: Substitute half the ground beef with an equal amount of ground pork. To really bring out the pork flavor, before cooking the onions, render 4 oz of diced pancetta or bacon in the Dutch oven until browned and crispy. Remove with a slotted spoon, pour off all but 2 Tablespoons of the pork fat, omit the vegetable oil and begin making the bolognese sauce recipe. Add the pancetta or bacon back in when you add the remaining herbs and seasonings. If you need a suggestion, here is a more authentic bolognese sauce recipe you can try.
  • With Cream: Once you remove the spaghetti bolognese from the heat, stir in ½ cup of room temperature heavy cream for a smooth, luxurious sauce.
  • Without Wine: Replace the wine with an equal amount of chicken or beef stock. Remember the beef stock will produce a richer, meatier flavor.
  • With Worcestershire Sauce: Adding 1-2 Tablespoons of Worcestershire sauce will give you a rich bolognese sauce. It’s a secret tip that gives this sauce that extra bit of zing!
  • With Jar Sauce: Replace the diced tomatoes and tomato paste with a large jar of your favorite store-bought spaghetti sauce. 
  • Want to make it in a slow cooker? Check out my friend Katie’s Slow Cooker Bolognese recipe.
  • Serve it with Garlic Bread, Garlic Butter Green Beans, or a simple green salad like Butter Lettuce Salad.

How To Store Leftovers & How To Freeze?

If you have leftovers, you can place them in an airtight container and keep in the fridge. Leftover spaghetti bolognese will still be fresh up to 3 days.

Also, if possible, I recommend making just enough pasta to serve. Then keep the leftover sauce separate if you can. This way, when you are ready to serve it again you can make a fresh batch of spaghetti and top it off with the sauce.

This is especially a good idea if you are planning to freeze it. I do not recommend freezing bolognese sauce mixed with pasta. Rather, freeze the sauce in an airtight container after it fully cools down.

More Weeknight Beef Dinner Ideas:

If you try my easy Spaghetti Bolognese recipe or any other pasta recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Spaghetti Bolognese recipe placed in a bolw, garnished with parmesan cheese, and fresh basil and photographed from the top view.
Print

Spaghetti Bolognese Recipe

A weeknight Spaghetti Bolognese recipe that is rich, filling, and hearty. Ready in about 45 minutes, this simplified Italian pasta dish delivers big flavors in little time.  
Course Dinner
Cuisine Italian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 623kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoons vegetable oil
  • 1 large or 2 small onion, chopped
  • 1- pound ground beef 85% 15%
  • 1 28 ounces can of diced tomatoes
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 3 cloves of garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • 1 sprig of thyme tied in a bundle
  • 1 bay leaf
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1/2 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1/2 cup red wine
  • 1 cup chicken stock
  • 1/2 cup fresh basil roughly chopped
  • 1 cup Parmesan cheese shredded
  • 1 pound (16 oz.) dried spaghetti or linguini

Instructions

  • Heat olive oil in a Dutch oven (or any other heavy bottom pot) in medium heat. Add onion. Cook until wilted, 7-9 minutes.
  • Stir in the tomatoes and tomato paste. Cook, stirring frequently for 5 minutes.
  • Add in the ground beef. Using a wooden spoon break it into smaller chunks. Cook, stirring frequently, until it is browned, 7-8 minutes.
  • Add the garlic, dried oregano, bundle thyme, salt, pepper, bay leaf, red wine, and chicken stock. Give everything a stir. Bring it to a simmer.
  • Reduce the heat to medium-low, put the lid on, and let it to cook for 20-25 minutes, making sure to stir occasionally.
  • Meanwhile, bring a large pot of salted water to boil and cook the spaghetti according to the instructions on its package. *Please read the Pro Tip below*
  • Once the spaghetti is ready, drain it in a colander.
  • Discard the thyme bundle and the bay leaf from the Bolognese sauce.
  • Add drained pasta into the sauce. Stir it all together making sure that the pasta is generously coated with the sauce.
  • Stir in the fresh basil and top it off with grated Parmesan cheese.
  • Serve.

Video

Notes

VARIATIONS:
  • Pork and Beef: Substitute half the ground beef with an equal amount of ground pork. To really bring out the pork flavor, before cooking the onions, render 4 oz of diced pancetta or bacon in the Dutch oven until browned and crispy. Remove with a slotted spoon, pour off all but 2 Tablespoons of the pork fat, omit the vegetable oil and begin making the bolognese sauce recipe. Add the pancetta or bacon back in when you add the remaining herbs and seasonings.
  • With Cream: Once you remove the spaghetti bolognese from the heat, stir in ½ cup of room temperature heavy cream for a smooth, luxurious sauce.
  • Without Wine: Replace the wine with an equal amount of chicken or beef stock. Remember the beef stock will produce a richer, meatier flavor.
  • With Worcestershire Sauce: Adding 1-2 Tablespoons of Worcestershire sauce will give you a rich bolognese sauce. It’s a secret tip that gives this sauce that extra bit of zing!
  • With Jar Sauce: Replace the diced tomatoes and tomato paste with a large jar of your favorite store-bought spaghetti sauce. 
  • PRO TIP: Cook the pasta shy of one minute according to package directions, reserve 1 cup of the starchy cooking water, drain and add the pasta to the pot with the sauce. This is the secret to restaurant-quality pasta! The pasta will continue cooking in the pot with the sauce, releasing it’s natural starch and sticking to the sauce. The reserved cooking water is there for insurance, just in case you need to adjust the sauce’s consistency.

Nutrition

Calories: 623kcal | Carbohydrates: 62g | Protein: 30g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Cholesterol: 66mg | Sodium: 810mg | Potassium: 521mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 317IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 240mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/spaghetti-bolognese/feed/ 23
Hearty Crockpot Vegetable Beef Soup (Slow Cooker Method) https://foolproofliving.com/crockpot-vegetable-beef-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/crockpot-vegetable-beef-soup/#comments Sat, 04 Jan 2020 18:58:45 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=27040 Why Should You Try This Recipe? Beef and vegetables. Is there really anything better? If you ask me, the answer…]]>

Why Should You Try This Recipe?

Beef and vegetables. Is there really anything better? If you ask me, the answer is no. Here are a few reasons why this crock pot vegetable beef soup recipe is awesome:

  • Hands off cooking: Don’t get me wrong, I make my Stovetop Vegetable Beef Soup and Beef Barley Vegetable Soup often and it simmering on the stove top is as comforting as possible on a cold winter day. But to be honest, sometimes I don’t want to spend all day in the kitchen cooking and cleaning. That’s the beauty of this CrockPot vegetable soup recipe. Other than searing the beef stew meat and chopping up the vegetables, there is little hands-on time to do anything else. Most of the work is done by the slow cooker.
  • Stores & Freezes Well: The best part is that you can make a big batch to serve some right away and freeze the rest for later to have soup ready on hand whenever you don’t feel like cooking.
  • A Crowd Pleaser: Serve it by itself with a loaf of crusty no knead bread, bulgur wheat pilaf, or one of my healthy quinoa salads on the side, it is guaranteed to be a great family meal.
Crockpot Vegetable Beef Soup placed in a bowl and served with crusty bread photographed from the top view.

Ingredients:

The ingredient profile for this soup is not much different from the stove-top vegetable beef soup recipe.

All Ingredients for this recipe are laid out and photographed from the top view.
  • Beef Stew Beef – The right cut of beef makes all the difference. I usually buy a whole chuck roast and cut it into smaller pieces myself. However, you can also purchase pre-cut stew meat to make this soup. Below I will go into detail about the other cuts of meat you can use.
  • Kosher Salt + Black Pepper – For seasoning both the beef and slow-cooker stew.
  • Vegetable Oil – My favorite vegetable oils are grapeseed or avocado oil.
  • Onions, Carrots, Celery – Also known as mirepoix, this simple mix of aromatic vegetables offer so much flavor. I like to leave them in large pieces for a chunky beef stew.
  • Garlic – Mince the garlic cloves, so they provide the most intense garlic flavor. 
  • Yukon Gold Potatoes – Cut the potatoes in small cubes for size and textural variance in your vegetable beef soup.
  • Diced Tomatoes
  • Fresh Green Beans – Trimmed and cut in half, the smaller size makes it easier to scoop up the green beans with a spoon.
  • Low-Sodium Chicken or Beef Stock – A low-sodium variety helps to control the amount of salt. This way, the seasoning is all up to you! Purchase a high-quality, organic brand for the best flavor or better yet make your own chicken stock.
  • Tomato Juice – Make sure the label reads 100% tomato juice.
  • Frozen Peas – No need to thaw the frozen green peas. The peas are small enough so that they simply warm through in the veggie stew. Or if you have it, you can also use blanched peas.
  • Fresh Parsley
All ingredients are placed in crockpot and photographed from the top view

Need a suggestion for a great slow cooker? I own this one (affiliate link) for over 7 years now and it never failed me. It is easy to clean and operate. I cannot recommend it enough.

Best cut of beef for soup

I always buy a whole Chuck Roast (also known as Chuck Shoulder, Chuck-Eye Roast, or Top Chuck) and cut it into large chunks (about 1 ½ inch) myself – or ask the butcher behind the counter to do it for me.

This is just my personal preference, as stew meat is a mixture of pre-cut cuts of beef, so you never really know what you’re getting. The below passage is from TheKitchn and explains why getting pre-packaged stew meat is not the best option:

Packages of pre-cut stew meat are often assembled by the butcher or meat department from the odds and ends from other different cuts. While this might sound like a good thing — viva varieté! —this isn’t actually the best news for your stew.

All those little scraps from different muscle groups often cook quite differently. Some might take longer or slower, resulting in some perfectly tender bites and some tough and chewy bites. Also, some of the scraps will probably be quite lean, while others contain a lot of fat, and still others have a good amount of gristle. These inconsistencies make it difficult to cook a stew where every bite gives you the same, delicious experience.

Citation: The Kitchn – Why Stew Meat Isn’t Actually the Best Choice for Stews

Chuck Roast is economical and comes with the added bonus of extra marbling (fat) throughout the meat, creating a fall-apart tender beef vegetable soup every time.

If you want to try making this soup with other cuts of beef, I would recommend buying Round Tip or London Broil (aka Top Round) and cutting them into smaller chunks.

A crockpot filled with vegetables and beef is photographed as a woman is pouring beef broth into the mixture from the front view.

Fresh vegetables vs frozen vegetables

  • Crockpot vegetable beef soup with fresh vegetables – I prefer to use fresh vegetables that are in season, except for frozen peas, for the best texture and flavor. The beauty of using fresh vegetables is that you can make this CrockPot vegetable beef stew any time of year with any variety of your favorite vegetables that look best at the market.
  • Slow cooker vegetable beef soup with frozen vegetables – If you do decide to go the frozen vegetable route, omit the fresh carrots, green beans, and frozen peas and purchase a 24-oz bag of frozen mixed vegetables instead and add them during the last 30 minutes of cooking. If you add the frozen vegetables too early, they will become gummy, overcooked and mushy.

How to cook this recipe?

To cook this vegetable beef soup in the crockpot, simply:

  1. Sear the meat: Dry the beef as much as possible (see PRO TIP below). Season with salt and pepper. In a cast-iron skillet, heat 1 tablespoon of oil over medium-high heat.
    When the oil starts to shimmer (about 2 minutes), add as many pieces of cubed beef as possible without crowding the pan and cook until nicely browned on all sides, about 3-4 minutes on each side.
    Transfer the seared meat to a plate and continue cooking in batches with the rest of the beef.
  2. Place all ingredients (except peas) in the crockpot: Place the onions, carrots, celery, garlic, potatoes, tomatoes (and juice), green beans, seared meat, broth, tomato juice, salt, and pepper in the bowl of your slow cooker and give it a stir. Cook on LOW for 8-9 hours.
  3. Add the frozen peas: During the last 30 minutes of cooking, add the frozen peas into the soup.
  4. Taste & Serve: Give it a taste and add more seasoning if necessary. Ladle into bowls, garnish with fresh parsley, and serve.

My pro tips on searing the beef:

While I know that it is an extra step, for the most flavorful homemade vegetable beef soup in a CrockPot, I think it is essential to brown the beef before placing it in the slow cooker. Below are my two pro tips when it comes to searing beef:

  1. Dry the meat thoroughly and make sure that the cast iron skillet is super hot: To dry the meat properly, line a baking sheet with a few sheets of paper towels and transfer the beef to the prepared baking sheet. Dab off excess moisture with another paper towel.
    The browning process happens faster when you start with a super hot pan. Remember, our goal is not to fully cook the beef. Rather, brown it on all sides for flavor.
  2. Season the meat as soon as you are ready to place it in the skillet: Salt draws out moisture, meaning all that work you just took to get your meat super dry will be lost. I like to season my beef cubes in four batches, while the oil is heating up in the pan.

I know it seems like a lot of extra work, but trust me, it’s totally worth it! Taking the extra time to sear produces tender chunks of beef with every bite.

With this being said, you can make this vegetable beef soup without browning the beef, but you will end up with a soup with tougher beef chunks rather than soft (falling off the bone-like) meat.

Browned beef is photographed along with fresh vegetables

How to freeze

This CrockPot beef broth soup with stew meat can be frozen for up to 3 months. Be sure to bring the soup to room temperature before freezing and follow one of the two options below:

  1. Store in an airtight container: Ladle into individual airtight containers and pop one out of the freezer to defrost in the fridge overnight every time the craving strikes.
    To rewarm, bring to a boil over medium heat in a small saucepan, pour into a serving bowl and enjoy!
  2. Store in silicone reusable bags or plastic resealable bags: Transfer the beef vegetable soup to a few reusable silicone bags (like Stasher – affiliate link) or freezer-safe plastic storage bags, with a bit of room at the top.
    Push out all the air, seal tight, label, date, and lay flat in your freezer. Remove from the freezer the night before to defrost in your fridge. Transfer to a large pot, bring to a boil over medium heat, and reduce to low to keep warm. Ladle into bowls and enjoy!

Can I prep everything a day in advance? Make Ahead Instructions:

If you’d like to get a step ahead, you can sear the beef and keep it in an airtight container a day in advance. You can also prep the rest of the vegetables and keep them in the fridge until the next day.

The next morning, place everything (except the peas) into the CrockPot, stir and set to cook for the day. Add the peas in 30 minutes before you are ready for dinner. And serve!

FAQs

How long does it take to cook this hearty beef vegetable soup recipe?

This soup requires around 45 minutes of prep time, including searing the meat and prepping the vegetables, and then continues to cook on LOW for 8-9 hours (on HIGH 6-7 hours) in your slow cooker.

How many calories in vegetable beef soup?

One serving of this beef and veggie soup is only 445 calories per serving! Hearty, healthy, and packed full of protein from the beef and veggies, it’s a filling meal.

What goes with beef soup?

I like to serve this easy beef soup with a warm, crusty slice of No-Knead Artisan Bread, buttery Brioche bread, Almond Flour Biscuits (for a gluten-free option), or Sweet Potato Biscuits to soak up all those wonderful juices. A simple green salad is an extra special touch that offers a comforting and well-balanced meal.

a bowl of Crockpot Vegetable Beef Soup is served with crusty bread and photographed from the front view.

Variations for this recipe

Below are a few recommendations to adjust the beef and veggie soup to your liking:

  • With Leftover Pot Roast – A fun and interesting way to use up leftover pot roast in your fridge. Simply skip the seared beef steps, chop the pot roast into 1-inch pieces, and add all the remaining ingredients to the bowl of your slow cooker. Cook as directed.
  • Without Potatoes – Replace the potatoes with another root vegetable of choice, such as rutabaga, turnips, or parsnips. Alternatively, use sweet potatoes during the fall months for that extra unique fall flavor.
  • Without Tomatoes – Omitting the tomatoes will also omit the liquid that comes along with them. To replace that moisture, add an additional 2 cups low-sodium chicken or beef broth.
  • Without Tomato Sauce/Juice – Omit the tomato juice and add an additional 1 ½ cups low-sodium chicken or beef broth.
A ladle of soup is photographed from the front from a close up view.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Crockpot Vegetable Beef Soup recipe or any other slow cooker recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Crockpot Vegetable Beef Soup Recipe Image
Print

Hearty Crockpot Vegetable Beef Soup Recipe (Slow Cooker Method)

A hearty CrockPot Vegetable Beef Soup recipe packed with chunks of tender beef and healthy vegetables cooked in a rich broth. Great for meal prep and freezer friendly.
Course Soup
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 45 minutes
Cook Time 8 hours
Total Time 8 hours 45 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 445kcal

Ingredients

For The Beef:

  • 2 pounds chuck roast or beef stew meat *, cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 3 tablespoons of vegetable oil divided

For The Soup:

  • 2 medium onions chopped (approximately 1 cup)
  • 5 carrots peeled and cut into 1/2 -inch thick slices (approximately1 cup)
  • 5 stalks of celery chopped (approximately 1 cup)
  • 3 cloves of garlic peeled and minced
  • 1 pound Yukon gold potatoes cut into small cubes
  • 1 can 15 oz. diced tomatoes
  • 1 ½ cups green beans
  • 4 cups chicken or beef stock low sodium or no salt added
  • 1 ½ cups of tomato juice
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 cup frozen peas
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Dry the beef: Line a baking sheet with a few sheets of paper towels. Transfer the cubed beef onto the sheet and pat dry with paper towels. Season with salt and pepper on all sides.
  • Heat 1 tablespoon oil in a large saute pan (I used my cast iron skillet) over medium-high heat. When the oil is sizzling hot, add in the cubed meat (as many as you can without crowding the pan) and cook for 3-4 minutes on each side or until the meat is nicely browned. Continue the same process with the rest of the meat. I had to do it in 3 batches.
  • Place the seared meat onto a plate and set aside.
  • To make the soup, place onion, carrots, celery, garlic, potatoes, diced tomatoes (with all its juices), green beans, seared meat, and salt and pepper into the bowl of your slow cooker. 
  • Pout in the beef stock and tomato juice. Give it a gentle stir.
  • Cook on low for 8-9 hours or on high for 6-7 hours.
  • Stir in the frozen peas in the last 30 minutes. 
  • Ladle into bowls, garnish with parsley, and serve.

Notes

  • The Best cut of beef for this soup: I always buy a whole Chuck Roast (also known as Chuck Shoulder, Chuck-Eye Roast, or Top Chuck) and cut it into large chunks (about 1 ½ inch) myself – or ask the butcher behind the counter to do it for me.
  • Store in an airtight container: Ladle into individual airtight containers and pop one out of the freezer to defrost in the fridge overnight every time the craving strikes.
    To rewarm, bring to a boil over medium heat in a small saucepan, pour into a serving bowl and enjoy!
  • Store in silicone reusable bags or plastic resealable bags: Transfer the beef vegetable soup to a few reusable silicone bags or freezer-safe plastic storage bags, with a bit of room at the top.
    Push out all the air, seal tight, label, date, and lay flat in your freezer. Remove from the freezer the night before to defrost in your fridge. Transfer to a large pot, bring to a boil over medium heat, and reduce to low to keep warm. Ladle into bowls and enjoy!

Nutrition

Calories: 445kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 31g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 82mg | Sodium: 1188mg | Potassium: 1198mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 7048IU | Vitamin C: 37mg | Calcium: 90mg | Iron: 5mg

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/crockpot-vegetable-beef-soup/feed/ 15
Easy Baked Ziti with Meat Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/baked-ziti/ https://foolproofliving.com/baked-ziti/#comments Fri, 08 Nov 2019 12:19:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3229 Ingredients For Baked Ziti  Making this baked ziti with ground beef recipe requires a short list of everyday ingredients.  You’ll…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

My best friend just had a baby, and before she came home, I asked other parents how I could help. Almost everyone said the same thing. Feed them. Not gifts, not visits, just dinner waiting in the fridge. 

Since it is still cold outside, I wanted to bring something cozy that they could heat up whenever they found a quiet moment. This baked ziti recipe fits the bill perfectly. This is a recipe I’ve been making for more than ten years, and every time I serve it, someone asks for the recipe. 

Here is what makes it such a good meal to share: 

  • Easy to assemble ahead and reheat when needed 
  • Comforting and satisfying without too much effort 
  • It has everything I love in a classic pasta-with-meat-sauce dinner. Creamy ricotta pockets, a slightly tangy tomato sauce, and a golden-brown, melted cheese top. 

I put the dish together, wrote simple baking instructions on top, and left it on their doorstep. Within half an hour, I started getting thank-you texts filled with lots of emojis. 

Mission accomplished. 

When I make it for us at home, I keep things easy with a green salad on the side and call it dinner. It never disappoints.

Ingredients For Baked Ziti 

Making this baked ziti with ground beef recipe requires a short list of everyday ingredients. 

You’ll find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are a few notes from my testing, along with easy substitutions so you can make it your own, in case you want to swap the protein, use another pasta shape, or lighten it up with veggies.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

For the Meat Sauce

The base of this sauce is very similar to my Tomato Basil Sauce Recipe, but if you want a shortcut, you can use your favorite store-bought marinara instead. I like Rao’s, but any of your favorite jarred marinara would work here.

If you want to make it from scratch as I did, below are the ingredients you’ll need:

Olive oil: I recommend using a good-quality extra virgin olive oil, though avocado oil or even a bit of butter will work in a pinch.

Ground beef (hamburger meat): I recommend using 85/15 ground beef for the best flavor, but 93/7 works well if you prefer a leaner cut. Alternatively, you can use ground turkey or ground chicken for a lighter option. You can also make baked ziti with sausage by replacing the beef with mild or hot Italian sausage. 

Onion: You can use either yellow or white onions; both work well here.

Crushed tomatoes: Canned crushed tomatoes work best for a smooth sauce. You can also use canned diced tomatoes; just break them up with a fork or wooden spoon as they cook to make the texture of the sauce smoother.

Red wine vinegar: Adding a little splash brightens the sauce and gives it a restaurant-style taste. If you don’t have it on hand, white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar works just as well.

Garlic: Fresh garlic is best here. You can also use garlic powder, but since it is stronger, I recommend using about 1/2 teaspoon.

Spices and herbs: I’m using kosher salt, black pepper, cumin, red pepper flakes, fresh basil, and fresh parsley. But feel free to play around with the seasonings.

If you don’t have fresh herbs, dried basil or dried parsley works too. You can also add more chili flakes for a spicy baked ziti, or mix in oregano or Italian seasoning for extra depth.

A note on using cumin: The small amount of cumin I use is a subtle secret ingredient that adds a warm, savory note to the meat. It is an ode to my Mediterranean upbringing and can be omitted if preferred.

For the Pasta

Ziti pasta: Any tubular pasta, like penne or rigatoni, works well because the sauce gets inside the pasta and helps distribute the sauce evenly throughout. If you need a gluten-free option, you can easily use your favorite gluten-free pasta.

Salt: Make sure your pasta water is well-seasoned; it should taste “like the sea.” This is the best way to season your pasta.

To Assemble the Ziti

Ricotta cheese: Whole-milk ricotta melts creamier and gives the baked ziti a richer texture. You can use store-bought ricotta or Homemade Ricotta Cheese (this is an old Ina Garten recipe I have been making for years).

Low-fat ricotta works in a pinch, but it won’t give you the same creamy texture.

Mozzarella cheese: Low-moisture mozzarella is best because it melts really well without releasing extra liquid. If you’re short on time, pre-shredded mozzarella works, but I really recommend buying a block and shredding it yourself; the melt is a lot better. 

You can use low-fat mozzarella, but the creaminess from full-fat cheese is what makes this dish so creamy and comforting. You can also add a handful of shredded Parmesan cheese on top for a bit of an umami kick.

Parsley (optional): I usually just sprinkle a little on top as a garnish, and it adds a nice brightness to the dish. If you don’t have fresh parsley, you can use dried instead.

How to Make Baked Ziti with Meat Sauce (Step-by-Step)

If you’ve never made baked ziti before, think of it as a cozy, layered pasta bake with three simple parts: a quick meat sauce, pasta, and a creamy ricotta-mozzarella layer.

It looks impressive, but truly comes together with just a few easy steps. Here’s how I make it:

Step 1 – Preheat the oven: Start by preheating the oven to 375°F (190°C). 

Steps showing how to make the meat sauce for baked ziti.

Step 2 – Make the meat sauce: Heat a tablespoon of oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the ground beef and cook for 8-10 minutes, breaking it apart as it browns.

Equipment Tip: For years, I used a wooden spoon to break the large chunks of ground meat, but I recently purchased a meat chopper that makes the process so much easier and quicker.

Step 3 – Build the sauce: Next, add the onions and cook until softened, for about 7-8 minutes. Stir in the tomatoes, garlic, red wine vinegar, red pepper flakes, cumin, salt, and pepper. Bring everything to a simmer and cook for 10-12 minutes until thickened, and up to 30-45 minutes for the deepest, most robust flavor. 

Turn off the heat and stir in the fresh basil to keep it fresh.

Pro tip: While this recipe is simple and thickens in 10-12 minutes, if you have some extra time (30-45 minutes), simmer the sauce longer over low heat. A longer simmer deepens the flavor and yields the most flavor.

Cooked ziti in a slotted spoon over the pan.

Step 4 – Cook the pasta: While the sauce simmers, bring a large pot of water to a boil. Add 1 tablespoon of salt and the ziti noodles.

I recommend cooking until al dente for about 8-9 minutes, but follow the package instructions for the best timing. This step is important because it will continue to cook in the oven. If you overcook the pasta, it will become mushy and possibly fall apart.

Drain the pasta and set aside.

A Note on Reserving Pasta Water: Most pasta recipes recommend reserving pasta water to thin out the sauce if needed. I have been making this recipe for years and never needed it because the meat sauce already has the right consistency. Still, feel free to reserve some if it makes you feel better.

Steps showing how to assemble baked ziti with hamburger recipe.

Step 5 – Layer ziti and meat sauce: To assemble the baked ziti and meat sauce, spread a thin layer (about 3-4 tablespoons) of sauce on the bottom of a large oven-proof casserole dish (I used a 9×11 Pyrex).

Add half the pasta ziti, then half the meat sauce, then dollops of ricotta (about ½ cup in total) over the top. Repeat with the remaining ziti, remaining sauce, and the rest of the ricotta. Finish by sprinkling it with shredded mozzarella over the top.

Baked ziti with meat sauce from the top view.

Step 6 – Bake, garnish, and serve: Bake for 30 minutes, uncovered, or until the cheese on top is melted and looks golden brown. Sprinkle fresh parsley on top right before serving.

Helpful Tips for the Best Baked Ziti

Simmer the sauce until thick: A watery sauce is the most common reason your baked ziti pasta turns soupy. Letting the sauce simmer for 10-12 minutes helps it reduce (and thicken) and cling better to the pasta. Feel free to let the sauce simmer a bit longer if it is not thickened by the recommended cooking time. However, keep a close eye on it and stir frequently.

Use full-fat cheese for the best taste and texture: Yes, you can make this dish with low-fat ricotta and mozzarella, but should you? Probably not, because the final dish won’t be as rich and creamy compared to the version made with whole-milk ricotta and mozzarella. Full-fat cheese melts creamier and gives the casserole that oozy restaurant-style taste and texture.

Shred your mozzarella: Pre-shredded cheese can be used in a pinch, but it’s coated in anti-caking agents that prevent it from melting smoothly. If you have a few extra minutes, shredding a block of mozzarella gives you the best melt.

You do not need to cover the top: As I was working on this recipe, I saw some versions of it that suggested covering the top with aluminum foil during baking. I tested it both ways and did not think it was needed. There is enough sauce (aka liquid) in this recipe that it won’t dry out when baked without a covering. Plus, a 375°F oven is gentle enough to cook it without drying it out.

If the cheese didn’t brown to your liking: Simply place it under the broiler for a minute or two. Keep a close eye on it, as it goes from golden to burnt quickly.

If your baked ziti turned out dry: This usually happens if you are using a larger casserole dish than recommended, as there is not enough liquid to cover the pasta. When the ingredients are spread too thin, there is not enough sauce to fully cover the pasta, causing excessive moisture to evaporate during baking. I tested this recipe using a standard 9×13-inch and 9×11-inch casserole dish, and they both worked well. If you use a large casserole dish, the pasta could dry out.

If your pasta is dry after reheating: If, after reheating, your pasta is a little dry, add a splash of sauce or even a little water, then cover with foil and warm it gently for a couple more minutes.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Baked ziti with meat sauce in a casserole dish.
Print

Baked Ziti with Meat Sauce Recipe

This Baked Ziti with Meat Sauce is an easy pasta recipe that layers ziti with ricotta and homemade tomato-meat sauce. This make-ahead friendly dish is a great crowd pleaser that freezes well.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Halal
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 6 servings
Calories 657kcal

Ingredients

For the meat sauce:

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 lb. ground beef
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 1 can crushed tomatoes 28-ounce
  • 1 tablespoon red wine vinegar
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/2 teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
  • 1/4 teaspoon ground cumin optional
  • 1/4 teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • 1/4 cup fresh basil torn

For the pasta:

  • 1 pound ziti pasta
  • 1 tablespoon kosher salt

To Assemble The Baked Ziti:

  • 1 cup ricotta cheese homemade or store bought
  • 1 cup mozzarella cheese grated
  • 1/4 cup fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Pre-heat the oven to 375°F (190°C).
  • To make the meat sauce: Heat a tablespoon of oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Place the ground beef and cook for 8-10 minutes, stirring often. You would have to break the large pieces of meat as it is cooking.
  • Add the onions and cook, stirring often, until they are translucent, 7-8 minutes. Add tomatoes, garlic, red wine vinegar, red pepper flakes, cumin, salt and pepper. Bring it to a simmer and continue to cook, stirring occasionally, until it thickens, 10-12 minutes. Turn off the heat and stir in the fresh basil.
  • Cook the pasta: In the meantime, bring a large pot of water to a boil. Add 1 tablespoon of salt and ziti. Cook until it is al dente, 8-9 minutes. Drain the pasta and set aside.
  • To assemble: Spread a thin layer (approximately 3-4 tablespoons) of the meat sauce at the bottom of a large (oven-proof) casserole dish (both 9X13 or 9X11 would work). Place half of the ziti onto the sauce and spread it all over the bottom of the dish. Pour half of the meat and tomato sauce over it. Place 1/2 cup of the ricotta cheese in dollops evenly on the meat sauce.
  • Spread the remaining ziti evenly as a second layer. Pour the remaining meat sauce over the ziti and spread evenly using a spatula. Spread the rest of the ricotta cheese in dollops on top. Sprinkle the top with shredded mozzarella cheese.
  • Bake it (uncovered) in the oven for 30 minutes or until the cheese on top turns golden brown.
  • Sprinkle it with fresh parsley and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This baked ziti recipe serves 6 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storing leftovers: Bring them to room temperature, place them in an airtight container, and store them in the fridge for up to 2 days. 
  • Freezing: I recommend freezing it before baking the dish.  To do so, bring the baked ziti to room temperature and tightly cover the casserole dish with stretch film and aluminum foil tightly to prevent freezer burn. Keep it in the freezer for up to 3 months. 
  • Thawing: Let it thaw in the fridge overnight, a day before you are ready to serve. Bake it as directed in the recipe. Keep in mind that it might take just a few minutes longer, but you are good to go once the cheese is golden brown.

Nutrition

Calories: 657kcal | Carbohydrates: 66g | Protein: 33g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Cholesterol: 89mg | Sodium: 1768mg | Potassium: 795mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 1738IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 234mg | Iron: 3mg

Make Ahead, Freezing & Reheating Instructions

Make ahead: One of my favorite things about this layered pasta dish is that you can assemble it a day in advance and keep it in the fridge. However, be sure to let it fully cool and cover it tightly with stretch film before placing it in the fridge for up to 24 hours before baking.

Alternatively, you can make the meat sauce a day in advance, quickly cook the pasta, and assemble on the day you are ready to serve.

Storing leftovers: Any leftovers of this baked pasta and meat sauce recipe will keep fresh in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3-4 days.

Freezing: When it comes to freezing, you have two options:

  1. Before baking: If you want to make a batch and store it in the freezer for dinner later, assemble it as directed in the recipe, then bring it to room temperature, and tightly cover the entire casserole dish with plastic wrap and aluminum foil (both layers are recommended to prevent freezer burn). Keep it in the freezer for up to 3 months.
  2. After it is baked: While it is not my favorite, you can freeze the baked version as well. Just keep in mind that the pasta’s texture can be a bit mushy after thawing.

Thawing: Let it thaw overnight in the fridge, then bake as directed in the recipe. It might take just a few minutes longer, but you are good to go once the cheese is golden brown.

Reheating: You can reheat your cooked, baked ziti casserole in a preheated 300°F (150°C) oven for 10-15 minutes or until it is warmed through.

What to Serve With Baked Ziti

Personally, all this classic baked ziti recipe needs is a simple green salad, such as my 15-minute Spring Mix Salad.

However, there are many other options. Some of my favorites are as follows:

Bread: The combination of pasta and bread is a classic for a reason. They are delicious together. I usually serve it with my Air Fried Garlic Bread or a loaf of Crusty Artisan Bread on the side.

Vegetables: I  love serving seasonal roasted or steamed vegetables with any of my pasta dishes. Any seasonal vegetables would work, but if you need inspiration, my Butter Garlic Green Beans, Sauteed Eggplant, or Steamed Asparagus would be a great pairing with this pasta bake.

FAQs

Can I make baked ziti without ricotta?

Technically, yes, but I really don’t recommend skipping it. The ricotta is what makes the layers creamy and gives the dish that classic, cozy texture.

Should baked ziti be covered while baking?

I tested this recipe both ways and found that covering the ziti while it was baking was unnecessary. Since both the pasta anthe d meat sauce are mostly cooked, all we needed was for the cheese to fully melt and the flavors to come together. Covering it made the process longer. So, no, you do not need to cover your ziti when baking.

Can I use penne instead of ziti?

Yes. Any tube-shaped pasta, like penne or rigatoni, works well because the sauce gets inside the pasta, making every bite extra creamy.

Can I make this meatless?

Yes. To make it vegetarian, simply omit the meat and use quick-cooking veggies like spinach or mushrooms instead.

How long does baked ziti last in the fridge?

Once it cools, transfer leftovers to an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to 3-4 days.

How long to cook baked ziti?

Bake the casserole at 375°F (190°C) for about 30 minutes, or until the cheese is melted and the top is golden.

More Pasta Recipes You Might Like

If you enjoyed this baked pasta recipe, here are a few more cozy pasta dishes I think you might also enjoy:

  • If you prefer a vegetarian version of this recipe, try my Eggplant Baked Ziti recipe. It is just as creamy and delicious, and made without any meat.
  • For a quick and budget-friendly weeknight pasta dinner, try my Ground Beef Stroganoff Recipe. It skips the canned soup and uses fresh mushrooms for a richer, homemade stroganoff sauce, and it comes together in about 30 minutes.
  • For a different twist on pasta night, try my Turkish Pasta. It’s a viral version inspired by Turkish manti, made with ground beef, a creamy garlic yogurt sauce, and a paprika butter drizzle.
  • And if you’re craving a classic, my Spaghetti Bolognese is a faster, weeknight-friendly take on traditional bolognese.


This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baked-ziti/feed/ 27
Homemade Vegetable Beef Soup https://foolproofliving.com/vegetable-beef-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegetable-beef-soup/#comments Thu, 14 Feb 2019 13:51:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15865 Here I am sitting at my desk writing this and it is snowing outside. When the weather is this cold…]]>

Here I am sitting at my desk writing this and it is snowing outside. When the weather is this cold the only thing I want is a big bowl of hearty soup and this Homemade Vegetable Beef Soup recipe fits the bill.

Packed with veggies, this old fashioned hearty beef soup comes together in one-pot in less than an hour and is a perfect soup/stew recipe to feed a crowd. I usually serve it with savory corn muffins or my crusty no knead bread for a meal to make us feel full and satisfied.

A bowl of vegetable beef soup is photographed from the top view as a woman is placing it on the table.

Recipe Ingredients

To me, this beef soup is the dictionary definition of a cold winter night dinner. As its name suggests, the ingredients can be divided into two categories: Beef and vegetables.

Recipe ingredients in small bowls from the top view

Best cut of Beef for this soup:

In terms of meat, you can use stew meat or do what I did and buy the same amount of chuck roast and cut it into small cubes yourself. Here is an informative article as to why it is better to do so.

Additionally, I find that the best cuts of meat to use in vegetable soup with meat are chuck shoulder, chuck roast, or top chuck. So look for whatever is available and within your price range when you are in the market.

Vegetables:

In terms of vegetables, I used onions, carrots, celery, diced tomatoes, Yukan gold potatoes (or red potatoes), fresh green beans and frozen or blanched peas.

With that being said, you can use whatever vegetables you have in your fridge. Next time, I plan on adding some cabbage and corn instead of green beans and peas. During the fall, you can also swap potatoes with butternut squash.

For the most part, you can mix and match vegetables as you please. However, when using mixed vegetables, I recommend keeping an eye on the cooking times as they may vary from one vegetable to another.

You can use frozen vegetables too, but the cooking time might end up being a bit longer.

Seasoning and Spices:

I kept the amount of seasoning in the recipe below to a minimum by only using thyme and a few bay leaves, and finishing it off with some fresh parsley.

A good way to add more flavor to this beef and vegetable soup is to add in some of your favorite spices. I personally love cumin, coriander, Italian Seasoning, and a few red pepper flakes in this recipe.

Additionally, if you are serving this on a cold day like today and don’t mind the heat, you can add in jalapeno peppers and a teaspoon of hot chili powder.

How to make vegetable beef soup:

The process of making it has four parts.

Person pat drying and seasoning beef
  1. Prep the meat: Pat-dry and season the beef with salt and pepper. This is a crucial step for browning the beef and creating flavor so don’t skip it. If you have time, you can do this a day in advance. Then sear the beef with a little bit of oil in a large pot (Preferably a heavy bottom pot like a Dutch oven). I recommend doing this in three batches as you do not want to crowd the pan.
    Here, you do not need the beef to cook fully. Rather, you want them to be lightly browned on the outside. Once your meat is pre-cooked, place it on a plate, cover with foil, and set aside.
Person showing how to make this recipe in four steps
  1. Cook the Veggies: Sauté onions, carrots, and celery (also known as mirepoix) with a wooden spoon scraping the bottom of the pan to get all the bits and pieces of the meat in medium-high heat.
  2. Add the rest of the veggies and stock: Add in tomatoes, potatoes, fresh thyme, bay leaf, and stock. As you will see in the recipe below, I used chicken stock (this homemade chicken stock is my go-to recipe). I find that beef broth to be too rich in a beef stew soup. However, you can use whichever you want.
    After adding the stock, put the lid on, bring it to a boil, reduce heat to medium-low, and let it simmer for 20-30 minutes. The stew meat and potatoes will soften as they cook.

Alternatively, you can use a combination of stock and water as well. In terms of liquid to vegetable & beef ratio, I used 4 cups of liquid as I wanted my beef and vegetable soup to have a thicker texture. However, if you would rather have a soupy texture, you can add an additional cup of water.

  1. Add in the veggies that cook fast & simmer: Finally, add in green beans and frozen peas. We add them in at the last minute as they cook faster compared to the other vegetables. Just like that, in less than an hour, you end up with a big pot of fulfilling, heartwarming, and healthy vegetable beef soup.
Learn how to make homemade beef soup scratch. Made in one pot and ready in less than 1 hour.

RELATED: If you are a fan of vegetable and meat soups, you might also like my Vegetable Beef Barley Soup and Chicken Vegetable Soup recipe. It is very similar to this one but made with chicken instead.

A bowl of homemade veg beef soup garnished with parsley.

What to serve with this recipe

Here are some ideas to serve with your beef vegetable soup:

  • A Loaf of Crusty Bread (Or French Baguette): Try it with a loaf of crusty bread such as my No Knead Bread. With its rich tomato base, I honestly cannot imagine a better soup to dunk your bread in.
  • Cornbread Muffins: As you can see in the photos, I served my vegetable beef stew soup with cornbread muffins. I usually make a batch of these muffins and keep them in the freezer during the winter months to serve with soups and chilis. Flavored with scallions and cheddar cheese, these go so well with anything broth-y.
  • Bulgur Pilaf: If you prefer to serve it with something starchy, you can make my mom’s Bulgur Pilaf recipe. She used to make her bulgur pilaf with lentils, which would go well with this soup. However, if you want you can omit lentils.
  • Wild Rice: If you want something heartier, try serving it with my Wild Rice Pilaf.
  • A Simple Salad: You can also serve your veg beef soup with a simple Spring Green Mix Salad. A few ideas from the archives could be this Brussels Sprout Kale Salad, Kale and Apple Slaw or this Kale Harvest Salad.

Expert Tips and Tricks

  • Can I make it a day ahead?: Yes, as a matter of fact, like most soups and stews, this beef soup tastes better in the next day. Therefore, you can totally make it a day ahead. As long as it is kept in an airtight container in the fridge, it would still be fresh up to 2 days.
  • Can I freeze it?: This soup freezes well. If you decide to freeze be sure to bring it to room temperature and place in airtight containers before placing it in the freezer. Defrost it in the fridge a day before you are ready to serve.
  • Can I make this veg beef soup in a Slow Cooker?: You most certainly can. Here is the recipe: Crockpot Vegetable Beef Soup
  • Can I make it with Ground Beef instead of stew meat?: Yes, you can. To do so, sauté ground beef (I use 85% lean ground beef) over medium heat by breaking big chunks of meat using a wooden spoon. Cook until the meat is no longer pink. Remove from the pan and follow the rest of the recipe exactly as it is. You will put the pre-cooked ground meat exactly when I placed the beef stew back in the pot in the recipe below. Ground Beef Vegetable Beef soup will cook slightly faster (sometime between 25-30 minutes). Once your potatoes are fork tender you can add in the rest of the vegetables (green beans and peas). Once they are cooked (should be no longer than 10 minutes), your vegetable beef stew soup should be ready to serve.
  • Red wine: Some versions of this beef vegetable soup use some red wine and I think it is a great addition. It definitely makes the soup richer. If you want you can add in a quarter cup of red wine when adding the chicken stock.

As these freezing cold temperatures continue, I hope you put this somewhat quick vegetable beef soup recipe on your list of comfort foods and give it a try. If you do so, be sure to take a picture and share it with me on social media. I’d love to see your creations.

Other Soup Recipes You Might Like

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Hearty Vegetable Beef Soup recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

person serving homemade vegetable beef soup
Print

Vegetable Beef Soup Recipe

Feeling the cold in your bones? Then you have to try this Old Fashioned Vegetable Beef Soup to warm your heart. This is one of those clean-your-fridge recipes that is packed with all kinds of veggies and tender chunks of beef cooked in a rich broth. Ready in less than an hour and freezes perfectly.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 454kcal

Ingredients

For the Beef:

  • 2 pounds beef stew meat cut into 1-inch cubes (such as chuck roast)
  • 1 ½ teaspoons Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil divided

For the Soup:

  • 1 teaspoon olive oil
  • 2 medium onions chopped – approximately 1 cup
  • 5 carrots peeled and sliced ½-inch thick slices – approximately 1 cup
  • 5 stalks of celery chopped – approximately 1 cup
  • 2 cloves of garlic minced
  • 1 can diced tomatoes (28 oz.)
  • 1 pound Yukan Gold potatoes cut into 1/2-inch cubes
  • 3 sprigs of fresh thyme
  • 1 bay leaf
  • 4 cups low-sodium or homemade chicken or beef stock
  • 1 cups water
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 ½ cups fresh green beans
  • 1 cup frozen peas
  • ¼ cup chopped fresh parsley as garnish

Instructions

  • For the beef: Using paper towels, pat-dry the stew meat. Salt and pepper in all sides and set aside. Heat one tablespoon of olive oil in a large heavy bottom pot in medium-high heat. Once it is sizzling hot, add in half of the seasoned beef and cook for 3 minutes on each side. (The beef will not fully be cooked)
    Transfer to a plate. Repeat the same steps with the rest of the olive oil and meat. Transfer the second batch to the plate and cover it with aluminum foil. Do not wash the pot.
  • To make the soup: Heat olive oil in the now-empty pan in medium-high heat. Add in onion, carrots, and celery. Using a wooden spoon, cook the vegetables, scraping the bits and pieces of meat at the bottom of the pan, until they are translucent, 8-10 minutes.
  • Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
  • Add in the tomatoes, potatoes, thyme, and bay leaf. Give it a stir.
  • Transfer the semi-cooked beef into the pot. Pour the stock and water over everything, sprinkle it with salt and pepper, and give it a stir.
  • Turn down the heat to medium, put the lid on, bring it to a boil and then let it simmer for 15 minutes.
  • Add in the green beans and frozen peas and cook until green beans are cooked, but still firm, for 10-15 minutes more. Fish out the bay leaf.
  • When ready to serve, ladle into bowls and garnish with fresh parsley.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 10 cups of soup ideal for serving 6 adults. The nutritional values listed are per serving.
  • Cut of meat: I listed it as stew meat but you can buy a 2 lbs chuck roast or brisket and cut it yourself into 1/2 to 1-inch cubes.
  • Make it in a slow cooker: Want to make this in a crock pot instead? Then check out my Slow Cooker Vegetable Beef Soup recipe
  • Freezing Instructions: This dish freezes well. If you prefer to do so, once it comes to room temperature, place it in an airtight container, and close it tightly with a lid. A day before you are ready to serve, let it thaw in the fridge.
  • Make Ahead Instructions: Like most soups and stews, this beef soup taste better in the next day. Therefore, you can totally make it a day ahead. As long as it is kept in an airtight container in the fridge, it would still be fresh for up to 2 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 454kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 43g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 99mg | Sodium: 1237mg | Potassium: 1486mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 9196IU | Vitamin C: 45mg | Calcium: 113mg | Iron: 6mg

This recipe and post have been updated with new information, photos, and a quick how to video to help you further as you make it in your kitchen in February 2019. It was originally published on December 2017. No changes were made to the originally published recipe.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegetable-beef-soup/feed/ 27
Oven Baked Meatballs and Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-meatball-potato-bake/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-meatball-potato-bake/#comments Sat, 27 Jan 2018 04:32:31 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=16075 It is hard to believe that it has been over 5 years since the last time I visited Turkey. The…]]>

It is hard to believe that it has been over 5 years since the last time I visited Turkey. The plan was to go last summer, but life happened and I couldn’t make the trip. I plan on going this summer, but between my work and personal commitments, I still don’t know if I can commit to a few weeks of being away.

A half eaten Turkish Meatball Potato Bake is photographed from the

As you can imagine, I miss my family, friends, the house that I grew up in, and of course, the food. In the meantime, I am keeping in touch with my loved ones through Skype and the food via a few of my favorite YouTubers from Turkey.

A woman is photographed from the top view as she is getting ready to place a plate of Turkish meatball potato bake.

Speaking of YouTubers, I am currently obsessed with Refika’nin Mutfagi. She is a Turkish chef with a cooking show on one of the national channels in Turkey. She also has a YouTube channel with the same name, where she teaches her viewers how to cook all the while (mostly) making some of the classic Turkish recipes that stood the test of time.

Last year, she shared the recipe for this Oven Baked Meatballs and Potatoes with the ingredients found in the US supermarkets, but now I am ready to show you how to make it.

About This Meatball Potato Bake Recipe:

Before I talk about the details of the recipe, I want to be honest and upfront about the fact that this recipe requires some advance preparation. It is by no means difficult to make, but you would have to plan ahead and set aside ample time to make it.

The process of making this recipe has two folds:

First – Prep Your Turkish Meatballs Mixture:

I have already published a whole blog post and a quick video on how to make Turkish Meatballs. Feel free to visit that post to get the recipe and read through my tips and tricks. I recommend prepping the meatball mixture (without rolling the balls) a day in advance and keeping it in the fridge until you are ready to assemble this dish. Doing so will not only help you save on time, but also allow the ingredients to mingle and bring out the flavors in them.

Second – Prep the potatoes (also The Best Potatoes to Use for Baked Meatballs):

After several tries, I found that Yukon Gold potatoes deliver the best results for this recipe. On my first try, I used Russet potatoes. Sadly, even after an hour and half into baking in the oven, they were not cooked. On the other hand, Yukon Gold potatoes delivered a smooth, almost buttery texture that matched beautifully with the meatballs.

Additionally, as you are getting your potatoes, I recommend hand picking them to make sure that they are similar in size. This way, once they are arranged in the baking dish, they will cook evenly and have a uniformed look.

As you are slicing the potatoes, be sure to cut them as equally as possible. I sliced mine in ½-inch thick slices. For the 10-inch baking dish I used, I used 17 slices in the outer section and 4 slices in the middle section. Since I wanted it to look aesthetically pleasing and food photography-worthy, I didn’t use the smaller pieces. Rather, I cut them into small cubes and placed them in a plastic bag to use them for later.

A freshly baked Turkish meatball potato bake is photographed right after it came out of the oven from the top view.

The Toppings and the Tomato Sauce:

Once you assemble the meatball and potatoes, you top them off with sliced fresh tomatoes, minced garlic, and peppers. Next, you drizzle it with ¾ cup of tomato sauce and water mixture. On my first few tries, I used more of this liquid mixture and ended up with the juices at the bottom of my oven. I know that it is tempting to put more liquid in there, but it is important to know that the meatballs will also release their juices as they bake.

The last touch is a few tablespoons of cubed butter. My biggest advice to you is to not skip this step as I think butter is the killer touch that takes this dish to the next level.

How Long Do You Bake Meatballs in the Oven?

Once you have your meatballs and potatoes assembled and topped off with all the goodies, cover it first with parchment paper and then with aluminum foil. Doing so will help bake everything evenly without burning the meatballs and potatoes. After 55 minutes in a preheat 450 F degree oven, remove them to brown the top of the dish in the last 20 minutes.

Now, I know that it takes a long time. And to be honest, one of the reasons why I made this several tries was to find a quicker way to bake this dish. I tried thinner slices of potatoes and meatballs as well as other types of potatoes. However, none of my trials gave me quicker results. In the end, I had to accept the fact that good things take time.

Two bowls of Turkish meatball potato bake are photographed from the top view.

Tips On Making It Ahead and Freezing:

I hope you agree that this is an impressive dish to serve when you are entertaining. If you are planning to serve it to your guests, you can assemble the meatballs and potatoes in advance, cover it tightly with plastic wrap, and keep it in the fridge a day in advance or freeze a week or two before you are ready to serve.

If you choose to freeze, let it thaw overnight in the fridge a day before. On the day of, simply top it with the toppings, drizzle it with the tomato sauce-water mixture, and bake as directed.

Other Dinner Recipes You Might Like:

Turkish Meatball Potato Bake is photographed from the top view before it goes into the oven.
Print

Oven Baked Meatballs and Potatoes

Recipe for Oven Baked Meatballs and Potatoes Sliced Yukon Gold potatoes lined with Turkish meatballs, topped off with peppers, tomatoes, garlic, parsley, drizzled with tomato sauce, and baked in the oven for perfection. A crowd pleaser that is also esthetically pleasing to the eye. This recipe is adapted (with changes) from Refika'nin Mutfagi's Patates Kofte Dizme recipe.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Turkish
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 269kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 serving of Turkish Meatballs
  • 5-6 medium size Yukon Gold potatoes* washed under called water (no need to peel)
  • 2 teaspoon kosher salt divided
  • ½ cup cherry tomatoes sliced thinly
  • ½ cup peppers sliced thinly
  • 3 cloves of garlic minced
  • ½ cup of Italian parsley chopped plus more as garnish at the end
  • 2 tablespoons butter cut into small cubes
  • ½ cup tomato sauce
  • ¼ cup water

Instructions

  • Pre-heat the oven to 450 F degrees.
  • Prep your Turkish meatballs as directed in the recipe. Roll them into balls. For a 10-inch plate that is 2-inches wide, you will need 21 meatballs.
  • Slice each potato into 1/2 -inch thick slices. Season each slice with 1 1/2 teaspoons of kosher salt.
  • Place a slice of potato in the palm of your hand and put a meatball on top. Shape the meatball in a way that will be similar to the size of the potato. Place it on a large plate and continue with the rest of the potato slices and meatballs.
  • Arrange the potato slices and meatballs like I did in the video above, starting from the outer corners and ending in the middle. For a 10-inch plate, you should have 17 meatballs+potatoes and 3-4 in the middle.
  • Garnish with cherry tomatoes, peppers, garlic, and parsley. Spread cubed butter on top.
  • Mix tomato sauce, water, and rest of the salt in a cup. Pour the mixture over the meatballs and potatoes.
  • Cover it first with parchment paper and then with aluminum foil. Bake in the preheated oven for 55 minutes. Then remove the parchment paper and aluminum foil and bake for another 20 minutes.
  • Sprinkle it with more parsley and serve.

Video

Notes

  • The dish that I used is an oven-proof 10-inch pie dish that is 2 inches deep.
  • Be sure to pick potatoes that are similar in size.
  • For freezing instructions please read the blog post.
  • The timing listed above doesn’t reflect the time it requires to prep the meatballs.

Nutrition

Calories: 269kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 34mg | Sodium: 345mg | Potassium: 979mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 195IU | Vitamin C: 49mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-meatball-potato-bake/feed/ 38
Turkish Meatballs (Kรถfte) https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-meatballs/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-meatballs/#comments Tue, 23 Jan 2018 00:17:57 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15990 My mother was a working mom. For all of her adult life, she went to work at 8 in the…]]>

My mother was a working mom. For all of her adult life, she went to work at 8 in the morning and came back at 6 each evening. Every day, after she walked into the house, she put on her apron and called me into the kitchen so that we could start cooking together. It was my favorite time of the day. She was the chef, and I was the apprentice.

In my younger years, I was responsible for salads. But once I reached my teenage years, she taught me how to make some of the more complicated dishes. This recipe for Turkish meatballs, or as we call them, köfte, was the first grown-up dish I learned from her. 

Even now, many years later, every time I make these, the smell that fills my kitchen reminds me of those magical days of my childhood.

About This Turkish Meatball Recipe

If you have ever been to Turkey, you know that Turks love their meatballs. It is our version of a go-to weeknight dinner, as it is quick and easy to make and requires only a few ingredients. 

Now, you might be wondering: how are they different from your usual American-style meatballs? 

Unlike American-style meatballs, which are often baked or simmered in tomato sauce and served with pasta, Turkish meatballs (köfte) are typically pan-fried or grilled, shaped into small, slightly flattened patties, and enjoyed with rice, bulgur pilaf, fresh salad, or bread. 

They use fewer fillers, relying mainly on ground meat, onion, and warm spices such as cumin, coriander, red pepper flakes, and black pepper for flavor, with parsley added for freshness.

Ingredients for Turkish Meatballs

Now, you might look at the recipe below and tell me that there are more than “just a few ingredients,” and you would be right. Although authentic Turkish meatballs are typically made with ground beef, onion, stale bread, egg, salt, and pepper, my mother would also always add garlic, cumin, and parsley. 

Ingredients for the Turkish kofte recipe from the top view.

You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but below are a few helpful information from my recipe testing:

Ground beef: I prefer using 85% lean and 15% fat organic ground beef, which is usually how it is sold in most supermarkets. However, if you have a local butcher, you can ask them to grind it fresh for you and add a bit more fat, somewhere around 80% lean ground beef to 20% fat. 

Alternatively, you can also use half ground beef and half ground lamb, which gives the meatballs a richer taste.

Baking soda: Adding a pinch of baking soda is something I learned from my mom. It was her little secret for making the most tender Turkish meatballs. Just a small amount helps the kofte hold their shape while remaining soft, tender, and juicy. And don’t worry, you won’t taste the baking soda in the finished dish.

Breadcrumbs: You can use regular, seasoned, or panko breadcrumbs. Through testing, I found that about half a cup is just right. Using too little can result in a slightly loose meat mixture, while using too much can make the meatballs too dense. For a gluten-free version, swap the breadcrumbs with two tablespoons of chickpea flour.

Spices: The traditional Turkish kofte spice mix is simple: cumin, kosher salt, and freshly ground black pepper.

That alone gives the meatballs their signature taste, but you can add more flavor by also adding dried thyme, coriander, chili powder, and red pepper flakes (traditionally Urfa biber or Aleppo pepper) for a bit of heat.

Onion: A small white or yellow onion helps tenderize the meat, but the trick is to grate the onion and then squeeze out the liquid using a strainer. I know it is an extra step, but removing the juices prevents meatballs from falling apart or turning soggy.

Alternatively, you can use a finely chopped onion, but it won’t blend in as seamlessly into the meatball mixture.

Though not traditional, red onion can also be used, but your meatballs would have a slightly sweeter onion flavor.

Garlic: I usually mince the garlic cloves as finely as possible so it blends right into the meat. If you don’t have fresh garlic on hand, you can use ½ teaspoon of garlic powder. 

Herbs (optional): Fresh Italian parsley is the most common herb you’ll find in köfte. You can also try adding a little fresh dill or mint.

How To Make This Recipe – Step-by-Step Instructions

A collage of images showing onion grated and then strained.

Step 1 – Prep the onion and garlic: Using the large holes of a box grater, shred the onion right over a strainer. Then press out the extra juice with the back of a spoon or with your hands. 

It might feel like an extra step, but it makes all the difference, as too much liquid will make the mixture fall apart. Mince the garlic as finely as possible so it melts right into the meat. 

Person mixing Turkish meatball mixture.

Step 2 – Mix: In a large bowl, combine the grated onion with the ground beef, bread crumbs, garlic, egg, baking soda, parsley, and spices. I always mix gently with my hands, because it helps me feel when everything is evenly blended without overworking the meat.

Raw kofte on a sheet pan and then shown while cooking.

Step 3 – Shape the meatballs and let them rest: Divide the mixture into 15 even portions, about two to three tablespoons each. Roll into balls, then flatten them slightly between your palms. That’s the classic Turkish way. A little olive oil on your hands makes this easier and keeps the mixture from sticking.

Cover and let the meatballs sit in the fridge for at least an hour. 

This was another tip I learned from my mom. Letting the meatballs rest helps the spices and onion tenderize the ground beef, making it even more delicious.

Step 4 – Cook the köfte: A grill pan works wonderfully for cooking the meatballs, but a cast-iron skillet or a non-stick skillet works just as well. And if it’s summertime, I would recommend grilling them outside. 

No matter which method you use, the trick is to cook the kofte for 7-8 minutes while turning every few minutes and gently pressing them down with the back of a spatula as they cook. 

Doing so prevents them from burning and gives you that even browning on the outside while keeping the inside juicy.

Step 5 – Rest before serving: Once the meatballs are cooked through, transfer them to a platter, cover loosely with foil, and let them rest for a few minutes. Letting it rest locks in the juices so your köfte stays tender and moist instead of drying out.

Step 6 – Make the yogurt sauce (Optional): In my family, Turkish meatballs were almost always served with yogurt. Following in my mom’s footsteps, I like to serve it on top of my yogurt tahini sauce. It’s made with yogurt, tahini, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and pepper, and it beautifully balances the spices in the meatballs.

Turkish meatballs placed on a bed of tahini yogurt sauce and garnished with pine nuts and pomegranate.

Step 7 – Assemble and Garnish (Optional): Spread the tahini on a plate, top it off with a couple of meatballs, and garnish with pine nuts, pomegranate seeds, and some chopped parsley.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze

This Turkish meatball recipe is the ultimate Turkish meal prep dish, as it gets better as it sits and freezes beautifully. It is wonderful to have some stocked in your fridge/freezer for those nights when you need something quick and easy. 

Here is how I do it:

Make ahead: Shape the meatballs, place them on a parchment-lined baking sheet, cover with stretch film, and refrigerate for up to 24 hours.

Storing leftovers: Cooked köfte keeps well in an airtight container in the fridge for 3 to 4 days. You can enjoy them warm or cold. 

Reheat: The best way is on the stovetop with a splash of water in the pan. The steam warms them through while keeping them tender. You can also reheat them in a 300°F (149°C) oven for 5-10 minutes.

Freeze (raw or cooked):

  • Raw: Place the shaped meatballs on a parchment-lined sheet pan and freeze until firm. Once frozen, transfer them to a freezer bag or airtight container, layering with parchment. They’ll keep for up to 2 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge before cooking.
  • Cooked: Store in a freezer-safe container, pressing out as much air as possible to prevent freezer burn. They should last for about 2 months.

Expert Tips from My Family’s Turkish Kitchen

Even though making these Turkish beef meatballs is simple, a few small details can take them from good to unforgettable. These are the tips I picked up from my mom, her friends back in Turkey, and my own recipe testing:

  • Meat & fat ratio: Remember, fat is flavor, and a little bit more fat makes these meatballs even more delicious.  Go for ground beef with about 85% lean meat and 15% fat. If you can get it freshly ground at a butcher, that would be great as well.
  • Baking soda: A pinch of baking soda is one of those tricks that’s been passed down in my family. It helps the meatballs retain their shape and remain tender, preventing them from falling apart.
  • Mix gently: Always mix the ingredients with your hands so you can feel when everything is integrated, without overworking the meat. Overmixing can make the köfte tough instead of tender.
  • Rest time: If you can, let the mixture chill overnight. All the flavors come together in the best way, and the texture firms up. Even an hour in the fridge makes a difference.
  • Don’t rush straight from fridge to pan: One thing I’ve learned over the years is that cooking köfte (or any other meat for that matter) straight out of the fridge often leads to uneven results. Allowing the meatballs to rest at room temperature for about 20 minutes yields even cooking and tender meatballs.
  • Start with a hot pan: Take the time to heat your pan. A hot skillet sears the meat fast and cooks it evenly. To keep the köfte from burning, cook them over medium to medium-high heat and turn them every few minutes. 

What To Serve with Köfte (Turkish Meatballs)

One of the best things about Turkish meatballs is how versatile they are. You can serve them as part of a big family dinner, tuck them into a wrap, or pair them with your favorite sides for an easy weeknight meal. Here are some of my favorite ways to enjoy them:

  • Yogurt Sauces: Köfte and yogurt are a classic match. I love serving mine with my creamy Yogurt Tahini Sauce made with Greek yogurt or with this Tzatziki sauce for something extra refreshing.
  • Salads: Serve köfte with a quick salad for a lighter, protein-rich dinner. I like a light Turkish Shepherd Salad in summer, or a Spicy Ezme if I’m craving some heat. For something more filling, Piyaz (Turkish White Bean Salad) is a 10-minute dish I often add to the table.
  • Grains: In Turkey, köfte is almost always served with Rice with Vermicelli, which is light and fluffy, or Bulgar Pilaf, which is even more traditional. Either one makes the meal feel complete.
  • Bread & wraps: I love wrapping kofte in warm Lavash Bread with a spread of my Mediterranean Hummus, or stuffing them into soft Homemade Pita Bread with roasted veggies and yogurt sauce.
  • Drinks: For the most authentic Mediterranean experience, serve köfte with a cold glass of Ayran, Turkey’s beloved salty yogurt drink. It’s light, tangy, and the perfect way to cool down the spices in the meatballs.

FAQs

What’s the difference between Turkish köfte and meatballs?

Köfte are the Turkish version of meatballs, made with beef or beef-lamb, onion, breadcrumbs, and spices like cumin.

Can I make these with ground lamb, chicken, or turkey?

Yes, absolutely. In Turkey, a mix of beef and lamb is very common for köfte. If you’d like to try a lighter variation, my Chicken Kofta recipe and Zucchini Turkey Meatballs recipe use similar spices and ingredients for a delicious twist on this classic.

What sauce goes best with Turkish meatballs?

Yogurt-based sauces are the perfect pairing with these meatballs. Tzatziki, tahini yogurt sauce, or yogurt mint sauce all work beautifully with this Turkish classic.

Can I bake Turkish meatballs instead of frying?

While it is not traditional, you can bake them in the oven. Arrange them in a sheet pan lined with parchment paper, and bake them in a preheated 400°F (205°C) oven for about 15-20 minutes, turning halfway through.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Authentic Turkish Recipes to Try

If you loved this Turkish meatball recipe, here are a few other meat dishes from Turkish cuisine you might enjoy:

  • For another easy meatball recipe, try my Ground Chicken Kofta, which is light, juicy, and perfect for weeknights.
  • If you like bold and smoky flavors, Lamb Adana Kebab is a spicy ground meat kebab that’s a staple at Turkish grills.
  • For a comforting vegetable dish, try Turkish Stuffed Eggplant, an iconic eggplant recipe that is known as karniyarik.

For even more inspiration, check out our collection of over 60 Turkish Recipes, created for home cooks who want to explore Turkish cuisine.

This recipe was originally published in January 2018. It has been updated with more helpful information and step-by-step photos in September 2025.

Turkish Meatballs on a bed of tahini yogurt sauce
Print

Turkish Meatballs Kofte Recipe

Growing up in Turkey, Turkish Meatballs were a favorite in our house. Made with only a few ingredients, these spicy meatballs are my go-to recipe whenever I miss home. 
Course Dinner
Cuisine Turkish
Diet Halal
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Resting time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 40 minutes
Servings 15 meatballs
Calories 118kcal

Ingredients

For The Turkish Meatballs

  • 1 medium-size onion peeled
  • 1 pound ground beef 85% lean 15% fat, preferably freshly ground & organic
  • 1/2 cup breadcrumbs or panko breadcrumbs
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 large egg
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ¼ teaspoon baking soda
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
  • ¼ cup fresh Italian parsley chopped (optional)

To Serve (Optional for 4 servings)

  • 1 cup Tahini Yogurt Sauce
  • 2 tablespoons pine nuts
  • 2 tablespoons pomegranate arils
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Using a box shredder or a food processor, grate the onion. Pass it through a strainer to remove its juices.
    Person grating onion and straining the juice.
  • Transfer the onion to a large bowl. Add in the ground beef, breadcrumbs, garlic, egg, cumin, baking soda, salt and black pepper. If using, add in the Italian parsley into the bowl.
  • Use your hands to thoroughly mix. I usually mix it for 5-7 minutes to ensure that all the ingredients are thoroughly mixed.
    Showing a person mix meatball mixture.
  • Divide meatballs into 15 portions (like seen in the video and/or in the photo above)  and roll each portion into a small ball. Each ball should be somewhere between 2 ½ or 3 tablespoons. Lightly flatten each ball in the palm of your hands. Continue with the rest of the meat.
  • Cover it with stretch film and place in the fridge for an hour or overnight (no more than 24 hours.)
  • Heat 1 tablespoon olive oil in a 12-inch grill or cast iron pan until it is shimmering hot.
    A collage of images showing Turkish kofte raw and then cooked.
  • Add in the meatballs and cook for 7-8 minutes, turning them several times as they cook to prevent them from burning.  Use a spatula to lightly press as they cook.
  • If you have a smaller pan, you might have to do this in two batches.
  • Transfer cooked meatballs into a platter, cover with aluminum foil, and let it sit 5 minutes before serving.
  • If you prefer to serve like I did, spread a dollop of Tahini Yogurt Sauce at the bottom of a plate and add 3 meatballs in the middle. Garnish it with pine nuts, pomegranate arils, and chopped fresh parsley.
    Turkish beef meatballs in a plate garnished with fresh parsley.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 15 Turkish meatballs. The nutritional data below is per kofta and does not include the calories coming from the Tahini Yogurt Sauce.
  • Storing: Bring leftover kofte to room temperature and store in an airtght container for upto 3 days in the fridge.
  • Freezing: These meatballs freeze very well. Simply, make a big batch, shape it into balls, layer them between parchment papers in airtight containers, and freeze them for up to 2 months. A day before you are ready to serve, let them thaw in the fridge, and cook as directed.
  • Grill pan or cast iron skillet: As you can see in the video, I used a grill pan, but you can also use a cast iron skillet or better yet, come summertime, grill them outside.
  • Let them rest: The trick to prevent them from burning is to turn them every few minutes and gently press them with the back of a spatula as they cook. This way, both the inside and the outside of the meatballs will cook evenly. As in all meat dishes, after they are cooked, cover them with foil, and let them sit for a few minutes to make sure that all of their juices will remain in the meat.
  • I served my Turkish Meatballs with a dollop of Tahini Yogurt Sauce, but you can serve them with, pretty much, any starch as you like: Mashed potatoes, rice, pasta, quinoa, etc.

Nutrition

Calories: 118kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 32mg | Sodium: 239mg | Potassium: 128mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 123IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-meatballs/feed/ 30
Grilled Flank Steak Tacos https://foolproofliving.com/flank-steak-tacos/ https://foolproofliving.com/flank-steak-tacos/#comments Tue, 06 Jun 2017 12:16:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=14155 This post has been sponsored by American Greetings. All thoughts and opinions are my own. In today’s post, in the…]]>

This post has been sponsored by American Greetings. All thoughts and opinions are my own.

In today’s post, in the eve of Father’s day, I am treating all dads out there virtually with an out-of this world flank steak tacos recipe.

Recipe for Grilled Flank Steak Tacos with a foolproof flank steak marinade placed on a cutting boards

To be more precise, we are grilling flank steak and making tacos! And doing it with an easy-to-make yet delicious flank steak marinade. I love that flank steak is a rather inexpensive cut of meat and tastes so good when grilled.

With that being said, you can use this recipe to make flank tacos on the stovetop as well.

A tables set up with a greeting card - Steak Taco Marinade Recipe shared for Flank Steak Tacos
Learn How to Marinate flank steak for tacos

What is Flank Steak?

Before I talk about my go-to steak taco marinade, I want to talk to you about what is flank steak. The following comes from my favorite book about everything meat-related, Field Guide to Meat: How to Identify, Select, and Prepare Virtually Every Meat, Poultry, and Game Cut (affiliate link):

“The small, thin, tasty, and quick-cooking flank steak is cut from the flank primal. It is ideal for marinating and outdoor grilling over aromatic woods. The marinade can penetrate flank steak thoroughly without the meat losing its firm texture because it is relatively thin and porous.”

Flank steak tacos photographed on a cutting board - get the best beef taco marinade

The “flank primal” mentioned in the above statement lies on the underside the loin area (the belly area of the animal).

Also, here is a trivia for you – Another name for Flank Steak is London Broil.

Sliced steak on a cutting board Learn what is flank steak and another name for flank steak
Flank Steak Taco Recipe served on a cutting board in front of a woman at at table

How to Marinate Flank Steak for Tacos:

Even though it has a reasonable price-tag, flank steak can be a tougher cut of meat. My secret to turning it into a flavorful and tender dinner is using a steak taco marinade that I learned from a friend years ago. Throughout the years, I made a few changes to her original recipe to alter it for our taste. Nowadays, it is my go-to marinade for flank steak.

As you will see in the recipe below, it is a combination of vegetable oil, soy sauce, balsamic vinegar, garlic, lemon juice, and grainy mustard. I usually mix everything up in a large plastic bag (like Ziplock) and place the meat in there to let it marinate for at least 4 hours, or ideally, overnight. Keeping it in a plastic bag not only helps with the cleanup, but also takes less space in the fridge.

Best Way To Cook Flank Steak – Get Your Grill On!

As I mentioned earlier, I think flank steaks are best cooked on the grill. Though if you can’t get your grill on, below you will see instructions on how to cook flank steak on the stove as well.

I love grilling during this time of the year as (1) we love the outdoors and (2) I find that grilling delivers the most tender flank steak.

The very important thing when it comes to grilling is to make sure that your grill is very hot before you place the meat on it. Ideally, you want to cook it for only 3-4 minutes on each side for it to be medium. Once it is cooked, place it on a cutting board and cover it loosely with aluminum foil. Allow it to sit for 10 minutes to let the juices come back into the meat so that it will be moist and tender.

a man is reading a card

How To Make Steak Tacos

The initial plan was to grill the meat and serve it along with a big green salad with some fresh farm vegetables, but then Dwight suggested that we make tacos. Steak tacos sounded fantastic as I think this marinated flank steak is the best cut of meat for tacos.

To make steak tacos, I placed a few slices of the meat on top of a lightly warmed corn tortilla (if you want to make your own, check out my Homemade Corn Tortillas recipe) and topped it off with some pico de gallo, a dollop of guacamole, slices of cucumbers, and fresh cilantro.

How to Cook Flank Steak on The Stove

If you are making this steak tacos recipe during the wintertime or don’t feel like grilling, you can cook the flank steak on the stove. A cast-iron skillet is ideal for cooking steak as it can reach and preserve higher temperatures better than any other pan. Similar to grilling, it is ideal to make sure that your skillet is very hot before you place the meat on it.

To cook flank steak on the stove, remove the flank steak from the marinade and discard the marinade. Sear on the first side for 4-5 minutes. Using thongs, flip the steak and continue to until the interior meat is slightly less done than you want it to be when you eat it, 3-4 minutes for medium or 2-3 for medium-rare. Transfer the meat onto a cutting board, loosely cover with aluminum foil, and let it rest for 7-10 minutes. Slice it on bias against the grain.

flank steak tacos placed on a cutting board.

I know we are still a few weeks away, but starting with my own dad, I am wishing all the fathers out there a happy Father’s Day. I am sending you big virtual hugs. We can never thank you enough for all you do for us. ♥

If You Liked This Flank Steak Tacos Recipe, You Might Also Like:

Recipe for Grilled Flank Steak Tacos with a foolproof flank steak marinade that will wow everyone in your family.
Print

Grilled Flank Steak Tacos Recipe

Get your grill game on! We are making tacos. Topped off with fresh pico de gallo and guacamole, these easy-to-make Grilled Flank Steak Tacos are juicy, bright and super flavorful. Plus, as a part of the recipe I am sharing my foolproof works-every-time flank steak taco marinade recipe.
Course Main Dish
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Marinate time 8 hours
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 12 tacos
Calories 294kcal

Ingredients

For the marinade:

  • ½ cup vegetable oil I used grapeseed oil
  • 1/3 cup soy sauce
  • ¼ cup balsamic vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 ½ tablespoons Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 tablespoon grainy mustard
  • 5 cloves of garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
  • 1 ½ pounds flank steak

For pico de gallo:

  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes chopped
  • ½ red onion chopped
  • 2 cloves of garlic minced
  • ¼ cup red onion chopped
  • 2 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
  • 3 tablespoons fresh cilantro chopped
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ¼ teaspoon pepper

For the Guacamole:

  • ½ red onion chopped
  • 2 ripe avocados cut in cubes or mashed
  • 1 jalapeno pepper deseeded and chopped
  • 4-5 cherry tomatoes chopped (optional)
  • 2 cloves of garlic minced
  • Juice of a lime
  • ¼ teaspoon cumin
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ¼ teaspoon pepper

For the Tacos:

  • 12 small corn tortillas store-bought or homemade corn tortillas
  • 1 small cucumber thinly sliced
  • ¼ cup fresh cilantro with leaves torn as garnish

Instructions

  • To make the marinade, mix together all the ingredients in a plastic bag with a resalable mouth or an airtight container. Place the meat in the marinade, seal and place it in the fridge for at least 4 hours or overnight.
  • To make the pico de gallo, place all the ingredients in a bowl, season generously with salt and pepper and set aside.
  • To make the guacamole, place the red onion, avocado, jalapeno, tomatoes, garlic, and limejuice in a bowl. Season with cumin, salt and pepper. Give it a gently mix and set it aside.
  • When you are ready to serve, heat your grill until it is very hot, 10-15 minutes. Remove the meat from the plastic bag and discard the marinade. Place it on the grill grate and grill until well-seared and dark brown on one side, 4-5 minutes. Using thongs, flip the steak and continue to grill until the interior meat is slightly less done than you want it to be when you eat it, 3-4 minutes for medium or 2-3 for medium-rare. Transfer the meat onto a cutting board, loosely cover with aluminum foil, and let it rest for 7-10 minutes. Slice it on bias against the grain.
  • While the meat is resting, warm the corn tortillas on the grill until they are softened, 1 minute or so on each side.
  • When ready to assemble your tacos, place a few slices of meat at the bottom of a corn tortilla and top it off with a few tablespoons of guacamole and pico de gallo.
  • Garnish it with sliced cucumbers and cilantro leaves. Repeat the same process with the rest of the tacos and serve.

Nutrition

Calories: 294kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 34mg | Sodium: 638mg | Potassium: 537mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 197IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 53mg | Iron: 2mg

OTHER MEXICAN INSPIRED RECIPES YOU MIGHT ALSO LIKE

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/flank-steak-tacos/feed/ 7
Oxtail Macaroni Gratin https://foolproofliving.com/oxtail-macaroni-gratin/ https://foolproofliving.com/oxtail-macaroni-gratin/#comments Mon, 12 Jan 2015 16:26:38 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=5479 I have to admit – I have never cooked or intentionally eaten oxtail before. I knew that most people use…]]>

I have to admit – I have never cooked or intentionally eaten oxtail before. I knew that most people use it while making beef stock due to its high bone content, but I had never attempted to cook with it until I made this dish. With that being said, I have been thinking about making something with it for a while, as it is very popular and (shockingly!!?!) always available in the supermarkets of our small island, Virgin Gorda. I was told by some of the locals that oxtail is a popular meat type frequently used in Caribbean cooking, mostly in stews.

Casserole dish of Oxtail Macaroni Gratin

This Oxtail Macaroni Gratin recipe that I found in Mimi Thorisson’s new cookbook, A Kitchen in France, came in at a perfect time while I was looking for a creative way of making mac and cheese. It felt like shooting two birds with one stone.

Casserole dish of Oxtail Macaroni Gratin with a spoon on the side

If you are like me, and had never cooked with oxtails before, they come from the tails of cattle, a well-exercised muscle that is marbled with fat and high in jelatin-rich bone content. They release a ton of flavor when cooked for a long time, and therefore they are best for braising. Just like this recipe, a lot of French meat dishes use oxtail while creating a flavor base.

I have to say – this Oxtail Macaroni Gratin is like Mac and Cheese on “steroids”. It is a great alternative when you are looking for a way to make the good old mac & cheese more interesting and somewhat luxurious. It certainly is a crowd pleaser and perfect for a winter meal.

Ingredients for the recipe

This recipe has 3 components. This first part is cooking the oxtails. After being flavored with shallots and onions, they are cooked in red wine for 3 hours, or until tender. You are more than welcome to cook the meat a day in advance, especially if you are short on time. In fact in my opinion, it is best to do that, as the meat gets better as it rests.

Pasta served in wooden bowls

The second part is making the béchamel sauce. Mimi’s original recipe doesn’t have mushrooms in it, but I had some in the fridge and thought that it would be a nice addition. However, if you want you can omit mushrooms. Béchamel sauce in this recipe serves like glue made with butter, flour, milk, and chicken stock holding everything together while adding an additional layer of flavor.

The last component is putting everything together. To do that, all you have to do is to layer the meat (with its sauce), cooked elbow shaped macaroni, cheese, and béchamel sauce in two batches, and bake it in a 400-degree oven for 20-25 minutes. In the original recipe, Mimi suggests using the juices of the meat (after being reduced) as gravy on the side, but I chose to use all of it in the gratin.

recipe served in a bowl

Whether you want to impress your friends, or you are looking for a way to transform a classic, this Oxtail Macaroni Gratin is a great way to go. It sure is more complicated (and time consuming) than a regular mac & cheese dish, but certainly more rewarding. Not to mention, it is a perfect meal on a cold winter evening…

Oxtail Macaroni Gratin in a casserole dish with a wooden spoon on the side
Print

Oxtail Macaroni Gratin Recipe

Oxtail Gratin aka Oxtail Mac and Cheese: A scrumptious pasta dish made by mixing baked oxtails with bechamel sauce and pasta and baking it in the oven for perfection. This is your usual mac and cheese recipe taken to a whole new level. A great recipe when you are feeding a crowd.
Course Main
Cuisine Caribbean
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 4 hours
Total Time 4 hours 30 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 650kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoons of unsalted butter plus more for the baking dish
  • 2 pounds oxtails – cut into pieces
  • 1 large onion chopped
  • 1 small shallot chopped
  • 4 garlic cloves peeled and minced
  • 2 sprigs of fresh thyme
  • 1 bay leaf
  • 1/2 teaspoon salt
  • 1/2 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 bottle 750 ml red wine, such as Beaujolais*
  • 1 pound small elbow macaroni

For the béchamel sauce:

  • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil
  • 1 +4 tablespoons of unsalted butter divided
  • 8 ounces button mushrooms
  • 1/4 cup (1.25 ounces) all-purpose flour
  • 3/4 cup whole milk warm to touch
  • 1/2 cup chicken stock warm to touch
  • 1/2 teaspoon nutmeg freshly ground
  • 1/2 teaspoon salt
  • 1/2 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1- cup Gruyere cheese grated
  • 2 tablespoons Fresh Parsley chopped (optional)

Instructions

  • Pat-dry and season the oxtail pieces with salt and pepper on both sides. Set aside.
  • Heat butter in a Dutch oven (or any other heavy bottom pan with a lid). Add the meat and brown well, 4-5 minutes on each side.
  • Stir in the onion and shallot, and cook until translucent, 5 minutes or so. Add in the garlic, thyme sprigs, bay leaf, and wine. Bring it to a simmer.
  • Turn the heat down to low and cook until the beef is tender, 3-3 1/2 hours.
  • Remove the meat from the bones and roughly chop, if necessary. Fish out the bay leaf and thyme sprigs.
  • Transfer the meat into the pot and cook for 10-15 minutes in medium heat, or until the sauce thickens.
  • Half an hour before the meat is cooked, make the béchamel sauce. Start with heating the vegetable oil in a large non-stick skillet. Add in the mushrooms and cook, stirring occasionally, until some of the juices are absorbed, 7-8 minutes. Stir in the 1-tablespoon of butter and make sure it is melted and mixed within the mushrooms. (Here, butter serves as a gloss.) Transfer it to a plate and set aside. Do not wash the skillet.
  • In the same skillet, heat 4 tablespoons of butter until melted. Stir in the flour.
  • While whisking it constantly, gradually stir in the milk and chicken stock. Add in the nutmeg, salt and pepper, and cook, stirring constantly until the sauce thickens, 8-10 minutes.
  • Transfer the mushrooms (with its juices) into the sauce and give it a large stir.
  • Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil, add in the elbow macaroni and cook according to the package instructions. Drain and set aside.
  • Pre-heat the oven to 400 degrees.
  • To assemble: Butter an 8X11 ovenproof casserole dish with butter. Add a layer of half of the meat (with the sauce), half of the macaroni, half of the béchamel sauce, and sprinkle it with the half of the cheese. Repeat the same process with the second half.
  • Bake until it is golden on top, 20-25 minutes.
  • When ready to serve, sprinkle it with chopped parsley.

Notes

Note: You can substitute Beaujolais with a bottle of Pinot Noir, Chianti, or Burgundy.

Nutrition

Calories: 650kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 50g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Cholesterol: 153mg | Sodium: 604mg | Potassium: 312mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 377IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 232mg | Iron: 6mg

Adapted with minor changes from Mimi Thorisson’s cookbook A Kitchen in France.

Oxtail Macaroni Gratin
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/oxtail-macaroni-gratin/feed/ 12